


















































■ ; .. 






THE 

DUTCH LANGUAGE, LITERATURE, 

AND 

GRAMMAR. 



ALPHABETS. 



MOESO 
GOTHIC. 

A. C. 400. 



MODERN 

GOTHIC. 

A. C. 900. 



A 

e 
v 



g»n 



n 



K 

\ 

M 
II 

o 

K 
S 

T 
D 

a- 



x 



;h or x 



3 a 
IS f> 

or c- 

3D b 

$ it 

% X 

It h 

€ I 

M m 

ft » 
# 

<•&, <) 

C t 
® u 

m v 

£ x 

2e 

3 * 



ANCIENT 
ROMAN 
B.C. 486. 



A 

B 
C 
D 
E 
F 
G 

t 



U 
M 

N 

O 

r 

Q 
R 

s 



v 



X 



MODERN 
ROMAN. 

A. C. 500. 



A a 
B b 
Ccch 
D d 
E e 
F f 

H h 

Iiij 

JFJ 
K k 

L 1 

M m 

N n 

O o 

P p 

Qq 
R r 

S s 
T t 

U u 
Y v 
Ww 
X x 
Yy 
Z z 



ITALIC. 

A.C.1501 



ITALIC 
WRITING. 
A.C. 1501. 



*4 a 
B h 

C cch 
I) d 

E e 
F f 

Gg- 
H h 
Ii ij 

K k 
L I 
M m 
JT.n 
O o 
P p 

R r 

S s 

T I 

IT u 

r v 

X x 

ry 

z % 



3/ a 


M / 


G? c cA 


& </ 


& € 


2% J 


<y * *£ 



J 






I % 



r* 



J? 
f/ 



THE 

DUTCH GRAMMAR, 

PRECEDED BY 

AN HISTORICAL SKETCH 

OF THE 

ORIGIN vdJTD PRO 7RESS 

OF THE LANGUAGE OF THE N "HERLANDS , 

EMBRACING 

A LIST OF THE MOST CELEBRATED MMRLMDS WRITERS 
from the thirteenth to the present century; 

AND SOME 

SPECIMENS OF THE LANGUAGE 

OF 

EACH CENTURY WITHIN THAT PERIOD , 
WITH A LITERAL ENGLISH VERSION, 

A PRAXIS ON THE DUTCH GRAMMAR, 

BEING SPECIMENS OF DUTCH PROSE, 

SELECTED FROM MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY AUTHORS , 

WITH AN ENGLISH TRANSLATION ; 

AND APPENDIXES. 

BY 

s» si Ansa & a &» 

Nullum nomen naturaliter constitutum est, neque unquam, sicut subjecta res a na- 
ftura est, ita quoqse a nattira venienfe vocabulo nuncnpatnr. Sed hominum genus, 
•quod et ratione ct oratione viget, nomina posuif , caque quibus libuit literis syllabis- 
<que cotijungens, singulis subjectaium rerum substantiis dedif. 

BOETIUS, de Interp. 




ROTTERDAM: 
Printed for the author* 

MAY BE HAD OF 

MENSING & VAN WESTREENEX, 

ROTTERDAM; 

aid of other Principal Booksellers of the Netherlands 

1842. 



. >■ i 



(StDSt^ISEr^So 



Page. 

PREFACE XI. 

INTRODUCTION XIII. 

DUTCH GRAMMAR . . . . , 1. 

DUTCH ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION . . . — 

Letters — 

Alphabet 2. 

Sounds of the Letters 3. 

Sounds of the Single Vowels — 

Sounds of the United Vowels 5. 

Sounds of the Single Consonants 7. 

Sounds of the United letters ch and ij 12. 

General Observations on Dutch Pronunciation , Accent , and 

Spelling 13. 

DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 16. 

Derivation of Words — 

Primitive or Simple Words — 

Compound Words 17. 

Division of Words or the Parts of Speech 19. 

Articles — 

Nouns 20. 

Declension — 

Gender — 

Masculine — 

Feminine 21. 

Neuter 22. 

Nouns common to two or more genders 23. 

Formation of the Feminine of nouns 24. 



YI CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Number 25. 

General rules for forming the Plural — 

Case 29. 

Nominative — 

Genitive — 

Dative 30. 

Objective — 

Declension of the Article .... * — 

Declension of the Article and Noun ......... 31. 

Observations on the Cases of Nouns 32. 

Praxis on the Union of an Article and Two or More Nouns 33. 

Adjectives 34. 

Derivation and Formation of Adjectives — 

Declension of Adjectives 35. 

Observations on the Declension of Adjectives 36. 

Degrees of Comparison 39. 

Declension of the Comparative and Superlative of Adjectives 41. 

Numeral Adjectives . 42. 

Cardinal Numbers — 

Ordinal Numbers 43. 

Praxis on the Union of an Article , a Noun, and an Adjective — 

Pronouns 45. 

Personal Pronouns 46. 

Declension of Personal Pronouns 48. 

Declension of Personal Pronouns with zelf — 

Possessive Pronouns 49. 

Declension of Possessive Pronouns 50. 

Demonstrative Pronouns 52. 

Declension of Demonstrative Pronouns ........ — 

Declension of deze, dit; die, dat; gene) deceive; dezelfde — 

Relative Pronouns 57. 

Declension of Relative Pronouns 58. 

Interrogative Pronouns 59. 



C N T E N T S. VII 

Page. 

Praxis on the use of Pronouns 61. 

Verbs — 

Conjugation of Verbs 62. 

Moods 63. 

Participles 64. 

Tenses — 

Number 66. 

Person — 

Auxiliary Verbs 67. 

Conjugation of zullen — 

hebben — 

zijn or wexen . . 69. 

worden 71. 

Verbs Active 74. 

Regular Verbs — 

Conjugation of the Reg. Verb Active leeren . , . . . — 

Formation of Moods and Tenses 76. 

Irregular Verbs 79. 

Conjugation of the Irregular Verb bidden ...... 86. 

Verbs Passive 88. 

Conjugation of the Verb Passive geleerd %ijn .... 89. 

Reflective Verbs 92. 

Conjugation of Verbs Reflective — 

Neuter Verbs 94. 

Conjugation of Verbs Neuter 95. 

Impersonal Verbs 96. 

Verbs used Interrogatively and Negatively 97. 

Conjugation of Compound Verbs — 

Praxis on the use of Verbs 101. 

Adverbs 103. 

Praxis on the use of Adverbs 106. 

Prepositions 107. 

Particles — 



VIII CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Initial Particles 107. 

Terminational Particles 109. 

Principal Prepositions 110. 

Praxis on the Prepositions 112. 

Conjunctions 113. 

Praxis on the Conjunctions 114. 

Interjections 115. 

Praxis on the Interjections fc 116. 

DUTCH SYNTAX 117. 

Sentence — 

Explicative Sentence — 

Interrogative Sentence — 

Imperative Sentence 118. 

Simple Sentence — 

Compound Sentence — 

Concord 119. 

Government — 

Rule I. Concord of Article and Noun .... 120. 

„ II. Omission of the Article — 

„ III. Ellipsis of the Article 121. 

IV. Two or more Nouns referring to one ob- 
ject 122. 

„ V. Two or more Nouns referring to different 

objects , 123. 

w VI. Concord of Adjective and Noun . . . 124. 

„ VII. The Adjective and Noun w r ith xijn or 

worden 125. 

„ VIII. Adjectives governing certain Cases . . — 

„ IX. Adjectives requiring certain Prepositions . 126. 

„ X. Ellipsis of the Adjective 127. 

„ XI. Ellipsis of the Noun 128. 

„ XII. The Comparative degree requires dan . — 

„ XII I. The Superlative degree and the genitive or 

van. nit, or onder 129. 



Rule XIV. 


r> 


XV. 


n 


XVI. 


it 


XVII. 


11 


XVIII. 


11 


XIX. 


ii 


XX. 


r> 


XXI. 


ri 


XXII. 


» 


XXIII. 


n 


XXIV. 


n 


XXV. 


r> 


XXVI. 


ii 


XXVII. 


ii 


XXVIII. 


ii 


XXIX. 


n 


XXX. 


n 


XXXI. 


ii 


XXXII. 


ii 


XXXIII. 


ii 


XXXIV. 


r> 


XXXV. 


ii 


XXXVI. 


•>•) 


XXXVII. 


11 


XXXVIII 


11 


XXXIX. 


V 


XL. 


ii 


XLI. 


ii 


XLIT. 


ii 


XLI1I. 



C O N T E N T S. DC 

Page. 
Cardinal numbers require the noun in the 

plural — 

Al followed by de — 

Concord of Personal Pronouns .... 130. 

Ellipsis of the Personal Pronoun . . . 131. 

The Indefinites men , ietnand , niemand — 

The Reflective Pronoun s>ich .... 132. 

Concord of Possessive Pronouns ... — 

Ellipsis of Possessive Pronouns . . 133. 

Concord of Demonstrative Pronouns . . 134. 
The Pronouns degene , diegene , and het- 

gene 135. 

The Pronouns deceive and de&e ... — 

The Pronouns dusdanig and %oodanig . 136. 

Concord of the Relative and Antecedent — 

The Relatives die, welke , wie,and wat 137. 

Interrogatives and .Answers 139. 

Interrogates wat and welke .... — 
Concord of Verb and Nominative . . . 140. 
Ellipsis of the Nominative ..... 141. 
First, Second, or Third person as Nomi- 
native — 

Singular and Plural as Nominative . . 142. 

Tense — 

Mood 144. 

Infinitive Mood — 

Participles 145. 

Two Verbs .... - — 

The Verbs ssijn and w or den . . . 147, 

Verb and Possessive Case 148. 

Verb and Dative Case , — 

Verb Active and Objective Case . . . 149. 

Verb Neuter and Preposition .... — 



C N TENT S. 



Page. 

Rule XLIV. Position of Subject, Attribute, and Object 150. 

„ XLV. Adverbs 151. 

„ XLVI. Prepositions govern the Objective . . . 153. 

„ XL VII. Conjunctions 154. 

„ XLVIII. Conjunction and Indicative Mood . . . 155. 

„ XLIX. Conjunction and Subjunctive Mood . . . 156. 

„ L. Conjunctions requiring other Conjunctions — 

„ LI Power of Conjunctions in Sentences . . 157. 

„ LII. Interjections 158. 

PROSODY 159. 

Het Fort Erfprins aan den Helder , . 162. 

Opkomst, Bloei , en Verval der Letteren 166. 

De Kokosboom 168. 

Huig de Groot — 

Prosodie 170. 

De Batavieren 172. 

Het Eiland der Batavieren 174. 

Geschiktheid van Europa voor Zeevaart en Handel ... — 

Geschiktheid van ons Vaderland voor Zeevaart en Handel 176. 

De geschiktheid der Nederlanders daarvoor 178. 

De gewigtige gevolgen van Schoolonderwijs 180. 

Invloed van Eigenbelang op de juistheid onzer waarnemingen 182. 

Het betrachten der Deugd 184. 

Kwaadsprekendheid 192. 

APPENDIXES 
Appendix I. Dutch Titles of Royalty, Nobility, Civil and 
Military Rank , with their Abbreviations as 

used inCorr espondenoe, and News-Papers 196. 

,, II. On the Pronunciation of some Foreign Words 208. 

„ III. Rules of Punctuation 209. 

„ IV. On the Use of Capitals . 212. 



PREFACE. 



To fill the place which appeared to form a hiatus in 
the list of works on the Dutch language, led to the pub- 
lishing of this compilation ; and we hope , herein , in some 
measure at least, to have furnished a summary exposition 
of the materials , the powers , and the peculiarities of this 
language. 

It being a matter of interest and curiosity to acquaint 
ourselves with the origin and progress of any art or science on 
the study of which we enter, whether for the gratification 
of the fancy , the expansion of the intellect , or as necessary 
for the occupations of life, so it is presumed that the sketch 
of the origin and progress of this language, and the notice 
of the most eminent Dutch writers, as comprehended in the 
introduction, will not be deemed here out of place. 

As the Dutch language is little taught in English schools, 
we have not deemed it necessary to introduce here themes 
or exercises for translation, as is commonly met with in 
school grammars] but have rather given copious illustrations 
to the rules , and annexed in suitable places a praxis on the 
preceding rules, which, whilst they exhibit the structure of the lan- 
guage and Us genius, may be used also as reading and translating 
exercises ; and the praxis on the Dutch grammar may be em- 
ployed for the same purposes by the more advanced student. 



XII PREFACE. 

The eontents of this compilation are comprised under Four 
General Divisions: 1. An exhibition of the letters and their 
powers, or Dutch Orthography : 2. An exhibition of the 
materials of which the language is composed , and the various 
modifications of which those materials are susceptible in com- 
position, or Dutch Etymology: 3. The principles for combi- 
ning these materials in the proper construction of sentences or 
significant propositions , or Dutch Stjntax: and A. Illustrations 
of, or a Praxis on the foregoing. 

The Orthography and Inflections as fixed by Professor 
Siegenbeek , and Mr. Weiland , have been strictly adhered 
to, whilst the opinions of polemics on some particulars of 
the Dutch Grammar have been passed over; in cases how- 
ever where the orthography or inflection is dubious or mani- 
fold , that form has been chosen which appeared to be of 
most general adoption. In short , precision has been obser- 
ved with a due regard to brevity , and minuteness of detail 
without falling into prolixity ; and in the quantity of illustra- 
tions a regard has been paid to copiousness without rendering 
the work too voluminous. 

ROTTERDAM, January 1842. 






ijvtu on JJCTIOJV. 



CONTENTS : l Reason and Language. — 2 Origin and Pro- 
gress of Language. — 5 Language of the Antediluvians. — 
4 Dispersion of the Posterity of Noah — 5 Peopling of Europe 
by the Japhatic race. — 6 Celts, and Celtic Language. — 
7 Sclavonians and Sclavonic Language. — 8 Teutoni , 
and Teutonic Language. — 9 Scandinavians and Scandi- 
navian Language. — 10 Upper and Lower Teutonic. — 
11 Cjesar and Tacitus first notice the Batavians. — 12 Salic 
Francs, Frisons, Saxons, and Batavians. — 15 Salic Code. — 
14 Origin of the Dutch. — 15 Gothic, and Roman Alpha- 
bet. — 16 Frison and Frankish Language. — 17 Lex Fri- 
sionum. — 18 Succession of the Dynasties of Holland. — 
19 Collection of Laws by Sibranda. — 20 Frison, the Lan- 
guage of the Court of King Ethelbert. — 21 Existing spe- 
cimens of ancient Frison and Flemish. — 22 Fall of the 
Roman Empire. — 23 Revival of Learning in Europe. — 
24 Present Flemish and Dutch Language. — 23 Dutch Pro- 
vincial Dialects. — 26 Literature and Language of the 
Netherlands in the 13 th. century. — 27 — 14 th. Century. — 
28 — 13 th. Century. — 29 — 16 Century; division of 
the Netherlands; Hooft modifies the Dutch Orthography. — 
50 — 17 Century; Orthographical peculiarities. — 51 — 18 
Century. — 52 — 19 th. Century. — 55 Flemish Language 
and Literature. — 54 Siegexbeek's spelling. — 53 Popula- 
tion speaking the Language of the Netherlands. 



1 . Reason and Language are so intimately blended , 
that the former may be considered as the matter and 
the latter as the instrument bv which the mental facul- 



XIV INTRODUCTION. 

ties are called forth and rendered apprehensive: they 
are those characteristics of human nature which elevate 
man so pre-eminently in the scale of created beings. 
Language , then , as the instrument of rational inter- 
course between man and man , demands our first and 
especial study; for the cultivation of language, taken in 
its widest extent , is no other than the cultivation of 
thought and right reason, and the most efficient manner 
of communicating our ideas, our designs, our sensations, 
and our actions to others , either by speech , or by signs 
as in writing and print. 

2. The origin of language must then be coeval with 
or must immediately have succeeded the developement of 
reason or the mental faculties, and its advancement to- 
wards perfection progresses with the advances made in 
the arts and sciences and in the culture of our social 
affections. 

o. In the earliest ages man had but few wants; his 
habits were simple ; the arts of life, except the primitive 
stages of agriculture and the chase, may be supposed 
scarcely to have existed , or could have been cultivated 
only as far as the simple pastoral habits of life demanded 
and suggested; whilst the various objects in nature and 
art , as they presented themselves , would naturally re- 
ceive a name, purely arbitrary, and as suggested by 
chance , or by an analogy to some other name previously 
created. In such a state of society language could make 
but little progress, and could not advance beyond the 
mere names of the comparatively few objects in nature 
which presented themselves , and the names of such 
ideas and inventions as would arise in such a mere 
pastoral life. These names must have been subjected to 
continual changes and sometimes even to falling into 
utter oblivion , circumstances incidental to a language 
maintained only by oral transfer. Such we may suppose 
to have been the case with the language of the Ante- 
diluvian race, whose language was probably the Hebrew 
or a primitive form of it. It falls only to the part of a 
refined and generous people, advanced in the arts and 
sciences, to mature and enrich a language. The Gre- 
cian and the Roman nation, both excelled in this par- 
ticular ; and in later times , the modern western Euro- 



INTRODUCTION. XV 

pean nations , in consequence of their cultivation of 
learning and the arts, have brought their languages to 
an advanced state of refinement; and of these the English 
language , from the wide diffusion of it, the advancement 
which this nation has made in the arts and sciences, 
seems to have become richer in words, and of more 
extensive use than perhaps any other language , ancient 
or modern. 

4. As Noah and his family were the only human 
beings saved at the Universal Deluge, so it is to be 
inferred that this language remained the only one on 
earth down to the Babel dispersion, about which period 
the descendants of Noah spread out in different directions. 
The Mosaic history, as also that of other ancient histo- 
rians, agree in confirming that the posterities of the 
three sons of Noah, Shem, Ham, and Japhet, seem to 
have extended over the following parts of the globe : 
that of Shem over Southern Asia : that of Ham over the 
countries stretching south from the Euphrates , as Arabia, 
Palestine , Egypt , and the continent of Africa : and the 
peopling of Europe is ascribed to the posterity of Japhet. 

The language of the Shemetic race was the Hebrew, 
with their dialects Chaldee , Syriac , Arabic &c. ; and are 
characterised by being written from right to left. 

Of the language spoken by the posterity of Ham little 
is known , but it is supposed by some to have been that 
now spoken by the tribes of Middle and Southern Africa. 

The language spoken by the descendants of Japhet , is ge- 
nerally supposed to have been the Sanscrit, or a dialect 
of it ; and is considered as the root of the European 
languages , the Greek , Latin , Celtic , Sclavonic , and Teu- 
tonic. 

5. The time when , and the part where the descen- 
dants of Japhet passed over from Asia into Europe is 
not clearly ascertained. They appear to have entered 
Europe about ten or eleven centuries before the Christian 
era, in three distinct streams of population; and those people 
known under the name of CELTS or CELT.E were pro- 
bably the first who entered Europe , and must have 
crossed the Kimmerian Bosphorus between the Black Sea 
and the Sea of Azoph. They extended along the south Wes- 
tern regions of Europe, having been impelled forward 



XVI INTRODUCTION. 

in that direction by later emigrants , Ib'e Gomerians or 
Teutoni. They inhabited the countries of Spain, part 
of Gaul, and crossed over into Britain. 

6. The language spoken by this people , is called the 
CELTIC, from a part of ancient Spain, in Caesar's time, 
having been called CELTIC IBERIA ; and a great part 
of Gaul , in his time, was called GALLIA CELTICA. That 
the CELTI entered Britain from Gaul is inferred from the 
relative situations of these countries and from the analogy 
of the language of the ancient Britains with that of 
Celtic Spain and Celtic Gaul. 

7. The Second Great Stream of inhabitants which 
entered Europe from Asia , comprehends the Sclavonian 
or Sarmatian nations. They appear to have entered 
Europe some centuries subsequent to the entrance of the 
Celti. They occupied the Eastern Parts of Europe as 
Bussia, Poland, Eastern Prussia, Moravia, Bohemia, etc. 
These people gave rise to another class of European 
languages , as the Bussian , Polish , Bohemian , etc. 

8. The Third Stream of European population which 
entered Europe, probably in the same part as the Celti, 
but at a period subsequent, settled along the banks of 
the Danube, and extended in a southern direction, along the 
Bhine, forcing the Celts forward before them in a south 
western direction. In Caesar's time , these people were 
called TEUTONI or GEBMANI; and in later ages , they 
were known under the name of GETjE or GOTHS. 

The language spoken by these people is called the 
TEUTONIC , or INBO-GERMANIC ; and is divided into 
two Great branches, the Scandinavian and Germanic. 

9. The Scandinavian branch includes the Icelandic, 
Danish, Norwegian, Sweedish, Finlandish , etc. — 

10. The Teutonic is divided into Upper and Lower. 
The First Subdivision, the UPPER TEUTONIC is that 

spoken by the Moeso-Goths, the Allemanni , and the people 
of Austria , Bavaria , and Upper Saxony, called the Moeso- 
Gothic, the Ailemannic, and the High German. These na- 
tions having mixed less with their northern neighbors the 
Scandinavians, their language bears less analogy to that 
of these people than the Lower Teutonic. 

The Second Subdivision was the LOWER TEUTONIC , or 
that spoken by the, Anglo-Saxons, Frisons, and the nations 



INTRODUCTION 



XVII 



extending throughout Western Germany to the Rhine, and 
into France as far as Ostend. These languages are known 
under the names of ANGLO-SAXON , LOW GERMAN , 
FR1SON, FRANKJSH, BATAVIAN , and FLEMISH. 

From what has been said, the roots and cognate dia- 
lects of the modern Dutch language may bo exhibited 
thus: 

GOTHIC , 1NDO-GERMANIC , or TEUTONIC. 



Scandinavian. Upper Teutonic. 



Lower Teutonic. 



Icelandic. 

Danish. 

Swedish. 

Norwegian. 

Pictish. 

Lowland Scotch. 



Moeso-Gothic 
mannish. 



Anglo-Saxon, Fri- 
Ali- son , Batavian , 
Flemish, Low-Ger- 
man, Frankish. 



Flemish and Modern 
Dutch, being cognate 
languges, with their 
Modern German. provincial dialects , 
the Frison , Guelde- 
rish , Overysselish , 
etc. 
Such is the received opinion as to the arrival and di- 
rection taken by the three great streams of population 
from Asia in Europe; and also as to the nations which 
sprang from them. War, pestilence, and famine, 
would , with the lapse of time , tend to detach and further 
separate one tribe from another, and would consequently 
give rise to the existence of new distinct tribes or na- 
tions ; and , in the course of ages as new objects and ideas 
presented themselves , each tribe would give them a name 
according as chance or ingenuity might suggest ; and 
thus form a new dialect or language differing more or 
less from the parent one and from that of their neighbors. 
In this manner may be traced the origin of the TEU- 
TONIC LANGUAGE, and of the various languages or dia- 
lects which have taken root from it. 

11. Julius Cesar, as appears from his Commentaries 
of the invasion of W T estern Europe by the Romans under 
his command , first extended his conquests to these parts, 
about fifty years before the Christian era; this elegant. 

2 



XVIII INTRODUCTION. 

writer speaks of a people , called BATAVI , located to- 
wards the mouth of the Rhine , between the Waal and the 
other northern branches of that river , and they seem to 
have extended from Dordrecht to about Haarlem. These 
Batavi emigrated into these parts from the country of 
Hesse, in middle Germany, about 100 years before the 
Christian era ; and probably their language partook more 
of the Lower than of the Upper Teutonic, but of this no 
proofs are extant : these people first fell under the 
Roman dominion and subsequently became incorporated 
with the Franks in common with the Frisons; the former 
never afterwards existed as a distinct nation, but remained 
intermixed with the Frisons , Franks , and Lower Saxons. 
Tacitus , a Roman historian , who was made gover- 
nor of GALLIA BELGICA, in the reign of the Roman 
Emperor Vespasian , about sixty years after Christ, next 
gives some account of the inhabitants of this part of 
Europe. He found them divided into various petty 
tribes , living in a rude state ; but represents them as 
being hardy and brave in war. The early history of 
these people, as well as their language, is of course in- 
volved in the darkness of that age, and continued so 
until about the thirteenth century , on the revival of 
learning in Europe. 

12. A race of people, composed of Frisons, Saxons, 
and Bataves , came into notice , in common with another 
nation of Europe called Salian Franks who were origi- 
nally a tribe in a part of Germany now called THE FRAN- 
KISH KREIS ; the latter subsequently extended their con- 
quests over the district now known under the denomina- 
tion of the North and South Netherlands, and the countries 
stretching south of them , as France , part of Spain , 
the greater part of Germany, Italy, etc. 

13. These Franks, having brought the Frisons, Saxons, 
and Batavians under their subjection, and all having a 
resemblance of manners, and possessing the same sense 
of liberty , having formed themselves into one formidable 
body or state, framed, about the middle of the fifth Cen- 
tury, the SALIC CODE. This code took its name from 
the river YSSEL , on the banks of which they were chiefly 
settled. This code was probably written in the Low 
Teutonic dialect, however, it has been handed dowjQ to us in 



INTRODUCTION. XIX 

the Latin language only , but a close examination of it , 
leads to the conclusion, that it was originally written in 
a Lower Teutonic Dialect. 

14. The conquests of these Franks, in Lower Saxony, 
Friesland , and the country of the Bataves , their intermixing 
with these nations, who all spoke dialects of the Lower 
Teutonic , laid the foundation of the language of the 
Netherlands ; but it was not till the thirteenth century 
that it became cultivated and known as a written 
language. Of these dialects the present Dutch partakes 
more of that of the Bataviaa into which the Frison , Lower 
Saxon, and Frankish, as being of cognate origin, will have 
flown ; but much is here left to mere conjecture, as suf- 
ficient data do not exist to enable us to trace with pre- 
cision the etymology of all the words constituting the 
present Dutch. » The remnants of a remote antiquity in 
Holland," says Mr. Bowring, » are few and scattered. It 
has been in all times a country — the dispositions and 
the habits of whose people have been quiet as its inland 
waters , yet easily affected by external circumstances — 
too weak to be the arbiter of its own fate — and too 
closely emmed in by mightier nations , not to feel every 
shock which agitated them. The ebb and flow of its 
(early) political vicissitudes swept away most of its (earlier) 
national traditions. Of all the Teutonic branches the Nether- 
landers have preserved the smallest portion of the old po- 
pular literature." 

15. The Alphabet of these Frisons and other Lower 
Teutonic tribes was a modification of the so called Moeso- 
Gothic , which was a modification of the Greek ; first 
introduced from Greece amongst the Goths, the tribe or 
nation of Eastern Europe and Western Germany, by one 
Bishop Ulphilas , about 400 years of the Christian era. 
Ulphilas modified these letters to a form suited to the 
genius of those rude and warlike people. These letters, 
in the course of ages underwent other various modifi- 
cations by the different Teutonic nations, according to 
the arbitrary whims of the writers, and the nature of the 
materials on which they wrote. 

Next followed the universal adoption of the Roman 
character , which is also a modification of the Greek , 
and the Greek is a modification of the Phoenician, which 



XX INTRODUCTION. 

is admitted to be the most ancient written language 
known. When the Romans made their alphabet , is not 
satisfactorily ascertained, but was probably two or three 
centuries before the Christian era. 

There are no documents remaining of written ancient 
Frison , nor of any other of the Low Teutonic dialects ; 
in which particular they remained behind-hand with 
their neighbors the Moeso-Goths ; however, as has 
already been adduced , the Salic Law , is supposed to have 
been written in the Frison dialect, and it is also natu- 
rally to be inferred that it was written with a Moeso- 
Gothic character or a modification of it. It was during 
the dark age between the fall of the Grecian and the 
Roman empire , and the revival of learning in Europe 
in the thirteenth century, that the adoption of the Roman 
character throughout Western Europe superceded the 
Gothic, and became general. Owing to the turbulent 
state of society in that period , little attention was 
paid to literature , and that little was exclusively 
confined to the Christian Clericals and their disciples , 
when all the writing that was made, was in Latin, 
with a Roman character, first on parchment, and 
later, on paper which was brought into use in the 
fourteenth century. Johannes Amerbach , a celebrated 
swiss printer of Bazel , first introduced into these parts 
the adoption of the present ROMAN and ITALIC LETTERS, 
about the commencement of the sixteenth century. 
Aldus Manutius , a printer at Venice , invented the 
ITALIC CHARACTERS, and from these are formed the pre- 
sent writing characters , which are the Roman altered to 
admit of being more easily and conveniently joined. 
The present German characters , and Modern Gothic , and 
so called Old English, are all more modern modifications 
of the ancient Gothic of Ulphilas which appear some- 
what to resemble the Phoenician , the alphabet of the 
Shemetic languages or those used by the Hebrews, 
Chaldeans, etc. The Roman and Italic characters partially 
continued in use in these parts down to the invention 
of printing , which has led to a uniformity in the form 
of these letters, and their universal adoption in Western 
Europe, and they are not likely to undergo any modifi- 
cations for the future. 



INTRODUCTION. XXr 

16. The Frisons opposed the domination of the Franks. 
They remained an independent state about two centuries 
having the whole extent of the Netherlands under their 
dominion, but were subdued about 794 , by Charlemagne 
who , having made himself sovereign of the nations of the 
western continent of Europe, favored and encouraged 
the language of the Franks, it being that spoken by a 
great portion of his subjects. After the decease of this 
monarch the language of the Franks continued to be in 
favor with the court of France , for a considerable period. 
Under the reign of CHARLES-LE-CHAUVE it gave way 
for the ROMANA RUSTICA or LINGUA ROMANA , a dia- 
lect of the south of France , derived principally from the 
Greek and Latin. 

17. Charlemagne, in the year 798, caused a collection 
of the common laws of the Frisons to be made, which 
collection exists at this day under the name of LEX FRI- 
SIONUM. These laws were originally written in Low 
Teutonic, as is proved by the laws themselves, though 
there are no existing copies of them in this language. 
The intestine wars , which agitated and ravaged the 
countries of Europe during a series of years , swept away 
the productions of science. 

18. After the death of Charlemagne his empire became 
divided among his successors; and the Feudal lords or 
Counts rendered their estates hereditary. 

The Northern division of the Neth erlands , which then 
formed a part of Higher Lorraine , fell under the domin- 
ion of Thierry who assumed the title of Count of Hol- 
land and Zealand , and Lord of Friesland. This dynasty 
continued till the end of the thirlheenth century, when 
it was transferred to the House of Hainault, which conti- 
nued till the middle of the fourteenth century, when 
the governement of Holland was transferred to the Empe- 
ror Lewis of Bavaria. This dynasty ended with the death 
of Jaqueline in 1436. After the death of Jaqueline the 
government of Holland was resigned to John of Burgundy. 
The Burgundian dynasty continued till the death of Mary, 
only daughter and successor of Charles , surnamed the 
Rash. Mary married with Maximilian of Austria, and, on 
her death, the House of Austria succeeded the dynasty 
of Burgundy. Philip II of Austria married the daugh- 



XXII I N T R D U C T I N. 

ter of Ferdinand King of Arragon and Castile, in 1494; 
whereby the Netherlands became united to the Spanish 
dominions. The Spanish dynasty ended with the peace of 
Muoster in 1648, when the Provinces of Friesland, Holland , 
Zealand, Utrecht, Gelderland, Overijssel , and Groningen , 
raised themselves into the Republick of the Seven United 
Provinces , under the dynasty of the House of Nassau, with 
the title of Stadtholder. North-Brabant, and Limburg, 
were added subsequently. 

19. Some laws successively promulgated in Friesland, 
about the end of the tenth century , were collected into 
a Code in the beginning of the thirteenh century, by one 
Sicranda. These laws belong to the flourishing period 
of the Frisons, about which time the country extending 
from the Weser to Ostend was known under the name 
of Friesland. Some of these laws were made at a very 
remote period , and previous to the time of Charlemagne , 
and even some of them seem to have existed previous to 
the Salic Law. Though this Code was not written entire- 
ly in the dialect of the Franks, still , the collection made 
under the name of the LEX FRISIONUM is met with 
throughout. 

20. There are many proofs that this Frison dialect 
was a language generally and extensively cultivated du- 
ring several centuries. Ethelbert, an Anglo-Saxon King, 
and descendant of Hengist, who reigned over Kent in 
Great Britain about the end of the sixth century, during 
his reign , caused a code of laws to be drawn up, men- 
tion of which is made in the annals of Savilian. This 
code has a remarkable analogy to that of the LEX FRI- 
SIONUM ; and the language is the Frison dialect of the 
fourteenth century; so that there can be no doubt but that 
this Frison was the language of the court of Ethelbert, and 
leads to the conclusion that it was the language spoken by 
those northern invaders of Britain, called Angle-Saxons, 
but who, with much probability, were for the most part 
Frisons, with their neighbors the Angles, and Anglo-Saxons. 

21. The most ancient existing documents of the Nether- 
lands Teutonic dialect , which is now the language of the 
Netherlands, is a map of Brussels of the year 1229, and 
another of Middleburg of 1254. The language employed 
in these documents is pure, harmonious, and of an entire 



] X T It D U C T I N. XXIH 

formation. On a comparison of the language of these two 
documents with the language spoken at present in Hol- 
land and Belgium , the former will be found to differ 
more from them, in its orthography, than the latter. About 
this time, 1254, King William, Count of Holland and Zea- 
land issued a proclamation to the citizens of Middleburgh, on 
the Island of Walcheren. All Government orders of this 
nature had been previously written in Latin. This and 
a charter of Brussels A. D. 1229, are the most ancient 
written documents of this nature extant, and the lan- 
guage will be found to differ little from that which is 
spoken in the Flemish Provinces at this time. 

Copy of the Charter of Brussels A. D. 1229. 

2[c Ifeinrie fit her gratten <8>atb§ Xfertagge ban 25ra- 
nant/ <£nbe ift Ifetnric snn cubfte mm ini baen ucont 
hit ggefccifte alien bengencn hie ntt sun en hie nafca- 
menbe sun/ bat hit abcrmib3 braeben rabe onfc^ man- 
nen en bee preucnen en bee gef tannic ban 23mefele m)tn 
caren gefificn gefet fiinnen 23rttcfelc fit traitinen enbe fit 
tttt aii|\: manne enbe gemeenieec ben caerteren ban 
25ruefelc ^efen care te gauben am gemeine arfiare enbe 
barbane mee^ in bese manierem 

Modern Dutch. 

Ik Hendrik , bij de gratie Gods , Hertog van Braband , 
en ik Hendrik, zijn oudste zoon , wij doen u weten dit 
geschrift aan al degenen , die nu zijn , en die nakomende 
zijn , dat wij , ten gevolge van den wijzen raad onzer man- 
nen en der schepenen en der gezworenen van Brussel , 
deze keuren hebben gezet binnen Brussel , door trouw 
en door eede onzer mannen , en gemeenlijk de Poorteren 
(Burgers) van Brussel deze keuren te houden tot alge- 
meen nut en voortaan meer op deze wijze. 

Literal Translation. 

I , Henry , by the grace of God , Duke of Brabant , and 
I, Henry , his eldest son , we make (to) you known this wri- 
ting to all those who now are , and who are to come , 



XXIV INTRODUCTION. 

that toe , in consequence of the wise counsel of ovr men , 
and of the sheriffs , and of the sworn of Brussels , have es- 
tablished these statutes , in Brussels , through the fidelity and 
oath of our men, and commonly the burghers of Brussels , to 
keep these statutes , for general use , and for the future 
more in this wise. 

Charter of Leiden A. D. 1294. 

W# jflorcn^/ a5rabc ban Hatlanbt/ ban ^elant/ 
enbe Here ban Brieslanb mafcen cont alie ben gQenen / 
tie befen Brief Mullen £ien/ of jjaren iefen / bat itu geu- 
fien ggegQeben ifttttggere tien ^enmaftere/ enbe Ifon- 
ftanfe §imn urobe^/ berbgaff margljen^ Xant>i in egfjin- 
baem/ bi lignjjen altenast be^ 25urt§ ban %eiben/enbe 
bat bnrfeibe Xanb gebet Daniel ban ben l^atbe guite 
gfjefefjonben / a(^ bat gn 't gelb ban on^ te lene* 

aBgeggeben airmen fcjjrtbet bite enbe negljentig* 

Literal Translation. 

We Florens , Count of Holland , of Zealand , and Lord' of 
Friesland , make known to all those who will see this let- 
ter , or hear it read , that we have given to Rutghere the 
Shoemaker , and Constance Ms brother , two and a half 
acres of land , in possession , which lie nearest the castle of 
Leiden , and this aforesaid land has Daniel van den Warde 
given up , so as he held it from us in fief. 

Given , as men date , four and ninety. 

From the foregoing sketch of the Origin and Progress 
of the Frison , showing it to be a dialect of the Lower Teu- 
tonic , it is also rendered obvious , that this, in common 
with the Lower Saxon , Frankish , and Batavian , was the 
indigenous language of the Low countries or Netherlands ; 
the dialects of the neighboring nations , flowing into it ac- 
cording as the inroads of one on the other, gave rise to an 
intermixture of the people and their respective dialects. 

The present language of the Netherlands is allowed to 
be the most perfect of any of the Teutonic dialects. 

22. After the fall of the Grecian and Roman Empires, 
» those two great theatres of human glory , " about the 



INTRODUCTION. XXV 

end of the fourth century of the Christian era , succeed- 
ed the Gothic Age, so called from those rude and war- 
like people the Goths and Vandals, the latter compre- 
hending the ancient inhabitants, the Kimbrian or Scan- 
dinavian nations of the North of Europe. This so called age 
continued for the space of a thousand years. These Goths 
and Vandals, under their leader Alaric , A. C. 410 having 
expelled the Roman invaders from their territories, pursued 
them to the very seat of their empire , overpowerd the 
city of Rome , annihilated her institutions and government, 
and spread devastation over the wide extent of her vast 
dominions. With the fall of the Roman Empire , Lite- 
rature , and the Arts and Sciences , ceased to be cul- 
tivated in Europe ; and a state of predatory warfare and 
barbarism succeeded an advanced stage of civilization. 
During this period some remains of learning were indeed 
retained, and partially cultivated by the devotees of 
Christianity ; but from the rude and agitated state of the 
politics of those times , all the learning was confined to 
the precincts of their monastaries ; it is to these cleri- 
cals that we are indebted for the preservation of most 
of the productions of the learning of the Greeks and 
Romans. 

23. In the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries , learning 
again revived in every state of Europe ; since which pe- 
riod , these nations , particularly England , France , Ger- 
many , and the Netherlands, have produced men of learn- 
ing and genius equal to those of antiquity. The inven- 
tion of the art of printing , by Laurens Koster of Har- 
lem, in the fifteenth century, contributed in a remarkable 
degree to the promotion of learning and the diffusion 
of knowledge throughout every part of the civilized world. 
Mr. Bowring , an elegant writer as well as a man 
of much literary taste and judgment , makes the fol- 
lowing judicious remarks on the character and opinion 
of the Dutch, as inserted in the FOREIGN QUARTERLY 
REVIEW for April 1829: » The susceptability of the 
Dutch who are , according to common parlance , natu- 
rally cold and phlegmatic to the opinions of others, and 
their disposition to avail themselves of every testimony 
which they imagine will serve to set their literary cha- 
racter right with the world, have led them to cling with 



XXVI INTRODUCTION 

wonderful tenacity to the sometimes indiscreminating 
praises of a few writers who have , as they think , ho- 
nored them with particular notice. The fact is simply 
this , that the Dutch have paid their fair and full contri- 
bution to the great intellectual treasury. They have paid 
it in their own way , and with their own. It is not that 
this merit has been denied them — but inquiry respec- 
ting it has seldom been made — the Dutch people only 
require to be better known in order to be more highly 
thought of." Of the few works in the English language 
on the Dutch language and literature , we only know of 
the three following : John Bowring's BATAVIAN AN- 
THOLOGY : Bosworth's ORIGIN OF THE DUTCH : and the 
Essay above quoted which first appeared in the Foreign 
Quarterly and has been subsequently reprinted in Hol- 
land ; these three little works are interesting for the facts 
and opinions developed on the subject. Of Dutch gram- 
mars , in the English language , we know of two only 
that are worth mentioning : Van der Pijl's DUTCH 
GRAMMAR , Dort : and Hazendonks DUTCH GRAMMAR , 
London. Of DUTCH AND ENGLISH DICTIONARIES, the 
first published was compiled by W. Sewell , 2 Vols. 4°. 
Amsterdam, 1670. Next followed Holtrop's , 2 Vols. 8<>. 
Blusse and van Braam , Dort , which is the most elabo- 
rate and the best that has yet appeared. Other works 
of this nature , in a more or less compressed form, have 
subsequently appeared , the best of which are, Bomhoff's 
DUTCH AND ENGLISH DICTIONARY, 2 Vols. 12. Thieme 
Nymegen; and that of Hazendonk, in 1 Vol. 12. London. 

24. The language which is at present spoken throughout 
the Old or Northern Netherlands , and known under the 
name of the DUTCH LANGUAGE , differs somewhat from 
that spoken by the Belgians, which is known by the name 
of tbe FLEMISH LANGUAGE; this difference will be 
recognized on a comparison of the specimens of the 
writers of the thirteenth century to the present time; 
and. the change in the two languages will be found to 
have been chiefly produced about the commencement of 
the sixteenth century, in consequence of a change in the 
politics of the Northern and the Southern Division of these 
provinces. 

25. There are met with in the Netherlands, as in all 



INTRODUCTION. XXVII 

other countries , provincial dialects differing more or 
less from!} the language spoken and received as that of 
the people at large , and which is the language of the 
Court , the Metropolis , and the Learned. The dialect 
of the peasantry of the province of Friesland partakes 
more of the ancient Frison , whilst that of the peasantry 
of Guelderland and Overijssel retains much of the an- 
cient Low-Saxon intermixed with the Modern Dutch ; 
the dialect of the Southern provinces of Belgium 
bordering on France becomes mixed up of Flemish and 
French , and constitutes what is now known under the 
name of the Walloon , a French paiois. 

26. Here follows a list of men of learning and ge- 
nius of this country , who have distinguished themselves 
by their literary writings , and purity of language ; from 
which it will be seen that Holland , taking into consid- 
eration her small extent of territory and her popula- 
tion , is not behind any of her neighbors in the pro- 
duction of men of learning , either in point of number 
or measure of genius. 

THE THIRTEENTH CENTURY. 

Jakob van Maerlant, a Flaming, surnamed the father 
of Netherlands literature, born in 1235, died about 1300. 
His works consist of Rymbybel, Historia Scholastica of 
Comestor; Spieghel Historiael, Universal History; der Na- 
tueren Bloeme , Natural History ; Wapene Martyn and Ver- 
keerde Martyn, dialogues between Jacob and Martin. 
Maerlant frequently refers to earlier Netherlands poets, 
but their works have not been handed clown to us. 

Melis Stoke, a Hollander, lived in the latter part of 
this century ; Rymchronyk , history of the events of his 
own time. 

Gheraert Lienhout , or Broeder Gheraert , Natmir- 
kunde des Heelals , treatise on physics and natural history. 

Jan van Heelu , Rymchronyk , being a history of John I , 
Duke of Brabant. 

The writings of J. van Maerlant are the earliest 
authentic literary productions in the languages of the 
Netherlands, the following specimen exhibits the style 
and spelling of that period. 



XXVIII INTRODUCTION. 

€nbe amtrat it diamine fien 
Mti gaeoej Ifjerte fiitiaic gen/ 
3£ie tiit ^ietfdje *Mcn iefen / 
3£at £i mn£ genafciidj hiefen; 
€noe lefen gin in ^amicjj inaart/ 
^at in §££ itf 0nn;e5aart/ 
jl&en maet om tie rime £on&en 
Migfeltikz tougge in ftonnen. 

irc Modern Dutch. 

En daar ik een Flamender ben, bid ik hen die dit 
Hollandsch zullen lezen , dat zij genadig zijn jegens mij ; 
en als zij lezen eenig woord dat bij hen ongehoord is, 
men weet , dat om aan den rijm te komen , men 
moet zoeken gemengde taal in boeken. 

Translation. 

And as I am a Flaming , I graciously pray those ivho may 
read this Dutch , that they be merciful unto me ; and if they 
read any word which they have not (before) heard , (it is that J 
we must seek in books for a mixed language to get at the ryme. 

The following is a specimen of the same century, from 
Melis Stoke. 

Mtn £cgreef htt3ent ^ebenticg en sef e 
%U ^ieoeric gatioe grate tengjjene^fe/ 
3£at lantr te jjeboene ineoe^ aigahe^/ 
^at grabe jf taren^ mas £nnsr baoer* 

In Modern Dutch. 

Men schreef in (het jaar) duizend zes en zeventig , dat Die- 
derick zeer verlangde terug te hebben al het land dat 
hoorde aan den Graaf Florens zijnen vader. 

Translation. 

They write in one thousand and seventy six (1076) that 
Thier ry ^ a 9 re at desire to have all that land back which 
belonged to Count Florens his father. 



INTRODUCTION. XXIX 

The writers afore-mentioned are the only ones whose 
productions have been handed down to us, though van 
Maerlant frequently refers to earlier poets, but of these 
no M. S. remains, with, however, the exception of the 
celebrated poem Reinaert de Vos , one of the most po- 
pular works ever published ; who the author of this 
poem was does not appear to be indisputably established , 
but is generally allowed to have been Willem van 
Utenhoven, a Flemish priest. It was written about 1230, 
in the Flemish of that century, and of which M M. S S. 
are still in existence, one of which is at Stuttgardt, 
another at Antwerp, and another in England. 

THE FOURTEENTH CENTURY. 

27. In this century the productions of literature are 
still scant, whilst the orthography will be found to be 
much the same as that of the former. In this century 
lived : 

Lodewijk van Velthem, a Flemish priest. Spieghel 
Historiael, being a continuation of van Maerlant's Uni- 
versal History, down to 1316. 

Niclaes de Klerk, who wrote Brabandsche Geesten, 
being a history of the Dukes of Brabant; born in 1280, 
died in 1330. 

Johannes Dekens. Dietsche Doctrinael , a didactic poem 
on morals. 

Hendrik van Aken, Hoe dichteren dichten selen, a poem 
on the art of poetry. 

Claes Willems. Der Minneloep , an erotic poem. 

Down to this period the works of all the fore-mention- 
ed writers were written in verse. 

3£ien oese ftmeroen niet en gfjenaeggen 
^ie mag gem tanneren ?aften traeggen/ 
€n laten nit liet onggefanggen/ 
3£ae? en i£ nnemant toe ggcahtanggen 
(Ce ie£en fcinggen Die gi taect; 
€n £efte? tae^ ic gefiue ggemaeftt 
3£at£ apt berficteren al ggenaen 
SPeggeenre tie gem fiet netflaen. 

Claes Willemz. 



XXX INTRODUCTION. 

In Modern Butch. 

Hij (aan) wien deze woorden niet genoegen (doen) mag 
zich tot andere zaken voegen , en laat dit lied onge- 
zongen , daar niemand gedwongen is iets te lezen dat 
hij laakt, en inderdaad lietgene ik gemaakt heb is 
gedaan om verbeterd te worden door diegene die net 
beter verstaan. 

Translation. 

He whom these ivords do not please may apply himself to 
other matters , and leave this song unsung, as no one is forced 
to read things wMch he contemns, and indeed what I have 
made , is made to be improved by those who better under- 
stand it. 

THE FIFTEENTH CENTURY. 

28. This century was also barren of literary interest, 
the Netherlands at this time being much oppressed by 
civil wars. It was at this period that the Kamers der Rede- 
rijkers , Chambers of Rhetoricians , were first instituted , 
suggested from habits of association , and from the 
existence of like institutions in France. Philips de 
Schoone was a member. However, from a passion for 
foreign literature which prevailed at this time , they 
introduced a number of words from the French, and 
rather corrupted the language and injured the taste of 
the people, than improved the one or the other. 

It was at the close of this century that a Dutch 
translation of the Old Testament from the Vulgate was 
made , and is a specimen of purity of language ; the first 
edition was printed at Delft , in 1477. 

The discovery of the art of printing by Laurens Jansz. 
Roster of Haarlem, was also made in this century, 
which must be considered as an important event in the 
history of literature. 

The following writers belong to this period: 

R. Agricola, born in Groningen , in 1455, died in 
1485. Poetry. 

Hendrik van Alkmaar, made a collection of fables. 

A. de Rouere. Chronyk van Vlaandren, history of Flan- 
ders; Rhetoricale Werken, poems on various subjects. 



INTRODUCTION. XXXI 

Willem de Weert. Die nieuwe Doctrinad and Spiegel 
van Sonden, being- poems on morals. 

Jacob Vilt. Poetry. 

The following is a specimen from one of the above 
writers. 

jH&aa^ ggeen (&fe?) en ejjfo & at rEC B t ^ saanbe/ 
3£an be menfcjje/ tiie upinacct geeft tfiaanbe 
3£e litjcgaem recgt ten gcmeitaaert ^taenbe/ 
3£u3 tnaert taet recgt bat in gem fiacnue 
qSbenein^/ oat gem altaaf? betmaenbe 
^nn ggebrec: £0 bat gn bat £paenbe* 

Jacob Vilt. 

In Modern Dutch. 

Maar er is geen dier , dan de mensch , dat regt gaat, 
en dat het ligchaam regt opwaarts staande houdt naar 
den hemel, dus het ware goed dat gepeins ontstond bij 
hem, dat hem altoos vermaande van zijn gebrek, zoo 
dat hij het spaande. 

Translation. 

But there is no animal that walks erect except man , who 
holds his body standing erect towards heaven. Thus it was 
indeed good that reflection arose in him , which always admo- 
nished him of his defects, so that he weaned himself of them. 

THE SIXTEENTH CENTURY. 

29. We are now arrived at an important epoch in the lan- 
guage and literature of this country ; a comparison of 
the number of writers in this century , with that of the 
three previous ones, will prove what a considerable advance- 
ment must have been made. The bursting forth of the 
reformation , the throwing off of the dependance of the 
Netherlands on Spain, and the consequent division of them 
into two states , gave rise to the existence of two distinct 
sects and nations , under the denomination of the DUTCH 
or NETHERLANDS REPUBLIC OF THE SEVEN UNITED 
PROVINCES, and that of FLANDERS or THE FLEMISH 
PROVINCES. This separation led to the formation of a 



XXXII INTRODUCTION. 

new orthography and construction of the language , dif- 
fering more and more in progress of time from that of the 
Flemish, as will be exhibited in the specimens which follow. 

In 1574, the University of Leiden was established. 

Here follows a list of the most eminent writers of this 
century : 

Anna Byns , surnamed the Brabant Sappho , born at 
Antwerp in 1520. Referynen , poems on various subjects. 

Matthys de Casteleyn. Const van Rhetoriken , a trea- 
tise on poetry. 

Edewaerde de Deene , Waarachtige Fdbulen der dieren , 
being a collection of fables. 

Jan Fruytiers. Christelyke Onderwysinghe and Eccle- 
siasticus , being sacred poems ; Korte Beschrymnghe , enz. 
being an account of the siege of Liege in 1574. 

Philips van Marnix , van St. Aldegonde. Byenkorf, the 
bee-hive, a satire; Davids Psalmen, the Psalms of David; 
Vriendelyke Vermaninghe and Trouwe Vermaninghe , exhor- 
tations to his country-men. 

Jan Baptist Houwaert. Pegasides plyn en Lusthof der 
Maegden , an erotic poem ; Onderwysinghe , a moral poem ; 
De vier Uiterste van den dood , an elegy. 

Karel van Mander. Levens der Schilders, lives of pain- 
ters ; der grondt der edel vrye schilderkonst , a treatise on 
the art of painting ; de Olyfberg and de harpe of des her- 
ten snarenspel, being sacred poems. 

Dirk Volkert Coornhert , born in 1574, Gebruyk en 
misbruyk van tydelyke have , a moral poem. 

Roemer Visscher , surnamed the Martial of Holland , 
born in Amsterdam 1547 , died 1620. 

Anna Visscher, born in Amsterdam, 1584, died 1 651. Poetry. 

Maria Tesselschade Visscher , sister of Anna Visscher. 
Poetry. 

Hendrik Laurentz Spieghel , born in Amsterdam, 1549, 
died 1612. Hertspieghel , being a collection of didactic 
poems and elegies. 

Cornelis Kiliaan , born in 1537, at Duffel in Brabant , 
died in 1607 ; author of a Latin and Dutch Dictionary. 

In this century lived also the Theologian Erasmus ; the 
learned Vossius, and Arminius, who wrote in Latin only. 

The following are specimens of the Flemish and of the 
Dutch language of this century. 



INTRODUCTION. XXXIU 

<£en cleen ganbeftin toufbe 3nn meester enb $eece/ 

aBuitjlteertebe met bnfifielen feeere/ 

3£anfenbe/ fnriimjjenbe 3^2 nlnfant/ 

$n fireefct/ cutfte/ leete/ en txaetelbet feere. 

Edewaerd de Deene. 

In Modern Dutch. 

Een klein hondje toefde zijnen meester ea heer , net 
kwispelstaartte met dubbelden keere , dansende en sprin- 
gende zeer aardig ; hij streek net , kuste , lekte , en troe- 
telde het zeer. 

Translation. 

A little dog amused his lord and master, he wagged his 
tail from side to side , dancing , and jumping very prettily; 
he stroked it , kissed , licked , and fondled it very much. 

The following is a specimen from a North Netherlan- 
der of this same century. 

Wat fiaet gem '£ merely brnfjeib bfens 3iel isl seficmben 
dEet bun^ent aenclebenbe baotlmte £anben * 
Wat ^dja'et aa% be cncfce 3ief be£ licgaem^ uanben* 
c Biet ; gu nranrt met snn mttitni clun^ter^ eerintfc/ 
Mtti ban menigg 3at met fteten£ ban gout negeerlncfe / 
3£er bcamen fionen£ eeren gun /ben banger tat ^cganbem 
Dirk Volkertz. Coornhert. 

In Modern Dutch. 

Wat baat des werelds vrijheid aan hem wiens ziel is 
gebonden met duizend aanklevende doodelijke zonden? 
Wat schaadt 00k der rijke ziel des ligchaams banden? Niets ; 
hij pronkt eerlijk met zijn meesters kluisters, meer dan 
meenig zot met ketens van begeerlijk goud , de boeijen der 
vromen eeren hen, den vanger tot schande. 

Translation. 

What avails the liberty of the world to him ivhose soul is 
bound with a thousand cleaving mortal sins? tohat also do the 



XXXIV INTRODUCTION. 

hands of the body injure the rich soul? Nothing; he shows 
off, honored with his master's fetters more than many fool 
with chains of coveted gold , the fetters of the pious honor them, 
to the shame of the imprisoner. 

THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY. 

50. We now leave the Flemings and the Flemish language, 
it being in this century that the Netherlanders, intirely 
threw off their allegiance to the King of Spain, and erected 
themselves into the REPURLIC OF THE SEVEN UNITED 
PROVINCES, and appropriated to themselves a govern- 
ment, new laws, manners, and customs, and in short, a new 
language, which is no other than the Flemish modified 
to their own notions and views; it is this language, the 
DUTCH, the language of the North Netherlanders, that we 
shall now exclusively treat upon. It was Peter Cornelis 
hooft , who , after having travelled through France and 
Italy, and acquired a perfect mastery over the language 
of the Netherlands, laid the foundation of the present 
Dutch language. Here follows a list of the brightest 
Dutch literati of this century. 

Jan de Rrune, born 1585, died 1658. Poetry. 

Laurens Reale , born at Amsterdam in 1583 , died 1 637.— 
Poetry. 

Gerbrandt Rrederode , born at Amsterdam in 1585 , died 
1618. — Poetry. 

Dirk Rafael Kamphuizen, born at Gorkum in 1586, died 
1626. — Poetry. 

Pieter Cornelis Hooft, surnamed the Dutch Taci- 
tus, born at Amsterdam in 1581 , died in 1647. Ne- 
derlandsche Historien, a History of the Netherlands; 
Gheraardt van Velzen and Bato , tragedies; Granida, a 
drama. 

Joost tan VoiNdel , surnamed the prince of Dutch 
poets , the Shakespeare of Holland , born at Cologne in 
1587, died 1679. Author of tragedies, odes, satires, and 
other poems. 

Jacob Cats , surnamed the modern Ovid , born at Brou- 
wershaven in 1577, died 1660. Didactic poetry, Tales, 
Fables, etc. 
Jakob Westerbaan , bom in 1590, died 4670. Poetry. 



INTRO)) II C T I N XXXV 

Anna Maria Schuurmans, born at Cologne in 1607, 
died 1678. She spoke fluently ten languages, ancient and 
modern. 
Jan Krul, born in 1602, died 1644. Poetry. 
Jeremias de Decker, born at Dordrecht in 1609, died 
1666. Lof der Gierigheid, the Praise of Avarice, a satire; 
besides which he made some epigrams and elegies. 
Jan Vos, born at Amsterdam in 1620, died 1662. Poetry. 
Emanuel vanMeteren, born at Antwerp in 1535 , died 
161°. Wrote a History of the Low countries and nations 
bordering upon them. 
Daniel Jonktjjs, born — died 1654. Poetry. 
Daniel Heins , born at Ghent in 1510, died 1655. Litera- 
ture and Poetry, known also as a Latin writer by the 
name of Heinsius. 

Kasper van Baerle, born in 1584, died 1648. 2 Literature 
and Poetry ; known also as a Latin writer by the name 
of Barlaeus. 

Konstantijn Huijgens , born at the Hague in 1596, died 
1687. Koornbloemen, consisting of moral poems and sa- 
tires; Sneldichten , Epigrams. 

J. Antonides van der Goes , better known by the name 
of d'Antonides , born at Goes in 1647, died 1684. Bellona 
aan Band, Bellona in Fetters, an ode; Be Ystroom, the 
River Y, an epic poem; Trazil, a tragedy. 
Thomas A rents. — Poetry. 

Katharina Lescaille , born at Amsterdam in 1649, died 
1711. Lijkrede op de Ruiter , an Elegy on the death of 
admiral de Ruiter. 

Johannes Vollenhoven , surnamed Guldenmond, golden 
mouth, born at Vollenhoven in 1631., died 1708. Leerrede- 
nen, sacred discourses; Mengeldichten , poems on miscella- 
neous subjects. 

Reinier Anslo, born at Amsterdam in 1622, died 1669. 
Poetry. 

Geraerdt Brandt, born at Amsterdam in 1626, died 
1685. Historie der Reformatie, History of the Reformation; 
Leven van de Ruiter, van Hooft, van Vondel, Life of 
de Ruiter, of Hooft, and of Vondel. 

Huig de Groot, better known by the name of Grotius, 
born at Delft in 1585, died 1645. Theology and Poetry; 
also celebrated as a Latin author in Jurisprudence. 



"'XXXVI INTRODUCTION. 

Lucas Rotgans, born at Amsterdam in 1654, died 1710. 
Willem de Derde, William III of Orange Nassau, an 
epic poem; de Boere Kermis, the Fair, an heroic comic 
poem ; Scylla , ^Eneas , and Turnus , tragedies. 

Jan van Heemskerk, born at Amsterdam in 1597, died 
1656. Poetry. 

The following specimens will exhibit the Dutch Ortho- 
graphy of this period, which will be found to differ 
from that of the present century in these particulars; 
l . the final t is used for d , as in uitgezondert for uitge- 
zonderd , excepted; 2. the y for i and ij; as in heymelyke y 
for heimeUjk :, secret; 3. the aa, ee, oo for the long a, e, o 
final; as in, verstaaken for verstaken , stopped, onwee- 
tend for onwetend , ignorant; oopen for open, open; 4. the 
h after g; and the z for s; as in, zommighen for sommigen, 
some; 5. y was used for ie , as in yder , for £e$er, every. 

Het arm ooweetend volk (weenigen uitgezondert die 
ongerust in de Spaansche trouw, zich hier en daar, aan 
heymelyke oorden, verstaaken) vergaadert in 't Raadthuys; 
de Spanjaarts claar voor : en zag men zeekeren Geestely- 
ken, met zommighen van hun, al een wyl, op en needer 
wandelen. Deez , toen alles te hoop (gekomen) scheen, komt 
der weerlooze troepe verkundighen , dat zy veygh waa- 
ren , en op hun gewisse te denken hadden. Maar het 
aanzeggen, bearbeyden, en sterven, was een ding. Men 
rukt de groote poort oopen; leydt eenpaarlyk aan, en 
schiet af , plompverlooren in 't hondert ; met een gillen 
en schreeuwen , dat yder 't hart deed sluyten , en de 
haairen te bergh staan. Dat wort , by die van binnen 
schichtigh beantwoort , met een kryten en kermen, zuch- 
ten en janken, om steen en staal te vermurwen. Wer- 
waarts ook zy zich keeren , de wanten staan pal , en de 
doodt in de deur. Voorts vlieght de vyandt, tot het 
kerkjen in , als verwoede wolven , den tsaagenden drom , 
met deeghens en daggen, op 't lyf. — En werden alzoo 
omtrent vierhonderd burghers, booven een goedt getal 
soldaaten, onder een dak, om hals geholpen. 

P. C. HODFT. 

Translation. 

The poor ignorant people (few excepted , who having no confi- 



I N T RODUCTIO N. XXXVif 

deuce in the faith of the Spaniards, concealed themselves here and 
there in secret comers) , assembled in the council-house ; the 
Spaniards there before it; and there was seen a certain cler- 
gyman , with some of them , for a time , walking up and 
down. The former, when they were gotten together, comes 
and announces to the defenceless croud , that they are 
in danger, and must think of their consciences. But to an- 
nounce, to prepare, and to perish, was a matter. They force 
open the great door; level (their muskets) at the croud, and 
fire , at random ; with a screaming and crying , that every 
heart ceased to beat, and their hairs stood on end. That 
was frightfully answered by those inside, with a weeping 
and groaning, sighing and howling, that it was enough to 
melt stone and steel. Whithersoever they turn, the ivalls are 
fixed, and death is at the door. Then the enemy rushes into 
the chapel , like raging tuolves , sword and dagger in hand , 
upon the bodies of the screaming multitude. — And there were 
about four hundred citizens , besides a great number of sold- 
iers, killed under one roof. 

The Seventeenth Century is considered as the Augustan 
age in the history of the Literature of the Netherlands. 
This age, says the learned Professor Siegenbeek, » was so 
glorious to the Dutch nation that it would be difficult to 
discover in the history of any other people , a period of 
such resplendent fame and greatness. " 

THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY. 

31. In this century many men of learning and genius 
appeared. Slight or no changes were made in the ortho- 
graphy in this period , the language remaining, for the 
most part , as modified by Hooft , and continued so to 
the adoption of the spelling fixed by Siegenbeek, at the 
commencement of the present century. Here follows a list 
of the most eminent writers. 

Jan van Broekhuizen , born 1649, died 1707. Poetry. 

Lambert ten Kate, born at Amsterdam in 1674, died 
4 732. Aenleiding tot de kennis van het verhevene deel der 
Nederlandsche sprake , Introduction to the knowledge of 
the sublime of the Dutch language. 

Hubert Kohnelisz. Poot , born at Abswoude near Delft 
in 1689, died in 1735. Veldzangen, pastorals; De Moan by 
Endymion ; De Verlicfdc Venus , amorous poems. 



XXXVIII INTRODUCTION. 

Elizabeth Kolaert-Hoofman. Schouwbnrg der ver woes- 
ting , an elegy on the instability of wordly affairs. 

Arnold Hoogvliet , born at Vlaardingen in 1687 , died 
1765. Abraham de Aartsvader , the Patriarch Abraham f 
an epic poem. 

Lukretia van Merken , born at Amsterdam in 1722 , died 
1789. Nut der Tegenspoeden , a moral poem on the advan- 
tages of adversity ; David and Germanicus , epic poems ; 
Beleg van Leyden , a tragedy. 

Pieter Langendyk, born at Amsterdam in 1685, died 1756. 
The Drama ; author of several comedies. 

Simon Styl , born at Harlingen in 1751 , died 1804. Op- 
komst en Bloei der Nederlanden , a philosophical view of 
the origin and prosperity of the Netherlands ; also a lyric 
poem on the same subject; de Myteleners , a tragedy. 

Justus van Effen , born at Utrecht in 1684 , died 1755. 
Hollandsche Spectator , Dutch Spectator. 

B. Huydecoper, born at Amsterdam in 1695, died 1778. 
Proeve van Taal- en Dichtkunde , Specimens of the Art of 
Language and Poetry. 

Willem van Haren, born at Vriesland in 1662, died]i708. 
Friso, an epic poem; de Vrede , a lyric; Leonidas, an ode. 

Onno Zwier van Haren , born at Leeuwarden in 1715, 
died 1779. De Geuzen , The Beggars, a poem. 

Jan Wagenaar , born at Amsterdam in 1709, died 1775. 
Vaderlandsche Historic , history of the mother-country from 
the latest period down to the middle of the 18th century, 
in 21 Vols. Historic van Amsterdam, History of Amsterdam. 

J. C. Baroness de Lannoy, born at Breda in 1758, died 
1782. Beleg van Haarlem , Leo de Groote , Cleopatra , 
tragedies ; also some odes , and satires. 

J. Nomsz , born at Amsterdam in 1758, died 1805. 
Willem de Eerste , Prim Maurits , epic poems ; Maria 
van Lalain , and Numa Pompilius , tragedies ; also some 
comedies. 

Jacobus Bellamy , born at Flushing in 1757 , died 1786. 
Vaderlandsche Gezangen , patriotic songs ; amorous poems , 
and odes. 

Pieter Nieuwland, born near Amsterdam in 1764, died 
1794. Orion , an ode ; an elegy on the death of his wife, 
and some Anacreontics. 
Hieronymus van Alphen, born at Gouda in 1746, died 



I N T K O D U C T I N, XXXIX 

1803. Dichtkundige Vcrhandelingen , treatises on poetry ; 
Schoone Kunsten en wetenschappen , on the theory of the 
Fine Arts and Sciences ; Gedichten voor kinder en , Poems 
for Children , the Watts's Hymns of Holland. 

Van der Aa , born at Zwolle in 17 18 , died 1792. His- 
tory , and Natural Philosophy. 

J. D. van Lennep, born at Amsterdam in 1724, died 1 771. 
Literature ; Philology. 

J. F. Martinet , born in North-Brabant in 1729 , died 
1794. Natural History; Physics. 

Dirk Suits, born at Rotterdam in 1702, died 1752. Poetry. 

The following is a specimen of one of the prose writers 
of this century. 

Ons Land , alom doorsneden met wateren , rivieren , 
poelen , en meiren , krielt , waar men zich wende , van 
kleine vaartuigen , waarop de boeren Schippers zyn. Zy 
onderhouden door dat middel de gemeenschap van alle 
Sleden, en Dorpen ; en, hoe onmatig deze vergelyking 
ook inoge schynen , daartoe wordt in verscheidene op- 
zigten dczelfde vaardigheid , zo niet hetzelfde beleid 
vereischt , dat men van nooden heeft om op eenen Zee- 
togt geen nutteloos gezel te zyn. Geen Nederlandsche 
boer , die ten minsten niet van loeven en laveeren weet ; 
weinigen , die niet geleerd hebben een vaartuig te be- 
stieren , te gissen hoe veel winds het voeren kan , tegen 
wind en stroom te roeien , dwarrelwinden te voorzien , 
of zich te redden uit een onverwacht gevaar van zinken 
of vergaan. Velen onder hen, in hunne geboorteplaats 
deze zaken lang genoeg van tydverdryf en spel byge- 
woond hebbende , kunnen de verzoeking niet wederstaan, 
van ook eens op den ruimen Oceaan te zwerven, alwaar 
zy dan gemeenlyk voor al het overige geene tnge leer- 
lingen zyn. Ik kan niet nalaten hierby le voegen , dat 
onze taal ook de kenteekenen draagt van onze gemeen- 
zaamheid met de zeevaart : vooral onder 't gemeen , en 
in den dagelykschen wandel is zy voor het grootste 
deel eene taal van zeelieden. Wy wenden H over dezen 
of geenen ooeg , zoeken eene ree , iverpen ons anker , klampen 
elkander aan ooord , haken naar het voonverp onzer be- 
tjeerte , enz. Wy komen mot erne zee aan land , of dryven 



XL INTRODUCTION. 

op Gods genade. Kortom , geen uur op den dag , dat wy 
niet varen of bezig zyn met ons gety te kavelen. 

S. Styl. 
Translation. 

Our country , everywhere intersected with waters , rivers , 
pools, and lakes, abounds, withersoever one turns, with small 
vessels , of which the peasants are captains. By this means 
they maintain an intercourse between the cities and villages , 
and , however inconsistent this comparison may seem to be , 
there is in many respects the same dexterity required if not the 
same management that is necessary in an experienced shipmate 
on a voyage. There is not a Dutch peasant who has not 
learned to steer a vessel , to guess how much wind it can 
carry, to row against wind and stream, to foresee whirlwinds, 
or to extricate himself from sudden danger of sinking or per- 
ishing. Many of them having followed this long enough as 
pastime and amusement , cannot withstand the temptation , of 
once roving on the wide ocean, where, in every respect, they are 
generally clever apprentices. I cannot omit observing by the 
way that our language bears also the signs of our familiar 
relations with navigation , particularly with the lower class • 
and in our familiar intercourse , it is in a great measure a 
language of navigators. We direct it over this or that bow, 
seek a |roadstead , cast our anchor , board each other's 
vessels , hook on to the object of our desires , etc. We come 
with one sea on shore , or drift at the mercy of God. 
In short not an hour of the day that we do not go by 
water , or are busy suiting ourselves to our tide. 

THE NINETEENTH CENTURY. 

32. The following list embraces the most distinguished 
writers whose works have appeard between the latter 
past of the eighteenth century and the present time. 

P. van Winter , born 1745 , died 1807. Poetry. 

Elias Annes Bqrger, born in Friesland in 1785, died 1820. 
Theology. 

Jan Frederik Helmers , born at Amsterdam in 1767, 
died in 1813. Be Hollandsche Natie , an epic poem ; 
Bardenzangen , Lyric Poems ; Het Haarlemmer Hout , Har- 



INTRODUCTION. XLI 

lem Wood , an elegy ; Lof der Zeevaart , A Eulogy on 
the Nautical Art. 

Joan Meerman , born at the Hague in 1753, died 1825. 
Jurisprudence , Statistics , Literature , History, Biography. 

Arend Fokke Simonsz. born in Amsterdam in 1755 , 
died in 1812. Literature , he wrote generally in a satir- 
ical or numerous style. 

A. Loosjes , Pz. born at Harlem in 1761 , died 1818. 
Maurils Lijnslager ; HUlegonda Buisman ; Susanna Bronkhorst, 
etc. Romances in which the manners and customs of 
the Dutch, at different periods, are depicted; Jakoba van 
Beijeren , etc. historical romances. 

Martinus Stuart , died in 1826. Romeinsche Geschiede- 
nis , Roman History ; Essays ; Leerredenen , Sermons ; Be 
Mensch zoo als hij voorkomt , Man as he is Found. 

D r . van Woensel , Travels in Turkey , Natolia , and 
The Crimea ; Rusland beschouwd , political economy and 
manners of the Russians. 

Haafner , Travels in the East. — 

C. de Jong , History ; Travels in the Mediterranean and 
the East. — 

Rijnvis Feith, born at Zwolle in 1755, died in 1826. 
De Ouderdom , Old Age ; het Graf, the Tomb, epic poems ; 
Thirza etc. tragedies; Fanny, etc. romances; odes, 
treatises. Brieven aan Sophie , a controversy against Kant's 
doctrine. 

(Vrouwe) Madam K. W. Bilderdijk, died in 1830. Poetry. 

Willem Bilderdijk, born at Amsterdam in 1756, died 
1831 ; one of the most learned men and one of the 
most voluminous writers of his time ; his works are com- 
prised in about 150 volumes 8°. containing poems, essays, 
history , Dutch grammar , etc. 

N. G. van Kampen, born at Harlem in 1776, died — 
Geschiedenis der letteren en wetenschappen , History of Lite- 
rature and the Sciences ; Lotgevallen der dichtkunst , history 
of ancient and modern poetry ; over de Heldendichten, essay 
on epic poetry. 

J. Kinker, born at Niewer-Amstel in 1764, died in — 
Wy'sgeerige algemeene Theorie der Talen , General and Phi- 
losophic Theory of Languages; poems on various subjets: 
Verlossing en Herstelling van Nederland y Liberation and 
Restoration of the Netherlands, a lyric poem. 



XLII INTRODUCTION. 

J. H. van der Palm, born at Rotterdam in 1763, died 
1840. Author of various sermons; Funeral orations, Es- 
says etc. Nederlands Herstelling , Restoration of the Nether- 
lands , an essay; he made a translation of the Bible. 

G. Bruining. Philology. — 

J. Immerzeel , Jr. , born at Dordrecht in 1776 , died 1841. 
Poetry; Fiction: Hugo van 't woud, Hugo of the Wood, 
an elegiac poem; Be Moederliefde , Maternal Love. 

(Be Vrouwen,) Mesdames Bekker-Wolf en Deken. 
Willem Levend; Sara Burgerhart ; Cornelia Wildschut, ro- 
mances; Wandelingen door Bourgondie, a descriptive poem. — 

H. van Wijn. Historische en Letterkundige Awndstonden , 
and Huiszittend Leven , criticisms on the history , litera- 
ture, and customs of the Netherlands. — 

Samuel Isc. Wiselius, Polydorus; Adelaide en Mathilde: 
Jon; Alcestes; Malek-Adhel; Prins Karel; tragedies. Het 
Herder suurtje , the shepherd's hour, an erotic poem. — 

H. H. Klijn, born at Amsterdam in 1T73. Lyric poems 
Tragedies; Odes; Elegies. 

Barend Klijn, Oldenbarneveld ; Heldendood van de Ruiter, 
Lyric poems; Montigne , a tragedy; Odes : Elegies, etc. 

Witsen Gysbeek, Literature, Phylology, Poetry. Woor- 
denboek, Biographical Dictionary; Eer en Eerzucht, Honor 
and Ambition , a satirical poem ; Epigrams. 

J. A. Weiland, scribleriana , numerous essays. — 

Mathijs Siegenbeek, born in Amsterdam 1774. Gram- 
mar. Verhandeling over de Nederlandsche Spelling, Treatise 
on Dutch Orthography. 

Jacobus Scheltema, born atFranekerin 1767. Literature; 
History; Philology; Staatkvndig Nederland, Biography of 
Netherlands States-men; Peter de Groote , relation of the 
residence of Peter the Great in the Netherlands; Rusland 
en de Nederlanden , the influence of Holland on the civi- 
lization of Russia; Geschied- en Letterkandig Mengelwerk , 
Historical and Literary Miscellany. 

P. Weiland, Phylology; Nederduitsch Taalknndig Woor- 
denboek, Dictionary of the Dutch language; Nederduitsche 
spraakkunst , Dutch Grammar. — 

A. Ypey, Kerkelijke Geschiedenis , History of the Chris- 
tian church ; Geschiedenis der Nederlandsche Taal en Let- 
terkunde , History of the Dutch Language and Literature. — 

Hamaker. — Oriental Literature. — 



I N T R D U C T I O X. XLI1I 

M. C. van Hall, born at Vianen in 1768. Literature; 
Poetry; Translator of Classic Authors. 

H. Tollens, born at Rotterdam in 1780; one [pf the 
most popular poets of the day : Lukrelia, a tragedy; 
Het Gevallen Mtisje, The Fallen Maid; Willem de Eerste , 
a lyric poem; Minnedkhtjes , erotic poems; Romances and 
Rallads. An edition of ten thousand copies of his poems 
in three volumes, was promptly sold among a population 
s hort of three millions. 

D. J. van Lennep, born in Amsterdam in 1774, Litera- 
ture; Poetry. Roos van Dekama, Romance. 

B. H. Lllofs, born at Zutphen in 1787. Literature; 
Philology. 

J. v. d. Hoop, born at Rotterdam. Poetry; died 1841: 

Poems on various subjects. 
Isaac da Costa, born at Amsterdam in 1797. Poetry 
J. M. Kemper, born at Amsterdam in 1776, died 1824; 

Jurisprudence ; Statistics. 

C. W. Westerbaan , Literature ; Poetry, died — 
F. van Teutem, Pulpit Eloquence. 
Spandauw. — Poetry. 

Staring van den Wildenborgh. — Poetry. 

J. Nierstraas. — died — Poetry. 

Jeronimo de Vries , Geschiedenis der Dichtkimde , History 
of Dutch Poetry , down to the 18th. century. 

Loots. — Poetry. 

Van Walre. — Poetry, died — 

Warnsink. — Poetry. 

J. F. Willems, born at Antwerp. Over de Hollandsche 
en Vlaamsche Schrijfwijzen, on Dutch and Flemish Ortho- 
graphy. 

Withlts. — Poetry. 

Rheinwardt. — Natural History. 

Temmink. — Natural History. 

Collot d'Escury , — History ; Hollands roem in Kunsten 
en Wetenschappen , The Renown of Holland in the Arts 
and Sciences. 

A. de Jager, — Philology. 

Hoeufft , — Philology ; Poetry. 

Hoeufft, van Heusde ; Hofman-Peerlkavp ; R. F. 
Tydeman, and others, distinguished as Latin writers. 

Many more contemporary writers of eminence might 



XL1V INTRODUCTION. 

be added to this list , but our limits preclude their 
insertion. 

The following extract from an essay by van der Palm 
who, as already stated, is allowed to be one of the pu- 
rest prose-writers that Holland has yet produced, will exhibit 
the state to which the language has arrived , both as to 
its orthography , and its structure. 

Er is voor de menschelijkheid geen schooner schouw- 
spel , dan de val eens Dwingelands. Nooit zag de we- 
reld er een' grooteren dan Napoleon Buonaparte , nooit 
eene vernedering gelijk aan de zijne. Gansch Eu- 
ropa lag aan zijne voeten. Pruissen had in eenen veld- 
slag alles verloren en beslond slechts door des overwin- 
naars genade. Duitschland huldigde zijnen verdrukker 
onder den nieuwen titel van Beschermer; Zwitzerland 
onder dien van Bemiddelaar. Belgie was reeds vroeg 
aan Frankrijk gehecht; de Hollandsche gewesten, lang 
geplaagd en uitgemergeld , waren eindelijk zonder schaam- 
te ingezwolgen. Gekwetste eer had Deneniarken voor 
hem gewonnen. Zweden had een' Franschen krijgsman 
tot de erfenis der Karels en Gustaven geroepen. In 
Italien werd geene andere magt geeerbiedigd dan de 
zijne. Oostenrijk, van zijne schoonste Provincien berooft 
perstte nog het bloed zijner onderdanen in drukkende 
oorlogschattingen voor hem af , toen het hem eene Prin- 
ses schonk op zijnen bezoedelden troon in zijn geschonden 
huwelijksbed. Want de misdaad, door de overwinning 
bekroond, in oorlogsroem gehuld , boezemde ontzag in, 
meer dan afgrijzen. Aan haar zich te onderwerpen , 
s"cheen hetzelfde te zijn, als den verborgen wil des He- 
mels te eerbiedigen ; haar tegenstand te bieden, gelijke 
dwaasheid , als tegen Gods bestellingen te kampen. Het 
was als of door hare hand de Voorzienigheid kroonen 
uitdeelde, en oude stamhuizen met haren vloek wilde 
treffen, om nieuwe dynastien in derzelver plaats te 
scheppen. 

Translation. 

There is not for man a more delightful spectacle than the 
down- fall of a tyrant. The world mver witnessed one greater 



INTRODDCTIO X. XLV 

than that of Napoleon Buonaparte , never was there a hu» 
milicftion like his. All Europe was prostrate before him. 
Prussia in one campaign had lost all, and existed only at 
the mercy of the conqueror. Germany paid homage to its 
oppressor under the new title of Protector ; Switzerland under 
that of Mediator. Belgium was already at an earlier period 
joined to France; the Dutch provinces for a long time har- 
rassed and exhausted, were finally swallowed up in it with- 
out a blush. Wounded honor had gained Denmark over to him. 
Sweden had a French warrior chosen to the heritage of the 
Charlses and the Gustayes. In Italy no authority was re- 
cognized but his. Austria , deprived of its finest Provinces , 
pressed out the blood of its subjects for him in heavy war- 
taxes , when it gave him a princess as partner of his viola- 
ted throne and dishonored marriage-bed. For crime, crown- 
ed by conquest , invested ivith military glory , inspired autho- 
rity, more than detestation. To subject one self to it, appeared 
to be the same , as doing honor to the hidden will of Hea- 
ven ; to resist it , was a like folly , it was like contending 
against God's ordinances. It was as if providence distributed 
crowns by its hands , and would strike ancient hereditaries 
with its curse , in order to create new Dynasties in their 
places. 

53. Since the separation of the Northern and Southern 
provinces of the Netherlands in the middle of the seven- 
teenth century , down to the present time , the Flemish 
language and literature has remained stationary, and not 
more than two or three Flemish works of reputation 
have appeared in that period. De Ira, The Rage, of 
the Jesuit de Meijer; Verhandeling over de Nederduitsche 
Taal en Letterkunde opzigtelijk de Zuidelijke Provincien 
der Nederlanden , A Treatise on the Netherlands Language 
and Literature especially the Southern Provinces of the 
Netherlands , by F. Willems , a Patriotic Fleming. Be- 
haegel , a Fleming , has written an elaborate Nederduit- 
che Spraakkunst , Grammar of the Netherlands Language , 
Bruges, 1830, in which he sometimes exhibits sound pe- 
netration and reasoning , and developes the mechanism 
of the language : his criticisms on some of the changes 
in the Dutch orthography , as fixed by Siegenbeek , are 
founded on an objection to a deviation from that of the 
more ancient writers. 



XLVI INTRODUCTION. 

The following extract from the last mentioned Flemish 
work will show how little the present Flemish Ortho- 
graphy differs from that of the 16th. century , whilst 
a comparison of it with that of the Modern Dutch will 
exhibit some of the principal changes which have been 
made in this particular. 

Modern Flemish. 

Den mensch is geboren ora wel te redeneren , alle de 
pogingcn , welke men tot de opvoeding der kinderen 
aanwend, moeten de ontwikkeling en verbetering der 
zielsvermoogens voor doelwit hebben , en men zal hun 
nooyt redenlyk maaken indien men met hun niet rede- 
neert. Het grootste heyl welk men aan de jongheyd , 
en by gevolg aan geheel de maatschappy , kan toebren- 
gen , is , in het leeren der menschelyke kennissen , eenen 
leerweg te volgen , welken , niet op eene wilkeurige , 
maar op eene redeneerende wys voordgaande , het ver- 
stand der kinderen meer ontwikkele , en hun gewenne 
van in alle hunne werken volgens de reden te handelen ; 
hetwelk niet alleen moet invloed hebben op de kunsten 
en weetenschappen welke het voorwerp hunner veront- 
lediging zyn , maar zelfs eenen grooten spoorslag weezen 
kan, om te komen tot het bestendig gel uk , waar voor 
den mensch geschapen is.. 

Translation. 

Man is born to reason rightly , all the means which are 
employed in educating children must ham for object the de- 
veloping and improving of the mental faculties, and we shall 
never make them rational if we do not reason with them. 
The greatest good which wj can confer on youth , and con- 
sequently on society , is , in the teaching of human know- 
ledge , to follow that path which unfolds more and more 
the understanding of children , not in pursuing an arbitrary 
but rather a rational manner , and to accustom them to act, 
in all that they do , according to reason ; which must not only 
have an influence on the arts and sciences , which is the 
object of their pursuits , but can even prove to be an impor- 
tant means of arriving at permanent happiness for which 
man is created. 



I N T R D U C T I V. XLVIi 

34. During the last forty years much has been done 
for the improvement of the Dutch language particularly 
in giving to it a fixed and standard orthography. The 
institution of a literary society at Leiden under the title 
of Maatschappij der Nederlandsche Letterkunde , Netherlands 
Literary Society , has done much in the furtherance of 
this object ; one transaction of this society was the is- 
suing of a plan for a Dictionary of the Dutch language, 
which was carried into execution by M r . Weiland , who 
adopted a spelling previously laid down by Professor 
Siegenbeek , in his Verhandeling over de Nederduitsche Spel- 
ling , Treatise on the Dutch Orthography. This Dictionary 
received the approbation of the society , and the spel- 
ling of Professor Siegenbeek became sanctioned and adop- 
ted by the Dutch Government , by an edict , in 1805 ; 
and these two works are now universally accepted by 
the nation at large as standard works of reference for 
the orthography and structure of the language. 

35. The language of the Netherlands compared with the 
English and most other European languages, is not spoken 
over a great extent of territory , and is not the mother 
tongue of more than about six millions of souls; as may 
be exhibited thus : 

In Belgium , comprehending the North Western 

Provinces , the language of which is Flemish 2,500,000. 

North Netherlands, Modern Dutch 2,800,000. 

Dutch Colonies . . . , » 700,000. 

6,000,000. 



E R R Jt T *4. 



ige 


13, 


ine 


10, 


for 


ceel „ 


read eel. 


» 


99, 


9 


20, 


j> 


only , 


» 


only. 


» 


101, 


» 


3, 


» 


moiled , 


» 


mollen. 


» 


102, 


V 


24, 


» 


travail , 


» 


travel. 


» 


112, 


9 


16, 


» 


anounced 


9 


announced. 


T> 


121, 


» 


24, 


» 


be for 


9 


before. 


9 


123, 


» 


16, 


» 


ingorant 


» 


ignorant. 


9 


128, 


» 


20, 


» 


vallued , 


» 


valued. 


» 


144, 


9 


18, 


» 


gray 


» 


grey. 


9 


145, 


9 


20, 


» 


do 


» 


to do. 


» 


152, 


9 


23, 


» 


vewoestingen , 


» 


verwoestingen 


» 


154, 


9 


4, 


» 


dansed 


» 


danced. 


:> 


160, 


» 


12, 


» 


shange 


» 


strange. 


» 


171, 


9 


1, 


9 


reheasal 


9 


rehearsal. 



DUTCH GRAMMAR 



-~^s>^c??* 



Dutch Grammar, Hollandsche Spraakleer, is the art of speak- 
ing and writing the Dutch language conformable to the 
practices and prescribed rules of the most eminent learn- 
ed men of the Dutch nation and as established by the 
usage and custom of the Dutch at large. 

Dutch Grammar, like the grammars of other European 
languages , is divided into Orthography , Etymology , Syn- 
tax, and Prosody. 



DUTCH ORTHOGRAPHY. 



Orthography , klank- en spelkanst , treats of the sounds and 
powers of letters, and of their combinations into syllables 
and words. 

Words or names of things and ideas are conveyed from 
man to man by modifications of the voice, which is speech, 
spraak; or by letters combined into written words, as signs 
for conveying these names from man to man , which is 
writing , het schrjjven . 

LETTERS. 

A letter, eene letter, is the sign or mark used in writing 
or printing to represent words or the names of things and 
ideas. 

The letters of the Dutch language, as at present used 
in writing and printing, are the same in form as those 
used by the English, but some of them are differently 
sounded. l. 



2 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION 

The whole of the letters, twenty six in number , is call- 
ed the Alphabet, or a. b. c, het alphabet-, these letters are 
thus formed and sounded: 

THE ALPHABET. 



A. 


a. 


sounded 


a 


as heard 


in 


father 


B, 


b. 


» 


bay 


» 




bed. 


C. 


c. 


» 


say 


» 




say. 


D. 


d. 


» 


day 


» 




day. 


E. 


e. 


» 


a 


, like e in 


bed. 


F. 


f. 


» 


ef, 


as heard 


in 


foot. 


G. 


S- 


» 


say> 


see remarks 


under this letter. 


H. 


h. 


» 


haa , 


as heard 


in 


hard. 


I. 


i. 


» 


e, 


like e in 




be. 


J. 


J- 


» 


y a » 


like y 


in 


yelp. 


K. 


k. 


» 


kaa , 


as heard 


in 


king. 


L. 


I. 


» 


el 


» 




lion. 


M. 


m. 


» 


em 


» 




man. 


N. 


n. 


» 


en 


» 




no. 


0. 


0. 


» 


o 


» 




no. 


P. 


P. 


» 


pay 


» 




pay- 


Q. 


q. 


» 


coo 


» 




cooper. 


R. 


r. 


» 


err 


» 




err. 


S. 


s. 


» 


es 


» 




mess. 


T. 


t. 


» 


tai 


» 




tailor. 


IT. 


u. 


» 


oo 


» 




tool. 


V. 


V. 


» 


vai 


» 




vain. 


W. 


w. 


» 


way 


see remark 


s under this letter. 


X. 


X. 


» 


ecks , 


as heard 


m 


decks. 


y. 


y- 


» 


i 


» 




mine. 


z. 


z. 


» 


zed 


» 




zed. 



Of these letters , q , x, y, and c uncombined with h , 
are only met with in some proper names or words ta- 
ken over from other languages. 

The letters of the alphabet are divided into vowels 
and consonants. 

The vowels, Minkletters, are a, e, i, o, u, representing 
a simple sound which can be perfectly uttered by itself. 

The consonants, medeMinkers , which form the remainder 
of the alphabet, cannot be perfectly uttered without the 
aid of one of the vowel sounds; as, 5, be; c, ce; f, ef, etc. 



A N I) ORTHOGK APII V 3 

THE SOUNDS AND POWERS OF THE LETTERS. 

The letters of the Dutch Alphabet, represent, seperate- 
ly and combined, thirty eight different distinct sounds 
which may be compared with analogous sounds in En- 
glish; except those of u, ui, eu, cuw , g, and ch. 

Every letter , entering into the composition of a word , 
must be sounded ; as , blad , leaf. 

THE SOUNDS OF THE SINGLE VOWELS. 
A. 

A has a short and a long sound. 

It is short when placed before a consonant in the same 
syllable, and is sounded partly like a in cat, and partly 
like a in malt ; as heard in 

al all bast bark kat cat 

bak-ken to bake markt market ark arch. 

It sounds long at the end of a syllable, and is then 
like that of a in father; as heard in 

sla salad ma-ken to make. sta stand 

ha-len to fetch ra-den to advise la-den to load. 

E. 

E has three sounds : a short, a long, and a soft short. 
It is short when placed before a consonant in the same 
syllable, and is like the English e in bed; as heard in 



heb have 


leg lay 


pen pen 


bed bed 


hen them 


en and. 



It is long in words of two or more syllables when the 
accent falls on it, and sounds then like the English a in 
make; as heard in 

he-den to day ve-der feather we-reld world 

le-der leather me-ten to measure le-zen to read. 

It has a soft short sound when terminating monosylla- 
bles, and when terminating a syllabic in words of more 
than one syllable when the accent does not fall upon it; 
and it is then sounded like the English e in begin; as 
heard in 



DUTCH PRONUNCIATION 

de the be-ginnen to begin ga-ve gift 

ze them hit-te heat goe-de good. 



I has two sounds : a sharp short , and a soft short. 

It is sharp short when followed by a consonant in the 
same syllable and is sounded like i short in English; as 
heard in 

vinden to find blik tin lid limb 

in in wind wind zin inclination. 

Monosyllables ending in i, taking the particle en, require 
the letter j before the particle ; as lei , a slate , leijen> 
slates ; kooi , a cage , kooijen , cages. 

It is soft short at the end of unaccented syllables in 
polysyllables, and sounds then like the above i short, but 
is softer; as heard in 

wijzi-gen to modify aankondi-gen to proclaim l-talie Italy. 
bezi-gen to use i-voor ivory huldi-gen to install. 

I has no long sound and never terminates an accented 
syllable; ij being substituted for the long i. 

©• 

has a short and a long sound : it is short when follow- 
ed by a consonant in the same syllable and sounds like 
the short English o in not; as heard in 

om for mond mouth pond pound 
mol mole slot lock vol-gen to follow. 

It is long at the end of accented syllables in words of 
more than one syllable, and is then sounded like the 
long o in English, as heard in done; as in 

bo-ter butter zo-mer summer o-penen to open 

lo-ven to praise bo-ven above ko-men to come. 

II. 

U has a short and a lonp: sound. 



AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 5 

It is short when followed by a consonant in the same 
syllable , and is sounded like the short English u in hut ; 
as heard in 

dun thin vul-len to fill nut use 
zus-tcr sister hut hut fust cask. 

It is long when terminating accented syllables in words 
of more than one syllable, and is sounded like the French 
u , or German ii , and nearly like the English oo in booty ; 
as heard in 

mu-ren walls nabu-ren neighbours vu-ren fires 

hu-ren to hire du-ren to last ku-ren caprices. 

SOUNDS OF THE UNITED VOWELS. 

The double vowels aa , ee , oo, uu , are sounded like the 
same single vowels when long; however some will have 
ee and oo sounded sharper than the e and o long; as: 

Aa , as heard in 

daad action aal eel slaap sleep 

raad counsel taal language gelaat face. 

A syllable never ends in aa ; thus monosyllables in aa , 
taking a particle , drop one of the a's , and the final con- 
sonant is carried to the particle, as in daad, da-den; raad, 
ra-den; aal, a-len. 

Ee, as heard in 

been leg veel much deel part 

neen no tee-ken to draw dee-len to divide. 

The sound of the ee when spoken sharper than that 
of long e , is like the English a as sounded in the north 
of England by the vulgar. 

Oo , as heard in 

boot boat voor for dood death 

nood need noot nut boom tree. 

The sound of oo, as heard in slooten, ditches, is sounded 
by some sharper than the o long as heard in sloten , locks. 

Uu , as heard in 

rauur wall duur dear huur hire 

zuur sour be-stuur direction guur sharp. 



6 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION 

A syllable never ends in uu ; in monosyllables in uu , 
taking a particle , one of the vowels is dropped and the 
final consonant is carried to the particle; as in muur, mu-ren; 
vuur , vu-ren , etc. 

The diphthongs and triphthongs ai, aai, au, aau, eu, eeu, 
ei , ie , ieu, oe , oei , ooi , ou, and ui , are thus sounded : 

Ai. This union is only met with in the exclamation ai ! 
o! and is sounded partly like the English long i and oi. 

Aai. The sound of this triphthong is a combination of 
the long Dutch a and short i , being nearly like that of 
the English long i in idle; as in 

taai tough zaai-jen to soio fraai pretty kraai croxo 
kaai quay maai-jen to mow haai shark saai-jet worsted. 

Au. The sound of au is that of a long and u short com- 
bined , and approaches to the sound of aw in English ; 
as in 

paus pope dau-wel slut au ! oh! 

Pau-lus Paul kauw jackdaw au-gustus august. 

Aau. The sound of this triphthong is like that of au 
lengthened; as in 

laauw lukewarm gaauw quick maau-wen to mew 
naauw narrow raauw raw flaauw feint. 

Ei. The sound of ei is a combination of the sounds of 
the short e and short soft i, and is nearly like that of i 
long in English ; as in 

maid maid- vermei-den to avoid reis journey 
bei-de both klein small lei-den to suffer. 

Eu. The sound of eu is a combination of the short 
sounds of e and u , approaching to the sound of the English 
u in rule; as in 

reuk scent leu-nen to lean eu-vel evil 

deun ballad heu-vel hill heup hip. 

Eeu. The sound of this triphthong is that of the long e 
and short u combined ; as heard in 

sneeuw snow leeuw lion spreeuw starling 

meeu-wen to mew eeuw century eeu-wen to eternize. 



AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 



Ie sound like the long e , as in me ; as heard in 



iet reed 


dier animal 


He-den people 


iel soul 


tien ten 


lie-gen to lie. 



leu. The sound of ieu is a combination of that of ie and 
m short ; as heard in 

nieuw new nieuws news nieu-wigheid newness 
hieu-wen to cut kieuw gill 

Oe. Is sounded like the English oo in cool ; as heard in 

boek book toen then kalkoen turkey 

doen to do hoek corner bezoe-ken to visit. 

Oei. The sound of this triphthong is that of oe swerving 
into that of i soft short ; as heard in 

foei! fil loei-jen to loio snoei-jen to lop 

stoei-jen to jest broei-jen to hatch koei cow. 

Ooi. The sound of ooi is that of oo , and i soft short ; 
as heard in 

hooi hay hooi-jen to makehay gooi-jen to throw 
kooi cage nooit never mooi pretty, 

Ou sounds like the English on in bound; as heard in 

oud old zout salt kous stocking 

hout wood bou-wen to build trou-wen to marry. 

Ui. The sound of ui is that of the u short swerving into 
that of soft short i ; as heard in 

huis house bui-ten without rui-ter horseman 

muis mouse krui-den herbs vuist fist. 

THE SOUNDS OF THE SINGLE CONSONANTS. 

The consonants , b, c, d, f, h , k , I , m , n, p, s, t, v, • 
and #, in syllables, are sounded in Dutch as in English; 
though, o, c, d, k, p, t> and v, have in Dutch a different 
name sound to that in English, as is exhibited in the alpha- 
bet; however there is no difference in their sounds in syl- 
lables. 



8 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION. 

The consonants g , j , w, have sounds peculiar to the 
Dutch language : j being sounded like the y in English , 
and the sounds of g and w have no analogous sound in 
English. 

The consonants are divided into labials, lipletters; Un- 
guals, tongletters ; dentals, tandletters ; and gutturals, keel- 
letters , being so named from the organs mainly called into 
use in their utterance. 

The labials are those pronounced by the motion of the 
lips ; as , b, f, m , p , v , w. 

The Unguals are those pronounced by the motion of the 
tongue against the palate ; as, d, I, n, r, t. 

The dentals are pronounced by bringing the tongue to 
the teeth ; as , s , z , and c sounded soft like s. 

The gutturals are those whose sounds are formed in the 
throat ; as , g , k , q , x sounded ks , and c sounded k. 

Consonants are also divided into soft and sharp : the 
soft consonants are b, d, g, l t m, n, r, v, w, and z: 
the sharp consonants are ch, f, h, k , p , s , and t. 

A consonant, between two vowels, is joined to the latter; 
as, ba-den, to bathe; mo-gelijk, possible; vroa-wen, women, 

Monosyllables ending wiih a consonant preceded by a 
short vowel generally double the final consonant in the 
plural ; as , bal a ball , batten ; pop a dol , poppen ; klip a 
rock, klippen; there are however many exceptions to this 
rule; as, god, deity, goden ; hof, court, hovcn ; slot, lock, 
sloten, and many others. 

Two consonants between two vowels are commonly se- 
parated; as, blik-sem , lightning; don-der, thunder; mor-sig, 
dirty ; except when the consonants are preceded by a 
particle ending with a vowel; as , ge-blepen , remained ; 
be-grip , comprehension. 

When three consonants come between two vowels in 
words of two or more syllables, the first consonant remains 
to the foregoing syllable and the two last to the following ; 
as , dien-sten , services ; vor-sten , princes. 



B is sounded bay in the alphabet; but in words it 
sounds as in English ; as in 

baard beard bab-belen to babble knab-belen to knaw 
bed bed be-ker cup rab-belen to rattle. 



AND ORTHOGRAP II Y. 9 

C. 

C sounds say in the alphabet. In syllables , it has two 
sounds : hard like k, before a, o, u , and r; soft before 
e, i t and y; as in 

Ca-to Cato Cupi-do Cupid ci-der cider 

commis-saris commissary ce-der cedar Cy-rus Cyrus. 

e is mute before z in Czar , Emperor of Russia. 

D sounds day in the alphabet ; but in syllables , it is 
sounded as in English ; as in 

dak roof de-ken sheet don-deren to thunder 
daad action dood death dod-derig drowsy. 

F is sounded in the alphabet and in words as in En- 
glish ; as in 

wolf wolf dof-fer cockpigeon begra-fenis funeral 

fak-kel torch graf grace flu-weel velvet 

graaf earl pof-fen to bounce. 

Monosyllables terminating in f, when inflected, generally 
change f into v, when the particle begins with a vowel ; 
as, wolf, wolven; graf, graven; except graaf, grafelijk, like 
an earl , gravelijkheid, an earldom; graf, begrafenis, a funeral. 



G is sounded gay in the alphabet; it has a sound more 
guttural than the hard English g and is produced by draw- 
ing the root of the tongue still more downwards into 
the throat ; as heard in 

goed good be-gin beginning wag-geleu to stagger 

groot great rege-ring government nut-tigen to use. 



H is sounded haa, as in the alphabet; in words it sounds 
as in English and must be always heard ; as in 

hoed hat he-mel heaven be-handelen to treat 
helft half hand hand ge-haat hated. 



10 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION 

J. 

J sounds yay in the alphabet , and in words its sound is 
analogous to that of y in English ; as in 

ja yes be-jaard aged jaar year 

Jan John jui-chen to rejoice be-jammeren to lament. 

14. 

K is sounded kaa in the alphabet, and in words it sounds 
as in English ; as in 

kat cat klank sound kik-ker frog 

kin chin ker-ker prison keu-ken kitchen. 



L has the same sound as in English , both in the alpha- 
bet and in words ; as in 

lang long kal-len to babble stal-len to stall 

le-ven to live le-lie lilly mal-len to jest. 

M is pronounced in the alphabet and in words , as in 
English ; as in 

mank lame maar but tal-men to loiter 

melk milk mom mask kam-men to comb. 

ar. 

N is sounded as in English , both in the alphabet and in 
words; as in 

naad seam bin-nen within wen-nen to accustom 
neen no dan-ken to thank nooit never. 



P sounds pay in the alphabet , and in words as in En- 
glish ; as in 

pik pitch pen pen pap-pig pappy 

pa- pier paper po-pel poplar pap pap. 



AND O UTHOGli A P 11 V. n 



Q in the alphabet sounds coo , as in cook ; in words , it 
sounds like k. 

This letter is only met with in proper names and words 
adopted from other languages , and even in these words the 
k is often used instead of it; as in 

Qua-liteit or kwa liteit quality quad-raat or kwa-draat quadrature 
quar-to or kwar-to quarto quad-rant or kwa-drant quadrant. 



R is sounded err , in the alphabet , in words it has al- 
ways the hard sound of the English r ; as in 

rijk rich be-daard sedate her-zien to review 

waar-lijk really waar true har-rewar-ren to wrangle. 



S is always sounded as in English in the alphabet ; in 
words it sounds like the sharp English s in sin; as in 

saai serge muis mouse sis-sen to siss 

som-tijds sometimes sits chintz lis loop. 

Words in s final , not doubled in the plural , and when 
the particle begins with a vowel , the s is then generally 
changed into z in the plural; as in huis , house, huizen; 
muis , mouse , muizen ; except kous , stocking , kousen ; and 
some others. 

T. 

T sounds tay in the alphabet , and in words it sounds 
like t in title ; as in 

tand tooth tien ten hut hut 

ten-ger tender stot-tercn to stutter hut-ten huts. 

V sounds vay in the alphabet, but in words, it is sounded 
as in English. It is never doubled, and never terminates 
a syllable ; as in 

vet fat sto-ven to stew vleesch flesh 

vro-lijk cheerful vis-scher fisherman ge-vaar danger. 



12 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION 

W. 

W has a sound between the English w and v , it is half 
labial and half dental, and is uttered by bringing the lower 
lip and upper teeth slightly in contact; as in 

wel well wal rampart werken to work 

wil-len to will wen-nen to accustom wen-telen to roll. 



X is sounded ecks in the alphabet , as also in words ; it 
is met with only in proper names ; as 

Xe-nophon Xenophon Xer-xes Xerxes 

Alex-ander Alexander Alex-andrie Alexandria. 

Y. 

F is sounded in the alphabet partly like the English i , 
and partly like the Dutch I, it may be said to be a sound 
between the two : this letter is now expunged from the 
modern Dutch alphabet , the ij being substituted in its 
stead ; it is thus met with only in old spelling, and proper 
names from other languages ; as, Cyrus, Cyrus ; Assyrie , 
Assyria; Abyssinie , Abyssinia; however, some modern 
writers with the late M r . Bilderdijk at their head, maintain 
the use of y in some words. 



Z is sounded as in English , both in the alphabet and 
in words ; as in 

zand sand zeelt tench be-zeeren to hurt 

ziel soul be-zielen to animate zeer sore. 

SOUNDS OF THE UNITED LETTERS CH, AND IJ. 

CM. 

The ch is sounded still more guttural than the g , but 
somewhat sharper ; as in 

visch fish doch hut schen-ken to give 

schip ship bosch wood be-schrijven to describe. 



AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 13 

S, in monosyllables ending in sch, preceded by a short 
vowel , wben inflected , the s is doubled ; as in visch , vis- 
schen ; bosch , bosschen. 

i jr. 

The combined letters ij are used instead of the long i 
or ii , and also in place of the Greek y. They are sounded 
nearly like the long English % in mine; as in 

mij my mijn mine schijn appearance 

zijn his fijn fine lijm glue. 

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON DUTCH PRONUNCIATION, 
ACCENT , AND SPELLING. 

Every letter composing a monosyllable, and every sylla- 
ble in a compound word , are distinctly sounded : in words 
of more than one syllable there is always one of them on 
which a particular stress is laid, which is called accent, 
and this syllable is called the accented syllable, and is 
the root of the word or radical syllable. 

Dividing a word into syllables or syllabication is the ana- 
lysis of it into its root and the particles and words of 
which it is composed. 

The root of a word is the elementary syllable ; as, min , 
love, in min-aar , lover 

Particles are those syllables added to words in their 
inflections, or in extension of their meanings: when placed 
at the beginning of words, they are called Initial Par- 
ticles , and when at the end, they are called Terminational 
Particles; to the former class belong: be, er , ge , her, mis, 
on, ont , ver, and wan; and to the latter: aar, ceel, er, eren, 
ig , ij , ing , is, ooi or ooijen , they always constitute a dis- 
tinct syllable ; as , be-min-nen , to love ; ge-haat , hated ; 
lijd-er , sufferer. 

For the sake of euphony , a letter is sometimes added 
to a word , and sometimes one letter is supplanted by 
another ; as , 

1. The short soft e is often placed at the end of a 
word to give it a softer sound ; as in 

God Gode , God. rust ruste , rest. 



14 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION 

taal tale , language. maat mate , measure. 

hoop hope , hope. leer leere , doctrine. 

dag dage , day. spraak sprake , speech. 

vrouw vrouwe , woman. huizing huizinge , residence. 

goed goedc , good. breuk breuke , rupture. 

2. The short soft e is also often placed before the ter- 
minational particles lijk and loos; as in 

gelde-loos , moneyless. rijke-lijk , richly. 

verdrage-lijk , supportable. onnoeme-lijk , nameless. 

vorste-lijk , princely. moede-loos , lowspirited. 

bevatte-lijk , comprehensible. schrifte-lijk , in writing. 

In all such like cases, the e and preceding consonant 
form a distinct syllable. 

3. D is often placed before er and held , in order to 
break the otherwise too hollow sound; as in 

bitter-der , bitterer. huur-der , tenant. 

zuiver-der , purer. uitvoer-der , performer. 

zwaar-der , heavier. 

4 V having too soft a sound to terminate a word , is 
sometimes replaced by / in words ending in is or lijk , and 
the termination is preceded by the short soft e; as in 

begraven begrafe-nis , funeral. laven lafe-nis , refreshment. 

{erfe-lijk , hereditary. sterven sterfe-lijk , mortal. 
erfe-nis , inheritance. 

5. G preceded by n in the same syllable, is sometimes 
replaced by k in compounds ; as 

/ jon-ker , boy. 

jong < jonk-heer , young nobleman. 

( jonk- vrouw, young lady. 

f konink-ie , a little kinq. 
komng ' 



! 



konink-lijk , royal. 
vangen ontvanke-lijk , receivable. 

6. Some words admit of being spelled differently, not 
having as yet attained a fixed form ; as , 

artillerie artillerij , artillery. groffelijk grovelijk , roughly. 
gerief gerijf , convenience. adem asem , breath. 



AND ORTHOGRAPHY. IS 

bondel bundel , bundle. 
afscrapsel afschrabsel , afschraapsel , scrapings. 
aanwendsel aanwcnst , custom. 

and many others. 

All words introduced from foreign languages , will have 
the accent on the last syllable , as also words taking the 
terminationals ij , en , or kant ; as in 

prigel bower kronijk chronicle krediet credit 

monarch monarch branderij distillery profijt profit 

garnizoen garrison muzikant musician. 

except the verbs in eren, which take the accent on the 
first e ; as in 

grave-ren to engrave kaute-ren to exercise 

solde-ren to solder boetse-ren to work in relief 

rege-ren to govern debite-ren to debit. 

In words of more than one syllable , in which one of 
them ends in a vowel succeeded by a syllable beginning 
with a vowel or diphthong, the latter has a mark placed 
over it; as in 

be-zien berries ge-erft inherited ge-ent engrafted 

pri-eel a bower ge-eindigd ended ba-lien bars. 

Marks or accents are also sometimes placed over the 
diphthongs ee in e'en, one, and oo in voor, before, in situ- 
ations where they require an extraordinary emphasis ; as 
in the first when employed as a numeral ; and in the lat- 
ter, when employed as an adverb. 

Latin, Greek, and Hebrew proper names, retain for the 
most part the same spelling in Dutch, which they have in 
the language from which they are derived; as, Cato, Cy- 
rus, Xerxes, Virgilius, Adam. 

Modern European Christian names retain for the most 
part the Latin orthography , except in some cases wherein 
they conform more or less to a modification accordant 
with the genius of the Dutch language ; as in 

Jacobus, Jakob, Jaap, Koos , James. 
Catharina , Katrijn , Trijn , Ka , Catherine. 
Cornelius, Kornelis, Kees, Nelis, Cornelius. 



16 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Etymology, woor daf hiding , en woordwending , treats of 
words or the parts of speech, their derivation and various 
modifications. 

WORDS 

A word, een woord, is the name of a thing, animate 
or inanimate; it is also the name of a state or an action 
of a thing, or of the human mind, and also of a qua- 
lification of a thing, or of an idea. 

One , or two , or more letters united, form a syllable , 
and a syllable must have at least one vowel ; as , al , all ; 
man, man. 

Dutch words , as being of Teutonic origin , when simple 
and uninfected, are mostly monosylables, but these monosyl- 
lables , in their inflections , commonly take one or more ad- 
ditional syllables; as, lees, read, le-zen, to read, ge-le-zen, 
read. Two or more words also become united, and thus 
form words of so many syllables; as, goed, good, heid, 
ness , goed-heid, goodness ; huis , house , houd , keep , er, er 
or doer, huis-houd-er , housekeeper. 

DERIVATION OF WORDS. 

Derivation of words, woordafleiding , is the tracing of 
them to their origin or derivation from another language , 
as respects simple or primitive words; or in analysing 
them into their respective primitive or simple words or 
root, as respects compoumls; words, therefore, as to de- 
rivation, may be divided into simple and compound. 

PRIMITIVE OR SIMPLE WORDS. 

In the earliest stages of a primitive language, only three 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 17 

sorts of words could have been suggested : 1. Exclamations 
or Interjections, expressing pain or admiration; as, ah! 
oh! etc. 2. The names of things presented to the senses; 
as, father, mother, food, etc. (Nouns). 3. Names of actions 
of the body, and emotions of the soul; as, give, love, 
(Verbs) ; but as mankind advanced in civilization and re- 
finement , things and conceptions increased , and conse- 
quently the suggestion of those connecting and qualifying 
words known by the names of articles, adjectives, pro- 
nouns, adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions, and, sub- 
sequently , the inflections of words. 

The creation of words or names for things and ideas , 
was the care and work of the earliest inhabitants of 
the earth, whose posterities spreading out and forming 
themselves into distinct nations, carried with them and 
retained the language of their mother country , and sub- 
sequently increased their vocabulary by adopting also 
the words of their neighbours , with such modifications 
of sound and spelling as suited their respective geniuses , 
and thu?;, in the course of ages, they formed another distinct 
language or dialect, differing more or less from that of 
the nation from which they originated. After this man- 
ner the words of the Dutch language had their origin ; 
namely : l : From the ancient Lower Teutonic , of which it 
is a dialect, as has already been shown in the intro- 
duction. 2. The Upper Teutonic, or High German. 3. It 
has, moreover, many words subsequently derived from the 
Latin and Greek , and from some modern European lan- 
guages , as the German , French , and English , but such 
are for the most part words used in the arts and scien- 
ces, and they are not numerous, as the genius of the 
Dutch language does not easily admit of the incorpora- 
tion of such like words, they being ever attended with 
a dissonance in their pronunciation ; it is therefore that 
the compounding of words for new names , states , and 
actions, has been, and is at this day, generally availed 
of by the Dutch. In this particular their language is 
pre-eminently charactaristic , and inferior to none , an- 
cient or modern, not excepting even the Greek. 

COMPOUND WORDS. 

The genius of the Dutch language readily admitting 



18 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

of the combining , almost at discretion , of two or more 
primitive words in the formation of compounds , the 
Dutch vocabulary has by this means been greatly aug- 
mented; these compounds are formed thus; from melk 
milk , and boer , a peasant , is formed melkboer , a milk- 
man ; from Gods , of God , and dienst service , is formed 
Godsdienst , religion. 

Another class of compounds is formed by a noun ta- 
king a monosyllabic word called a particle ; as , aan , 
be, ge, her, mis, on, ont, ver , wan, which are initial par- 
ticles, voorvoegsels ; and aar, dom, er or ier, held, rij t 
ing , is , ling , schap , sel , ster , and these diminutives , je , 
jen , pje , tje , ke , ken , kijn , sken , and lijn , which are 
terminational particles, achtervoegsels. 

The diminutives of nouns formed by adding the above 
particles je, jen, etc. in the choice of which, harmony 
must be the guide , are thus used. 

1 . Nouns ending in ch, d, f, g, k, p, s, t, and sch , 
take je; as, lack, a laugh, lachje , a smile; paard, ahorse, 
paardje, a little horse. 

2. Nouns whose final letter is preceded by a long vo. 
wel sound, and nouns ending in Im, rm, or em, take 
pje; as, arm, an arm, armpje, a little arm, etc. 

3. Tje is added to words ending in w, I, n, r; as, 
paauw , a peacock, paauwtje, a little peacock; zaal a 
hall, zaaltje, a little hall , etc. It is also employed with 
short monosyllables terminating in b , g , I, m, n, or r , 
the consonant being doubled and followed by the short 
e; as, brug a bridge, bruggetje, a little bridge; man, man, 
mannelje, a little man. 

4. Nouns sounded short, becoming long in the plural, 
take the same form when used as diminutives ; as , Had 
a leaf, blaadje , a little leaf; pad a path, paadje, a little 
path, etc. 

5. Some nouns having a long sound for the plural , 
and some of those nouns plural in ers , and eren , form 
the plural diminutive in the same manner ; as , ei , an 
egg, eijeren, eggs, eijertjes , little eggs; hoen , a fowl, 
hoenderen , fowls , hoendertjes , little fowls ; slag , a blow , 
slagen , blows , slaagjes , little blows , etc. 

6. Some nouns form the diminutive irregularly ; as , 
meid , a maidservant , meisje , a little maid , probably from 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 19 

this word having been formerly spelled meyssen or mcysen. 
Proper names form also their diminutives irregularly ; 
as , Willem , William , Wimpje , Bill or little William ; Ja- 
kob , James, Koolje or Koosje , Jim, Jimmy or little James. 

DIVISION OF WORDS OR THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 

Words or the parts of speech , de rededeelen, are divi- 
ded into nine classes : 

Lidwoorden , articles. 
Zelfstandige naamwoorden , nouns. 
Bijvoegelijke naamwoorden , adjectives. 
Voornaamwoorden , pronouns. 
Werkwoorden , verbs. 
Bijwoorden , adverbs. 
Voorzetsels , prepositions. 
Voegwoorden , conjunctions. 
Tusschenwerpsels , interjections. 

Of these, the article , noun , adjective , and pronoun, are 
varied as to gender, number, and case; the verb varies 
as to number , person , mood , and tense ; and the ad- 
verbs , prepositions , conjunctions , and interjections , are 
not varied. 

ARTICLES. 

An article is a word put before a noun to show the 
extent of its meaning and to identify its gender in de- 
clension. 

There are two sorts of articles , the definite and inde- 
finite. 

The definite article , het bepalend lidwoord , is de , the , 
masculine and feminine, and het, the, neuter. This arti- 
cle points out more definitely the thing meant ; as , 
de pen van den leerling , the pupil's pen; de zoon des 
vaders , the son of the father ; het boek van den leerling , 
the book of the pupil. 

The indefinite article, het onbepalend lidwoord, is een, mas- 
culine and neuter , eene , feminine , a or an , and is used 
before nouns in the singular number only and when 
taken in a more general or indefinite sense ; as , ik heb 
eene vrouw gezien , I have seen a woman ; een boek van 
eenen leerling , a book of a pupil. 



20 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

Articles are varied as to gender , number , and case, in 
which they must agree with the noun to which they belong. 

NOUNS. 

A noun is the name of a thing , of an action , of an 
emotion , or of an idea ; as , boom , tree ; huts , house ; 
werking , working; schrift , writing; liefde, love; boosheid, 
anger; nederigheid, humility; verheerlijking , exaltation. 

Nouns are divided into eigene namen , propernames t 
as names of persons or places ; as Amsterdam , Amsterdam, 
the metropolis of Holland ; Vondel , Vondel , a Dutch poet : 
and into gemeene naamwoorden , common names or the 
names of things in general ; as , water , water ; stad , city ; 
deugd , virtue. 

Nouns are varied by geslacht , gender ; getal , number ; 
and naamval , case ; which is called verbuiging der naam- 
woorden , declension of nouns. 

DECLENSION. 

Declension is that change in termination to which nouns 
and their subordinate words , as articles , adjectives , and 
pronouns, are subject, with respect to gender, number, 
and case. 

GENDER. 

Gender , geslacht , is the distinction of sex in nouns by 
their termination or otherwise. 

In the Dutch language there are three genders , mascu- 
line, mannelijk; feminine, vrouwelijk; and neuter, onzijdig. 

MASCULINE. 

1. Proper names of men are masculine; as, Johannes , 
John ; Jacobus , James ; Joris , George. 

2. Common nouns expressing the conditions of men; 
as, heer, gentleman; tuinman, gardener; koopman, dealer; 
knecht , man-servant ; except those nouns ending in wacht, 
watch; as, schildwacht, sentinel; nachtwacht , watchman, 
which are feminine. 

3. The names of precious stones ; as , agaat , agate ; 
diamant , diamond. 



DUTCH E T YMOLOG Y. SI 

4. Nouns ending- in dom, expressing rank or condition ; 
as, adeldom, nobility; ouderdom, antiquity; rijkdom, wealth. 

5. Nouns ending in em, sem, Im, and rm; as, adem, 
breath; balsem , balsam; halm, stem; darm, gut. 

6. Nounds ending in er, derived from verbs; as,snuiter, 
pair of snuffers , from snuiten , to snuff. 

7. The names of trees, boom, tree, which is masculine, 
being understood; as, eik, eikenboom, an oak, oaktree; 
except linde , linden-tree or lime-tree which is feminine; 
but lindeboom is masculine. 

FEMININE. 

1. Proper names of females are feminine, vromvelijk ; 
as, Johanna, Jane; Maria, Mary; Katrijn, Catherine; 
except all diminutives in je ; as , Jansje , Jane ; Mietje , 
Mary, etc. which are neuter. 

2. Common nouns which signify a feminine state or 
occupation; as, zuster, sister; naaister , seamstress: except 
wijf, a low vulgar female , also all diminutives in je ; 
as , .zustertje , a little sister , etc. which are neuter. 

3. Nouns ending in schap , derived from adjectives; as, 
blijdschap , joyfulness; gramschap , anger; as also those form- 
ed from other nouns, implying a unity of persons; as, 
priesterschap , the clergy ; broederschap , fraternity ; except , 
gezelschap , company , and genootschap , companionship ; 
which are neuter; except also when a dignity is signi- 
fyed; as, broederschap, brotherhood; stadhouder schap , the 
dignity of a stadtholder. 

4. Nouns ending in ing , derived from verbs ; as, beloo- 
ning , reward ; vermaning , reprimand ; berisping , chastising. 

5. Nouns ending in y; as, hovaardij, pride; dievery, theft; 
except those words beginning in ge; as, gerij, driving of 
horses ; getij , the tide , which are neuter. 

6. Nouns ending in is; as, belijdenis, belief ; begrafenis, 
funeral; erf ems, heirship, etc. except, vonnis, a sentence; 
vernis, varnish, which are neuter; getuigenis, witness, is 
generally feminine. 

7. All nouns ending in heid ; as , wijsheid , wisdom; 
goedheid , goodness. 

8. All dissyllables ending in te ; as, hoogte, height; 
moeite, trouble, etc. also many trisyllables derived from 



22 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

verbs; as, begeerte , desire, from , begeeren ; gedachte , re- 
membrance, idea, from denken, to think. 

9. The letters of the alphabet , and the figures ; as , 
eene a, an a ; eene 5 , a three , etc. 

10. Nouns ending in st; as , dienst, service; gunst, favor; 
winst , profit, etc. 

n. Derivatives in aadje ; as, stellaadje , a scaffolding, 
from stellen, to place ; boschaadje, a grove or copse, from 
bosch, a wood. 

NEUTER. 

1 . Proper names of countries , cities , and villages ; as , 
Holland , Amsterdam , Scheveningcn , a maritime village in 
Holland ; except those which are preceded by de or den ; 
as, de Haag , the Hague; de Briel, the Brill; de Oudenbosch, 
the Oudenbosch ; de Leidschendam , the Leidendam ; and 
de Bosch, Bois-le-duc, which are masculine; some others 
are feminine ; as , de Willemstad , the Willemstad , and het 
Gooi , Gooi is neuter. 

2. The infinitives of verbs , and adjectives , used as 
nouns ; as , het eten , eating ; het kwade , the evil. 

o. All diminutives of nouns in je , ke or sken ; as, het 
meisje, the girl ; het boekje or boeksken, the little book. 

4. Nouns ending in sel ; as , het voedsel, food ; deksel, a 
lid , etc. 

5. Many nouns beginning in ge , from nouns ; as , het 
gebergte, the mountain ; het geboomte, trees , and all nouns 
in ge, from verbs ; as , het geschrei, the crying, from schrei- 
jen , to cry. 

6. Dissyllables beginning in be, ge , her, ont , or ver; 
as , het bedrog, the deceit; het geloof, the belief; het herstel, 
the recovery ; het ontslag , the relief ; het verslag, the rela- 
tion ; except, ontvang, receipt; herdruk, reprint; verwant, 
relation, which are masculine, and ontvangst, receipt; be- 
komst , getting , which are feminine. 

7. The substances of the mineral kingdom; as, het 
goud , gold; het ijzer, iron; het koper, copper; also the 
names of many productions when the species only is 
signified; as, het taken, cloth; het papier, paper. 

8. All words ending in dom , signifying a body , or 
collection of persons ; as , het priesierdom , the priesthood ; 
het Christendom, Christendom, etc. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 25 

The gender of some nouns is arbitrary; as, 

\. Oorlog , war, is common to all the genders. 

The following are used both masculine and feminine : 

dood death nacht night stal stable tijd time. 

The following are used in the masculine and neuter 
gender : 

altaar an altar slag a blow oogenblik a moment. 

loon wages oproer an uproar 

The following are either feminine or neuter: 

sneeuw snow school school uur an hour lijm glue. 

2. The following nouns are common to the masculine 
and feminine, and are called gemeenslachtige : 

bediende a servant vreemde a stranger 

beschuldigde an accused vrome a pious person 

bode a messenger vuilbek a slut or sloven 

getuige a witness weetniet an ignorant 

boel a concubine poortier a door keeper 

schijnheilige hypocrite gcvangene a prisoner 

verneemal busybody gids a guide 

wijsgeer philosopher zieke an invalid. 

Also nouns of this nature ending in ing , and noot ; as , 

vreemdeling stranger echtgenoot husband or wife; 

though for their feminine e is often added ; as , vreemde- 
linge , a female stranger ; echtgenoot e , a wife. 

3. The following nouns are also common to both sexes, 
and are called geljjkslachtige or zelfslachtige , which take 
one gender for both sexes ; as , 

MASCULINE. 

arend an eagle olifant an elephant valk a falcon 

haas a hare reiger a heron vink a finch 

kernel a camel struis an ostrich vos a fox 

leeuwrik a lark uil an owl kwartel a quail 

ooijevaar a stork sperwer a sparrow hawk ekster a magpie. 



u 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 
FEMININE. 



duif pigeon 
haagdis lizard 
kat cat 
kraai crow 
raaf raven 
muis mouse 



musch sparrow 
rat rat 
slang snake 
snip snipe 
gans goose 



eend tftt-cfc 
kennis acquaintance 
tortel furtfe 
wacht guard 
zwaluw swallow. 



NEUTER. 



kind child 
konijn rabbit. 
hert stag 



paard Aorse 
schaap sheep 



wicht infant 
ho en fowl. 



The compounds of nouns preserve the gender of the 
last noun in the compound ; as , bierkan , a beer-can , is 
feminine ; because kan , can , is feminine ; whilst bier , 
beer , is neuter. 

The foregoing rules for distinguishing the genders of 
nouns , are applicable only to a part of the nouns of the 
Dutch language , thus the gender of many not being 
resolvable, inlo any precise rules or known grounds, and 
being thus apparently established by the result of chance 
or caprice , the student must arrive at the gender of 
such by consulting the dictionary ; however an attention 
to the harmony of the sounds of the consonants , which 
undoubtedly has had much influence in establishing the 
gender of many nouns , will also afford the pupil much 
additional aid in his acquisition of this essential part 
of the Dutch grammar. 

FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF NOUNS. 

Males and Females not being always distinguished by 
different words, as man, man; vrouw, woman; jongen, boy; 
meisje, girl; etc. , the feminine, in other cases , is formed 
from the masculine by a change of termination ; as , 

1. By adding in ; as , koning , king , koningin , queen ; 
god , a god, godin, a goddess; herder, shepherd, herderin, 
shepherdess ; etc. 

2. Nouns masculine ending in /\ change f into v in 
the feminine ; as , graaf, an earl , gravin , a countess ; 
wolf, a he-wolf, wolvin, a she-wolf; etc. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 9i 

3. Some nouns take es in the feminine ; as , zondaar , 
a male sinner, zondares , a female sinner; dienaar, a man 
servant , dienares , a female servant ; burger , a citizen , 
burgeres , a citess ; god , a god , godes , a goddess ; etc. 

4. Compounds ending in man, change man into vrouw 
in the feminine; as, koopman, a male dealer, koopvrouw, 
a female dealer; buurman, a male neighbor, buitrvrouw, 
female neighbor. 

5. Nouns masculine in er , derived from other nouns, 
form the feminine in ster ; as , from hof, a garden , hove- 
nier , a male gardener , hovenierster , a female gardener ; 
herberg , an inn , herbergier, a host, herbergierster, a hostess. 

6. Nouns ending in aar, derived from verbs, take ster in 
the feminine; as, from, bedelen , to beg, bedelaar , a beg- 
gar-man , bedelaarster , a beggar-woman ; etc. 

7. Nouns ending in er , derived from verbs, form the 
feminine in ster ; as from , brouwen , to brew , brouwer , 
a male brewer , brouwster , a female brewer. 

8. The feminines of natives of countries, take vrouw, 
preceded by the adjective form of the country ; as , 



Holland Holland , | 
Europa Europe , < 
Engeland England , < 



Hollander a Dutchman 

Hollandsche vrouw a Dutch woman 

Europeaan a European 

Europesche vrouw a European woman 

Engclschman an Englishman 

Engelsche vrouw an English woman. 



NUMBER OF NOUNS. 

Number of nouns , getal der naamwoorden , is the dis- 
tinction of one from more than one. 

There are two numbers ; the singular , enkelvoudig , and 
the plural , meervoudig : the singular denotes one ; the 
plural more than one. 

GENERAL RULES FOR FORMING THE PLURAL. 

1. Nouns singular in e, form the plural by adding n; 
as , hoogte , height , hoogten , heights ; bede , prayer , beden , 
prayers : except diminutives , which take s ; as , meisje , 
girl , meisjes , girls. 

2. Words ending in ei , take jen in the plural ; as , 
ret , choir , reijen , choirs ; lei , a slate , lejjen , slates. 



2G DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

The letters of the alphabet are expressed in the plural 
by adding an "s; as, twee a's two a's; drie Vs, three b's; 
as also nouns from the ancient languages in a, or o; as 
De Cato's en de Pharao's, the Catos and the Pharaos. 

3. Nouns ending in a single consonant preceded by a 
long vowel, take en in the plural; as, dier, an animal, 
dieren , animals ; boom , a tree , boomen , trees ; also words 
ending in two or more consonants; as, berg, a moun- 
tain, bergen, mountains; vorst, a prince, vorsten, prin- 
ces ; kracht , power , krachten , powers. 

4. Nouns ending with a consonant preceded by a short 
vowel, double the consonant and take en in the plural; 
as, man, man, mannen, men; gek, fool, gekken, fools; 
os, an ox, ossen, oxen; vos, a fox, vossen, foxes; bes, 
a berry , bessen , berries : except those ending in er , ster , 
el, em, en, sem, which take s; as, broeder, brother, broeders, 
brothers; venster , window, vensters, windows; par el , a 
pearl, parels, pearls; bodem, a bottom, bodems, bottoms; 
degen , a sword, degens, swords; balsem , a balsam, bal- 
sems , balsams ; to which exceptions may be added , bad , 
a bath; Mad, a leaf; dag, a day; dak, a roof; gat, 
a hole; gelag , expence at an inn; pad, a path; rad, a 
wheel ; slag , a blow ; vat , a vat ; bevel , an order ; gebed , 
a prayer ; gebrek , a defect ; sp el , a game ; trek , an in- 
clination; weg , a way; god, a god; gebod, an order; 
hoi , a hollow ; lot , a lot ; schot , a shot ; slot , a lock ; 
all which do not double the consonant; as, baden, baths; 
etc. to these may te added glas, a glass, glazen , glas- 
ses; graf, a grave, graven, graves; staf, a staff, staven, 
staves; hof, a court, hoven, courts. 

Many nouns ending in, er , aar , and el, take either s, 
or en in the plural, as vader, father, vaders or vaderen, 
fathers; broeder , brother, broeders or broederen, brothers; 
dienaar , a servant, dienaars or dienaren, servants. 

5. S preceded by a long vowel at the end of words, 
is generaly changed into z in the plural , as reis , a 
journey, reizen, journies; bies, a rush, biezen, rushes; 
doos, a box, doozen, boxes; huis, house, huizen, houses; 
pry's, a prize, prijzen, prizes: the following nouns take 
also zen in the plural , laars , a boot ; vaars , a heiffer , 
which make laarzen, vaarzen. 

6. Nouns ending in /"preceded by a long vowel sound, 



DITCH ETYMOLOGY. 



change /into u; as, korf, a basket, koiven, baskets; raaf, 
a raven, raven, ravens; grocf, a hollow, groeven, hollows; 
but when preceded by a short vowel it is doubled; as, 
slof, a slipper, sloffen, slippers; mof, a muff, moffen, 
muffs; etc. except, hof, a court; graf, a grave; staf, a 
staff, which make hoven, graven, sloven. 

7. The termination heid, makes heden in the plural; as, 
goedheid , goodness , goedheden , goodnesses; domheid, stupid- 
ity, domheden, stupidities. 

8. Man, a man, makes Heden, men; koopman, a trader, 
kooplieden, traders ; krijgsman , a warrior , krijgslieden , war- 
riors; etc. except the names of nations; as, Engelschman , 
an Englishman, Engelschen, Englishmen; Franschman , a 
Frenchman, Franschen, Frenchmen, etc. 

9. The i and a are changed into e in the following 
words : lid , a limb , leden , limbs ; smid , a smith , smeden , 
smiths ; schip , a ship , schepen , ships ; split , a rent , sple- 
ten , rents ; stad , a city , steden , cities ; etc. 

10. Some words, signifying different things, have the plu- 
rals differently; as, kleed, a carpet, and also clothes, klee- 
den, carpets, kleederen , clothes ; been, a leg, and also a bone, 
beenderen , bones, beenen , legs; blad, a leaf, (of a book), 
bladen , leaves , blad, a leaf (of a tree), bladeren, leaves. 

11. Nouns singular in oo sometimes retain the oo in 
the plural ; as , boom , a tree , boomen , trees ; others do 
not ; the following are those which retain the oo in the 
plural : 



boom a tree 
boot a boat 
booze wicked person 
brood a loaf 
dood death 
doove a deaf person 
doos a box 
drnom a dream 
geloof a belief 
genoot a companion 
boop a hope 
jool a dunce 
kleinood a trinket 
kloot a ball 
knoop a button 
kool a cabbage 



poot a foot 
poos a pause 
sloop pillow case 
sloot a ditch 
sloof a slipper 
stoom a steam 



loos o rope 

moor a moor 

moot a slice of fish 

nood a need 

noot a nut 

oog an eye 



stoop a liquid measure oom an uncle 



stoot o push 
koon a cheek 
kroon a crown 
lavoor icas/i iast'n 
lood a lead 
loog /i'e 
loon a reward 
loop a run 
loof foliage 



oor aw ear 
stroo a s/ratp 
stroom a stream 
stroop a f/ic// 
toog a draught 
toom a bridle 
toon a tone 
vloo a //ea 
zoom a seam. 



38 



BUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Other nouns in oo , drop one of the o's ; as , boog , a 
bow , bogen , bows ; boor , a bore , boren , bores ; etc. 

42. Nouns singular in ee sometimes retain the ee in 
the plural; as, aalgeer , an eelspear , aalgeeren , eelspears; 
the following are those which retain ee in the plural : 



aalgeer an eelspear 

abeel a poplar 

barbeel a barbel 

been a bone 

beek a brook 

beer a bear 

beet a beetroot 

bekkeneel the skull 

bleek a bleaching ground 

bordeel a bagnio 

deeg dough 

deel part 

eed an oath 

eer an honor 

filomeel a nightingale 

fleer a tricked female 

fluweel velvet 

gareel a trace 

geep a certain fish 

geer a gusset 

greel a horse collar 

heem a wharf or dyke 

beep a bill 

heer Sir or Mr. 

juweel a jewel 

kameel a camel 

kaneel cinnamon 

kanteel a battlement 

kapiteel a capital 

kasteel a castle 

keel a long narrow plank 

keer a turn 

keet a vat 

kleed dress 

korbeel corbel 

krakeel a dispute 

kreel edging 

kreet a cry 



kwarteel fourth part of a hogshead 

leek a layman 

leen a fief 

makreel mackerel 

meer a lake 

mees titmouse 

moskea a mosque 

nawee after-pains 

nawees a child born after its father 1 & 

neer a whirlpool (death 

neet a rivet 

oordeel judgment 

paneel a panel 

pateel a dish 

penseel a pencil 

prieel a bower 

ree a roe 

scbeel the parting of the hair 

scheen the shin 

slee a sloe 

snee a cut 

speek a spoke 

9pree a counterpane 

biee a city , a place 

steen a stone 

streem a wale 

tafereel a table 

teen a twig 

thee tea 

toneel a stage 

truweel a trowel 

veeg a scold 

veem a company 

veen a fen 

vrees a fear 

\ree a lamentation 

weegbree a plantain 

weer a wether 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 29 

wees an orphan seep soap 

mjjgeer a philosopher zweep a tohip 

zee the sea zweer an inflammation 

zeem honey-comb 

Other nouns in ee, drop one of the es; as, deen, a wild 
goose , denen , wild geese ; keen , a chap , kenen , chaps ; 
meel , meal , melen , meals , etc. 

CASE. 

Case , naamval , is the relation which one noun bears 
to another , or to a verb , or to a preposition. There are 
four cases in the Dutch language : de eerste naamval , the 
nominative case ; de tweede naamval , the genitive case ; 
de derde naamval , the dative case ; and , de vierde naam- 
val , the objective case. 

THE NOMINATIVE CASE. 

The nominative case , de eerste naamval, expresses the 
name of a thing , and is the subject of which something 
is said; as, de deugd is beminnelijk , virtue is lovely; het 
kind speelt , the child plays ; de loom is hoog , the tree is 
lofty. 

THE GENITIVE CASE 

The genitive or possessive case , de tweede naamval , is 
the connection which two or more nouns have with 
each other in a sentence , and carries with it an idea 
of possession; as, Gods geboden , God's commandments; 
Weilaisds woordenboek , Weiland's dictionary ; this case 
is also expressed with the preposition van ; as , de ge- 
ooden van God ; het woordenboek van Weiland 

This case is also used when a portion of the whole is 
expressed ; as , een stuk broods , a piece of bread ; een glas 
wijns, a glass of wine; veel ongemaks doorstaan, to endure 
much fatigue ; de dapperste des heers , the bravest of the 
army. 

The genitive is also used with some adjectives and 
verbs ; as , der belooning waardig zijn , to be worthy of 
reward ; gedenk des , think of it. 



30 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



THE DATIVE CASE. 

The dative case , de derde naamval, is used when giving, 
offering , destining , or taking is implied, when any thing 
is done to the advantage or disadvantage of an object, or 
when resemblance or dissemblance is signified ; as , geef 
den jongen zijnen hoed , give the boy his hat; den vaderlande 
zijn leven toewijden , to devote his life to his country ; de 
zeebaden zijn velen menschen voordeelig , sea bathing is bene- 
ficial to many people ; sterke dranken zijn den jongen lieden 
schadelijk , spirits are injurious to young people ; vette spijs 
is eener zwakke maag nadeelig , fat food is prejudicial to 
a delicate stomach ; zij is haver moeder seer gelijk , she 
is much like her mother . 

The prepositions aan, to , or voor, for, are often used to 
express this case; as when the substantives reject the 
article , or where the dative case is not clearly identified. 

OBJECTIVE CASE. 

The objective or accusative case, de vierde naamval, 
denotes the object upon which an active verb or a pre- 
position terminates ; as , hij heeft eenen hoed gekocht , he 
has bought a hat ; ontneem haar den stok , take the stick 
from her ; door elken vriend der menschheid, by every friend 
of mankind ; een ieder in zijnen stand , every one in his 
station. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLES. 





Singular. 




Plural. 






Masc. 


Fern. Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. Neut. 




1. 


de 


de het 


de 


de de 


the 


2. 


des, or 


der, or des, or 


der, or 


der, or der, or 


of the 




van den 


van de van het 


van de 


van de van de 


3. 


den, or 


de, der, den, or 


den, or 


de, der, den, or 


1 to the 




aan den 


or aan de aan het 


aande 


or aan de aan de 




4. 


den 


de het 


de 


de de 


the 




Masc. 


Fern. Neut. 






1. 


een 


eene een \ 


r 


a, or an 


2. 
3. 


eens, or eener, or eens, or 1 
van eenen van eene van een \ 
eenen, or eene, eener, eenen, or J 
aan eenen or aan eene aan een J 


has no plural < 


of a, or an 
to a, or an 


4. 


eenen 


eene een 




I 


a, or an 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



-i 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS WITH AN ARTICLE. 



4. 



Singular 

Masculine. 

de man the man 

of the man 



des mans , or 
van den man 
den man , or 
aan den man 
den man 



or the man's 
to the man 
the man 



1. het kind 

2. des kinds, or 
van het kind 

3. den kinde , or 
aan het kind 

4. het kind 



de vrouw 
der vrouw, or 
van de vrouw 
de, der vrouw, or 
aan ds vrouw 
de vrouw 

Neuter. 

the child 
of the child, 
or the child 1 s 



Feminine. 

the troman 
of the woman, 



or the woman 1 s 
to the woman 
the woman 



to the child 



the child 



Plubal. 



Masculine. 

1. de mannen the men 

2. der mannen, or 
van de mannen 

3. den mannen, or 
aande mannen 

4. de mannen 



Feminine. 



to the men 



de vrouwen 
of the men, der vrouwen, or 
or the men's van de vrouwen 

de , der vrouwen, 
or aan de vrouwen 
the men de vrouwen 

Neuter. 

1. de kinderen the children 

2. der kinderen , or [of the children , 
van de kinderen | or the children's 

3. den kinderen , or • . .. 

! to the chudren 
aan de kinderen 

4. de kinderen the children 

Singular. 



the women 
of the women, 
or the women's 



to the women 
the women 



Masculine. 
een tuin a garden 

of a garden 



eens turns, or 
van eenen tuin 
eenen tuin, or 
aan eenen tuin 
eenen tuin 



I to a garden 
a garden 



Feminine. 
eene bloem 
eener bloem, or 
van eene bloem 
eene , eener bloem , 
or aan eene bloem 
eene bloem 



a flower 
of a flower 

to a flower 
a flower 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

Neuter. 

1. een paard a horse 

2. eens paards , or | of a horse, 
van een paard J or a horse's 

3. eenen paarde , or | 

, \ to a horse 

aan een paard I 

4. een paard a horse 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE CASES OF NOUNS. 

\. Van is used for the genitive when the harmony of 
the sentence demands it. 

2. Proper names preceded by a noun and adjective, or 
noun and article, generally take van in the possesive ; as, 
de geboortestad van Laurens Koster, the native city of 
Laurens Coster ; het metalen standbeeld van Erasmus , the 
bronze statue of Erasmus ; de Tacitus van Hooft , Hooft's 
Tacitus: it is also proper to say; Kosters geboortestad ; 
Erasmus metalen standbeeld ; Hoofts Tacitus. 

3. Van is also generally used to designate family 
origin , party , age , size , weight , and value ; as , de ver- 
maarde de Ruiter was van geringe afkomst , the renouned 
de Ruiter was of humble birth ; Huig de Groot was 
Hollander van geboorte , Hugo de Groot was a Dutchman 
by birth; de thee is van China afkomstig , tea was first 
brought from China ; van der Palm bereikte den ouder- 
dom van zes en zeventig jar en , van der Palm attained 
the age of seventy six ; een stuk taken van vier en dertig 
ellen, a piece of cloth of thirty four ells; een kistje thee 
van twintig ponden , a chest of tea of twenty pounds ; een 
man van geringe bekwaamheid , a man of little capacity ; 
voor de waarde van vijftig guldens , for the value of fifty 
guilders." 

4. For the sake of harmony , e is sometimes added 
to nouns in the feminine gender, singular; as, der vrouwe, 
of , or to the woman ; der bloeme , of , or to the flower ; 
as also in the dative singular, masculine, without aan, 
as , den manne , to the man ; sometimes also to the dative 
neuter , when expressed without the prepositon aan ; as , 
den huize , to the house ; den paarde , to the horse. 

5. In familiar discourse, and also by poetical licence, 
the genitive is sometimes thus expressed : mijner zuster$ 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 55 

kinderen, my sister's children; instead of, de kinderen van 
mijne zaster ; zij is haar moeders troost , she is her mother's 
comfort; instead of, zy is de troost van hare moeder. 

6. The following nouns take en instead of s in the 
genitive: heer , gentleman; reus , giant; vorst , prince; 
prins, prince; graaf ', an earl; pans, a pope; hart , heart; 
boer , peasant; mensch, man; kwast, brush; els, aldertree; 
beer , bear ; nar , fool ; gek , fool ; leeuw , lion ; hert , stag ; 
also nouns masculine ending in e;as, getuige, witness; etc. 
being in the genitive, des heer en , reuzen, etc. of the 
gentleman , of the giant ; etc. 

7. The following neuter nouns take es in the genitive : 
huis , house ; kruis , cross ; vleesch , flesh ; paleis , palace ; 
geest , spirit ; as, des huizes, of the house; des kruiz.es, of 
the cross ; etc. 

8. In familiar discourse the genitive is commonly ex- 
pressed by van , and the dative by aan ; the use of the 
cases belonging rather to a more elevated style. 

9. The preposition van is also employed in sentences , 
where two or more genitives follow in succession , in 
order to avoid a cacophony ; as , de zoon des broeders van 
den bakker mijns vaders , the son of the brother of my 
father's baker. 

PRAXIS ON THE UNION OF AN ARTICLE AND 
ONE OR MORE NOUNS. 

Het rijtuig der koningin. The queen's carriage. 

De bladen van het boek. The leaves of the book. 

De bladeren der boomen. The leaves of the trees. 

De toegcnegenheid der moeder. The mother's affection. 

De koetsier van den geneesheer The coachman of the gentleman's 

des heeren. physician. 

De Staten Generaal der Nederlan- The States General of the Neth- 

den. erlands. 

V o n d e 1 , de Shakspeare van Hoi- V o n d e I , the Shakspeare of Hol- 
land . land. 

De vader bemint zijnen zoon. The father loves his son. 

Het span voor de sleden bestaat The team for sledges generally 

doorgaans in honden. consists of dogs. 

Des zomers (in den tijd des zomers) In the summer, the dogs scratch 

krabben de honden zich kuilen (for) themselves holes in the 

in den grond. earth. 



54 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Onder de regering van W i 1 1 e m 

den Eersten. 
De heer heeft eenen hoed gekocht. 
Zij is harer moeder zeer ongelijk. 
De leerling heeft de boeken gele- 

zen. 
Zegt den man , der vrouw , en 

den kinde , het nieuws. 
Des doods schuldig. 
Des levens zat. 

De beste der vrouwen is gestorven. 
De eigenaar en de eigenares van 

de landerijen. 
Des vaders arbeid , en der moeders 

zorg, 
Jongelingen onderwijzen. 
Geef den mcnscben brood. 
Geef eener vrouw een brood. 
Geef den kinde het brood. 
De heer des huizes. 
Bij den aanvang der vorige eeuw. 

De inrigting van mijne kamer. 
Het aanschaffen van eenige klee- 

dingstukken. 
Het onderhoud van het kind. 
Het handwerk dezer jnfvrouw. 
Eene golf der zee. 



During the reign of William 

the First. 
The gentleman has bought a hat. 
She is much unlike her mother. 
The pupil has read the books. 

Tell the news to the man , wo- 
man , and child. 

Deserving of death. 

Sated of life. 

The best of women is dead. 

The male and female proprietor 
of the estates. 

The father's labor , and mo- 
ther's care. 

To instruct young people. 

Give bread to the men. 

Give a loaf to a woman. 

Give the bread to the child. 

The master of the house. 

At the beginning of the last cen- 
tury. 

The arrangement of my room. 

The procuring of some articles 
of dress. 

The maintainanee of the child. 
The work of this young lady. 

A wave of the sea. 



ADJECTIVES. 

An adjective, bijvoegelijk naamwoord, is a word used to 
express the quality of a thing ; as , een goede jongen , a 
good boy ; water is vloeibaar , water is liquid ; de deugd is 
beminnelijk , virtue is amiable. The invention of these 
words must speedily have followed that of nouns , as the 
desire to express the quality of things would, soon be ielt. 

DERIVATION AND FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 



Adjectives , like nouns , are sometimes of Teutonic 
origin , sometimes formed from nouns by the addition of 
a terminational particle , and sometimes nouns become 
adjectives from their situation in a sentence ; as, zijde, silk, 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



3S 



een zijdenhoed , a silk-hat. The present and past participles 
of verbs are also often used as adjectives ; as , een levend 
ligchaam, a living body; een geacht man, an esteemed man. 
Adjectives are formed from other words by taking one 
of the terminational particles: achtig , oaar , haftig , hande , 
ig , lei , lijk , loos , sch , voitdig , zaam ; as , from 



water water 
leugen lie 

bevvonen to inhabit 
lezen to read 
vrucht fruit 
held hero 
krijg war 
vier four 
moed courage 
jeugd youth 
goed good 
veel much 
God God 

bedriegen to deceive 
wolk cloud 
dag day 
veel many 
honderd hundred 
leeren to learn 
waken to watch 

Adjectives are declined by 
in which they must agree w 
belong ; to adjectives belong 
trappen van vergelijking. 



waterachtig watery 
leugcnachtig lying 
bewoonbaar habitable 
leesbaar legible 
vruchtbaar fruitful 
heldhaftig heroic 
krijgshaftig martial 
vierderhande four sorts 
moedig courageous 
jeugdig youthful 
goedig good inclined 
velerlei many sorts 
goddelijk godly 
bedriegelijk deceiving 
wolkeloos cloudless 
daagsch daily 
veelvoudig many-fold 
honderdvoudig hundred-fold 
leerzaam docile 
waakzaam vigilant. 

gender , number , and case . 
ith the nouns to which they 
also , degrees of comparison, 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



4. 



Manneluk. 

Enkelvoudig . 

I de , or 
' een 

des , or I 
' eens 

den, or 
' eenen 

den , or 
I eenen 





Masculine. 




Singular. 


groot-e man 


the, or 
a 


great man 


groot-en mans 


the, or 
a 


great man's 


groot-en man 


to the , 
or to a 


great man 


groot-en man 


the , or 
a 


i great man 



36 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Meervoudig. 

1. de groot-e mannen 

2. der groot-e mannen 

3. den groot-en mannen 

4. de groot-e mannen 

Vrouwelijk. 

Enkelvoudig. 

de , or 

eene 

der , or 

eener 
I de , der 
I or eener 
I de , or 
l cene 



goed-e moeder 
goed-e moeder 
goed-e moeder 
goed-e moeder 



Meervoudig. 

de goed-e moeders 
der goed-e moeders 
de or der goed-e moeders 
de goed-e moeders 

Onzijdig. 

Enkelvoudig. 

hot sterk-e paard 

een sterk paard 

des, or 

eens 

den, or \ 

I sterk-en paarde 
eenen ] 

het sterk-e paard 

een steik paard 

Meervoudig. 

1. de sterk-e paarden 

2. der sterk-e paarden 

3. den sterk-en paarden 

4. de sterk-e paarden 



sterk-en paards 



Plural, 
the great men 
the great men's 
to the great men 
the great men 

Feminine. 

Singular. 

the, or 



the, or 

a 

to the s 

or to a 

the, or 

a 



good mother 
good mother's 
good mother 
good mother 



Plural. 

the good mothers 
the good mothers'' 
to the good mothers 
the good mothers 

Neuter. 

Singular, 
the 



strong horse 



strong horse's 
strong horse 
strong horse 



the, or 

a 

to the, 

or to a 

the 

a 

Plural. 

the strong horses 
the strong horses' 1 
to the strong horses 
the strong horses 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives preceded by the definite article de , het, 
take an e in the nominative; as, de goede vader, the good 
father ; de goede moeder , the good mother ; het goede kind 9 . 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 57 

the good child ; as also when preceded by deze or dit , 
this ; die or dat , that ; as , deze goede jongen , this good 
boy ; die goede vrouw , that good woman ; dit goede hitis , 
this good house. 

2. Adjectives, before nouns masculine and feminine, 
preceded by possessive pronouns , take an e , but not 
before neuter nouns; as, mjjn beste vriend , my best friend ; 
nvjne lieve vriendin , my dear friend ; ons ongelukkig kind , 
our unfortunate child : except the adjective waard, precious, 
which takes e for all three genders ; as , een waarde vriend , 
mijne waarde vriendin , mijn waarde kind. 

5. Adjectives before nouns masculine , signifying an 
officer, ruler, or servant, and terminating in er, oar , 
ier , or ling; as, arbeider , laborer; leeraar, teacher; hove- 
nier, gardener; hoveling, courtier; as also the nouns ko- 
ning , king; vorst , prince; admiraal, admiral; overste , 
chief; heer, gentleman; meester , master; knecht, servant; 
onderdaan, subject; vriend, friend; vijand, enemy; liuisva- 
der, head of a family; man, and mensch, man, sometimes 
take e in the nominative and sometimes not. 

AVhen the adjective qualifies the office of the person, 
it does not take the e in the nominative, but when it 
qualifies the person , it does ; as , een goed honing , is a 
king who reigns well , een goede honing , is a king who is 
good as a man ; een groot veldheer, a great general , een 
groote veldheer , a general who is great or tall in stature ; 
in the former case neither article nor adjective is decli 
ned ; as , van een groot krijgsman , of a great warrior. 

4. For the sake of harmony , some adjectives undergo 
a change before they take the e; as , l. Those ending in 
i take j; as, fraai , fraaije , pretty; mooi , mooije , pretty; 
lid , luije , idle ; 2. Adjectives in f and s change f into v 
and s into z ; as , lief, lieve , dear ; braaf , brave , brave ; 
doof, doove , deaf ; boos , booze , angry ; grof , grove , or 
groffe , coarse ; bros , broze , or brosse , brittle. 

5. The final single consonant of adjectives , preceded by 
a short vowel, is doubled in inflection; as, dik , dikke , 
thick ; dom , domme , stupid ; dun , dunne , thin ; laf, laffe , 
cowardly ; smal , smalle , small ; slap , slappe , soft ; wit > 
witle, white. 

6. Some adjectives in ee retain the ee in declension ; 
as , algemeen , algemeene , general ; they are : 



38 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



algemeen general geheel whole 
bleek pale 
breed broad 



geen none 
gedwee supple 



gemeen common 
gereed prepared 
heel all 
heet hot 
kleen small 



scheel cross 
scheef crooked 
teer tender 
veeg near dying 
wreed cruel. 



Others drop one of the vowels; as, geel, gele, yellow; 
veel , wte,'inttch or many; etc. 

7. Some adjectives in oo retain the oo in declension ; 
as , blood , bloode , bashful ; they are : 



blood bathful 
bloot naked 
boos , booze wicked 
doof, doove deaf 
droog dry 



goor rancid 
groot great 
hoog high 
loos , looze false 
loos less 



rood red 

schoon beautiful 

snood base 

voos , vooze spungy 

zoor dry 



Other adjectives in oo drop one of the o's in declen- 
sion ; as , vrocm , vronie , pious ; 

8. Some adjectives are indeclinable; as, l. Those ending 
in lei and hande ; as , allerlei , allerhande , allsorts , etc. 
2. Those formed from nouns by taking en signifying the 
material of which a thing is made ; as , stalen , steel ; 
houten , wooden ; horenen , horn ; etc. 3. Adjectives in er 
derived from proper names of cities, towns, or countries; 
as , Amsterdarnmer , Amsterdam ; Parijzer , Parisian ; etc. 
4. The cardinal numbers used as adjectives ; as , twee , 
drie, etc. ; except een, one, which is declined like the 
article een 

9. The cardinal numbers are made into adjectives by 
taking sometimes de , and at others ste , for their termi- 
nation , in conformity with the harmony of the consonants; 
as, vier , four, vierde , fourth; acht, eight, achtste, eighth; 
etc. but when two such numbers come together, only 
one of them takes the form of an adjective ; as , vier en 
twintigste , twenty fourth ; honderd en derde , hundred and 
third. 

10. The adjective al, all, is never declined before the 
definite article de or het , or a possessive pronoun ; as , 
al de menschen, all the men ; al uwe goedercn, all your 
goods. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 39 

11. The adjective agrees with the noun, to which it 
belongs, in gender , number, and case, and is placed be- 
tween it and the article ; as , een onderhoiidcnd boek , an 
entertaining book ; de ontbinding der oade rijkcn , the dis- 
solution of the old empires ; it agrees with the noun 
also, when the adjective does not take an article before 
it, the noun being taken in a general sense; as, vltjtige 
leerlingen wordcn geacht , diligent pupils are esteemed. 

12. If the adjective is separated from the noun by zijn, 
wezen, or worden , to be , it is not declined ; as, deze zeeman 
is onversaagd , this sailor is intrepid ; een man (die) eerzuch- 
tig en dapper (is) , maar geenszins bemind ; a man (who is) 
ambitious and brave , but by no means beloved. 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

Comparison expresses a higher or lower degree of the 
quality conveyed to nouns by adjectives. 

There are two degrees of comparison, trappen van ver- 
gelijking; the comparative, vergelijkende , and the superlati- 
ve, de overtreffende : the first expresses a quality superior 
or inferior in quality to the generality, whilst the latter 
signifies a state that cannot be exceeded; as, mfjne dochter 
is deugdzamer dan de nice, maar de zjjne is de dengdzaamste 
van alle drie , my daughter is more virtuous than yours , 
but his is the most virtuous of the three. 

The degrees of comparison can also be expressed by 
meer, more, minder, less, meest, most, and minste, least; 
this mode is used when the adjective has a figurative 
sense and does not seem to admit of a direct comparison ; 
as, doordrongen, penetrated; doorhneed, impressed ; as in the 
sentences: hij is van die waarheid meer doordrongen dan zij , 
he is more penetrated with this truth than she; gij zijt in 
de regtswetenschap meer doorkneed dan uw broeder , you 
have more knowledge of the science of law than your 
brother. 

Some adjectives are compared irregularly; as , goed, good , 
betcr, better, best, best; veel, much, meer, more, meest, 
most. 

Some adjectives expressing the highest or lowest de- 
gree of quality in themselves do not admit of compari- 
son ; as , 



40 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



allerlei all sorts 
achtvoudig eightfold 
beendroog dry as bona 
blocdwarm bloodwarm 
bloedlaauw bloodwarm 
doodstil dead silent 
doodbleek deadly pale 
driemaandsch three months 
driejarig three year old 
engelrein pure as an angel 
hemelhoog high as heaven 
honigzoet stoeet as honey 
ijzerhard hard as iron 
ijskoud ice cold 
kurkdroog dry as cork 



kokendheet boiling hot 
loodzwaar heavy as lead 

. I by word of mouth 
mondeling J 

onheilzwanger pregnant with cala- 

parelzuiver pure as pearl ntity 

pekzwart pitch black 

pijlsnel swift as an arrow 

pestzwanger pregnant with the pla- 

schriftelijk written gue 

sneeuwwit white as snow 

vierkant square 

vuurrood red as fire 

zeskant six-sided 

zeahoekig hexagonal 



The comparative degree is formed by adding er; as* 
groot, great, grooter, greater; zwart, black, zwarter, 
blacker. 

The superlative is formed by adding st ; as , hoog , high , 
hoogsl, highest; zwart , black, zwartst, blackest. 

Adjectives ending in r, preceded by a long vowel , form 
the comparative by taking tier; as, duur, dear, duurder , 
dearer; dierbaar, affectionate, dierlaarder , more affectio- 
nate ; zwaar , heavy , zicaarder , heavier ; guar , sharp , 
guurder, sharper; etc. 

Adjectives ending in i take jer in the comparative ; as , 
fraai, pretty, fraaljer , prettier; moot, pretty, mooijer , 
prettier; lui , idle, luijer, idler. 

Adjectives ending in f or s , preceded by a long vowel 
sound , change f or s into ver, in the comparative ; as, lief, 
dear , liever , dearer ; braaf, brave , braver , braver ; doof, 
deaf, doover, deafer; boos, angry, boozer, more angry; etc. 

Compound adjectives are compared by inflecting the lat- 
ter one of the compound; as, goedhoop, cheap , goedkoo- 
per , cheaper , goedkoopst , cheapest , etc. 

Adjectives ending in s form the superlative by taking t 
only ; as wijs , wise , wijst , wisest ; but when declined they 
take ste ; as , de wijst e man , the wisest man. 

The comparative and superlative degrees , are declined 
tike the positive. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



41 



DECLENSION OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLA- 
TIVE OF ADJECTIVES. 



MaNNELIJK. 

Enkelvoudig. 
de, or ! 



Masculine. 

Singular, 
the, or 



een 

des, or I 
eens j 

den, or i 
eenen j 
den, or i 
eenen 



zwarter-e hoed 
zwartcr-en hoeds 
zwarter-en hoed 



a 

of the, 
or of a 
to the, 
or to a 



blacker hat 
blacker hat 
blacker hat 



zwarler-en hoed blacker hat 



Vrouwelijk. 

Enkelvoudig. 



de , or 
eene 
der, or 
eener 
der, or 
eener 
de , or 
eene 



the, or 



schooner-e* vrouw 

a 

, ofthe, 

scnooner-e vrouw 

or of a 

to the, 



schooner-e vrouw 
schooner-e vrouw 



or to a 
the, or 
a 



Onzijdig. 

Enkelvoudig . 

het grooter-e schip 

grooter schip 

grooter-en setups 



j een 
I des, or 
I eens 
I den, or 
I eenen 

het 

een 



grooter-en schepe 

grooter-e schip 
grooter schip 



the 
a 

of the, 
or of a 
to the, 
or to a 
the 
a 



Feminine. 

Singular. 

more beautiful woman 
more beautiful woman 
more beautiful woman 
more beautiful woman 

Neuter. 

Singular. 

j greater ship 

greater ship 

greater ship 

greater ship 



- In like manner is declined the superlative. 

The plural of the comparative and superlative degrees 
presents no variation to that of the adjective in the posi- 



tive degree. 



* The « is generally suppressed for the sake of harmony. 



42 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 

Quantity is signified by converting the nouns of number 
or names of ciphers into adjectives, and they then denote 
the number or quantity of a thing. 

Number or quantity is expressed by the ciphers l to 9 
which are made to signify any number required, according 
to their arrangement , the ciphers themselves are nouns of 
the feminine gender, but considered as adjectives, they 
are classed into , l . Hoofdgetallen or grondgetallen , cardinal 
numbers; and, 2. Algemeene telwoorden, ordinal numbers. 

CARDINAL NUMBERS. 



The cardinal numbers signify a collective 
partial quantity ; as , 



absolute, or 



een 1 one 
twee 2 ttco 
drie 3 three 
vier 4 four 
vijf 5 five 
zes 6 six 
zeven 7 seven 
acht 8 eight 
negen 9 nine 
tien 10 ten 



elf eleven 
twaalf twelve 
dertien thirteen 
veertien fourteen 
vijf tien fifteen 
zestien sixteen 
zeventien seventeen 
achttipn eighteen 
negentien nineteen 
twintig twenty 



dertig thirty 
veertig forty 

vi J fti S fifty 
zestig sixty 
zeventig seventy 
tachtig eighty 
negentig ninety 
honderd hundred 
duizend thousand 
millioen million 



The units are placed before the decimals; and they are 
connected by the conjunction en , and ; hundred, thousand, 
etc. are placed first and are not connected by the conjunc- 
tion; as, 



een en twintig 
drie en dertig 
vijf en veertig 
acht en negentig 
honderd drie en vijftig 
duizend en zeven 
drie honderd en tien 



twenty one 

thirty three 

forty five 

ninety eight 

a hundred and fifty three 

a thousand and seven 

three hundred and ten 



achttien honderd twee en twintig eighteen hundred and twenty two 

The cardinal numbers are placed before the noun which 
they qualify; as, zes honderd vy'f en zestig inwoners, six 
hundred and sixty five inhabitants. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 45 

The cardinal number een is sometimes marked with an 
accent e'en to distinguish it from the article een; as, e'en 
man is verongelukl , one man has perished , een man is vcr- 
ongelukt , a man has perished ; the cardinal number e'en is 
declined like the article een and is sometimes followed by 
eenig , only , and sometimes preceded by maar , only or 
but, to give it additional energy; as, maar een kind, only 
one child ; het is voor eenen eenigcn leerling , it is only for 
one pupil; maar eene eenige vrouw, only one woman. 

If the definite article de, het, or the pronouns deze, 
mijn, uw , zijn, precede e'en, the latter is then declined like 
an adjective and ends in e short in the nominative wheth- 
er the noun is masculine or neuter; as, de eene, the 
one; gij spreekt van den eenen, you speak of the one; het 
eene boek, the one book; mijn eene hnis, my one house, 
or one of my houses; deze eene vriend, this one friend. 
This form of expression is better substituted by that of 
placing first the numeral then the pronoun and then 
the noun; as, een mijner huizen, one of my houses; eene 
uwer zusters , one of your sisters ; een hunner paarden , one 
of their horses. 

ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

The ordinal numbers are used to express the relative or- 
der in which a thing stands; they are formed from the 
cardinal numbers by adding ste or de. Een, acht, twintig, 
and the following decimals, take ste, as also honderd, 
duizend, millioen; the other cardinals take de: they are 
always preceded by the definite article; as, 

de eerste the first de negende the ninth 

de tweede the second de tiende the tenth 

de derde the third de elfde the eleventh 

de vierde the fourth de twintigste the twentieth 

de vijfde the fifth de honderdste the hundredth 

de zesde the sixth de duizendste the thousandth 

de zevende the seventh de honderd en eerste the hundred and first 

de achtste the eighth de twee honderdste the two hundredth 

PRAXIS ON THE UNION OF AN ARTICLE , A NOUN , 
AND AN ADJECTIVE, 

Een goede raad. A good council. 



u 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Een sterk paard. 

Een fraai huis. 

Ilet ligchaam is sterfelijk. 

De ziel is onsterfelijk. 

Kwade gesprekken bederven goede 

zeden. 
De man heeft staler) messen en 

zilvcren vorken. 
De omstreken der stad zijn laag 

en moerassig. 
Geef dtm laerling een vel fraai 

wit papier. 
Amsterdam is eene volkrijke stad. 
Parijs is volkrijker dan Amster- 
dam. 
Londen is de volkrijksle stad van 

Europa. 
Mijn jongste zoon is vlijtiger dan 

de andere leerlingen dezer 

school. 
Beschaving veredelt de gezellige 

verkecring. 
Eene goede opvoeding sluit alle 

onaangename en onedele in- 

drukken van de gezellige ver- 

keering uit. 
Welvoegelijkheid en fijngevoelig- 

heid weren alles , wat slechts 

min of meer ongevalligen in- 

druk zou kunnen maken , af. 
Amsterdam is de groolste en aan- 

zienlijkste stad van het Koning- 

rijk der Nederlanden. 
De Amstel is eene rivier of lie- 

ver zacht afloopende stroom in 

het noordelijk gedeelte der pro- 

vincie Holland. 
Er bestaat niet slechts eene lig- 

chamelijke , maar ook eene ver- 

standelijke blindheid; want men 

spreekt van blinde gehoorzaam- 

heid , blind geloof , blind ver- 

trouwen , etc. 



A strong horse. 

A fine house. 

The body is mortal. 

The soul is immortal. 

Evil communications corrupt good 
morals. 

The man has steel knives and sil- 
ver forks. 

The environs of the city are low 
and marshy. 

Give the pupil a sheet of fine 
white paper. 

Amsterdam is a populous city. 

Paris is more populous than Am- 
sterdam. 

London is the mo»t populous city 
of Europe. 

My youngest son is more diligent 
than the other pupils of this 
ichool. 

Civilization ennobles social inter- 
course. 

A good education excludes every 
disagreeable and ignoble impres- 
sion from social intercourse. 

Politeness and fine feeling exclude 
every thing which only could 
give rise to less or more objec- 
tionable impressions. 

Amsterdam is the greatest and 
most considerable city of the 
Kingdom of the Netherlands. 

The Amstel is a river or rather 
a gently flowing stream in the 
northern part of the province 
of Holland. 

There is not only a bodily but 
also a mental blindness; for we 
speak of a blind obedience, blind 
faith , blind confidence , etc. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



45 



Do bliksemafieider bestaat uit eerie 
ijzeren stang van een' duim dik- 
te , met eene spits? koperen 
punt, die ten minsle vijf of zes 
voeten lang is, van dezelve loopt 
eene koperen ketting , af. 

Het bijgeloof maakt den mensch 
angstig, bevreesd, wantrouwig, 
onverdaaagzaam , en wreed. 

Rede en overtuiging zijn de bil- 
lijkste wapenen, waarmede men 
met vrucht het bijgeloof kan 
bestrijden. 

De Ameriknansche wilden, de an- 
ders , zoo onverschillige, zoo 
koelbloedige , zoo stilzwijgen- 
de, zoo belanglooze Amerikaan- 
sche wilden, worden, zoodra zij 
spclen , gretig , ongeduldig, 
luidrucbtig, en als dolzinnig. 



The conductor of lightning con- 
sists of an iron rod an inch 
thick , with a pointed copper 
point , which is at least five 
feet long ; from it proceeds a 
brass chain. 

Superstition renders man , anx- 
ious , timid , mistrustful , in- 
tolerant, and cruel. 

Reason and conviction are the 
most constant arms with which 
one can effectually contend a- 
gainst superstition. 

The American savages, the other- 
wise so indifferent , so phleg 
matick , so taciturn, so disin- 
terested American savages , be- 
come , as soon as they gamble, 
greedy , i inpatient , boisterous , 
and as it were mad. 



PRONOUNS. 

A pronoun is used instead of a noun to avoid the too 
frequent ' repetition of it, or in asking questions; as, Willem 
is een goede jongen, hij gehoorzaamt zijne onders , William is 
a good boy , lie obeys his parents ; wie gaat daar ? who 
goes there? de man dien ik acht , the man whom I esteem: 
or it shows an object more distinctly than is done by the 
definite article ; as , deze man , this man ; die vrouw , that 
woman. 

Pronouns are divided into persoonlyke , personal; lezitte- 
lijke , possessive ; aanwijzende , demonstrative ; betrekkelijke , 
relative; and vragende , interrogative. 

Most of the pronouns are varied ; some are not varied. 

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



Nouns or the names of persons and things can be re- 
presented by personal pronouns. A personal pronoun can 
represent the person who speaks , the person spoken to ; 
or] the person or thing spoken of; thus there are three 
persons; as, First-person, eerste persoon, the person who 



46 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



speaks or acts , Second person , tweede persoon , the per- 
son , or animal , spoken to ; Third person , derde persoon , 
the person or thing spoken of or acted upon: they are 



1. ik / 

2. gij thou or you 

3. hij he , zij she , het it 



wij we 



zij they 



Sometimes in familiar discourse we , ge,ze, are used for 
wy , gij, zij. 

To these personal pronouns may be added the compounds 
ik zelf, I myself; gij zelf, you yourself; hij zelf, he himself; 
zij zelve, she herself; hetzelf, itself; zelf, being placed af- 
ter the pronoun, gives it additional energy; as, niet hij, 
maar ik zelf heb het gedaan, not he, but 1 myself have done 
it ; niet alleen ik , maar zij zelve was tegcnwoordig , not only 
I , but she herself was present; ik heb het zelf gezien, I have 
seen it (itself). 

Niemand , nobody , no one ; iemand, some body, some one; 
daar , there is or are ; er , there is or are ; men , people ; 
het, it, are indefinite personal pronouns, onbepaalde per- 
soonlijke voornaamwoorden , and are indeclinable. 

Zich, himself, etc. is used with verbs reflective, 
wederkeerige werkwoorden, it is always in the accusa- 
tive case, and is undeclined; as, hij vergist zich, he is de- 
ceived ; zich wasschen, to wash one's self; zij laden zich, 
they bathe themselves. 

Elkander and malkander , each other , are also personal 
pronouns and are indeclinable, these pronouns are used 
with verbs active ; as , zij beminnen elkander (or malkan- 
der) , they love each other ; when these pronouns signify 
possession , they take an s ; as , wij konden elkanders klee- 
deren dragen , we could wear each other's dresses. 

DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
Eerste Persoon, First Person, 

voor alle geslachten. • for all genders. 

Enkelvoudig. Meervoudig. Singular. Plural. 



1. 


ik 




wij 


/ 


tec 


2. 


I rnijner , 
j van mij 


or 


onzer , or 
van ons 


my 


our 


3. 


f mij , or 
{ aan mij 




ons , or 
aan ons 


to me 


to us 


4. 


mij 




ons 


me 


us 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



47 



TWEEDE PERSOON , 


Second Person , 


voor alle geslachten. 


for all genders. 


Enltelvoudig. 


Mecrvoudig, 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1. gij 


gij, or gij lieden, or gijl. * 


thou 


you or ye 


1 uws , or 
2. 

1 van u 


uwer , or 
van a 


thy 


your 


1 u , or 
3. 

1 aan u 


u , or 
aan u 


to thee 


to you 


4. u 


u 


thee 


you 



Derde Persoon , 
Mannelijk. 

Enkelvoudig . Meervoudig . 



hij zij 

zijner , or hunner , or 

van hem van hen 

hem , or hun , or 

aan hem aan hen 

hem hen 



Vrouwelijk. 

Enkelvoudig. Meervoudig. 



zij zij, or zij lieden, or zijl. f 

harer , or harer , or 

van haar van haar 

haar , or haar, or 

aan haar aan haar 

haar haar 



Third Person, 

Masculine. 

Singular. Plural. 



he 
his 



they 
their 



to him to them 
him them 

Feminine. 
Singular. Plural. 

she they 

her their 



to her 
her 



to them 
them 



* Gijlieden . you , abreviated gijl. is seldom employed , the sin- 
gular gij being substituted for ths plural gijlieden; Uto Edele, you , 
abreviated UE. is commonly used in writing as being more respectful. 

Zijn Edele , he j abreviated ZE. is often used for the third per- 
son singular in writing , as a mark of greater respect : Hun Edele , 
they ; abreviated HE. plural. 

•f Zijlieden , abreviated zijl. is seldom used , zij being used for 
both numbers. Haar Edele , abreviated HE. is often used for this 
pronoun as a mark of greater respect. 



48 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Onzr 


dig-. 




Neuter 


Enkehoudig. 


Meervoudig. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


!. het 


zi J 




it 


they 


1 ziins, or 
2. 

van het 


hunncr , 
van hen 


or 


its 


their 


| het , or 
aan het 


hun , or 
aan hen 




to it 


to them 


4. het 


hen 




it 


them 



Ze is often used in familiar discourse for the accusa- 
tive plural hen ; as , Ik heb ze (hen) gezien , I have seen 
them. 

Er van is often used as a personal pronoun for van 
hem , haar , or het ; as , Ik heb my lot die zaak verbonden , 
en nu kan ik er van (van haar) niet af, I have bound my- 
self to that affair and cannot get off it. 

DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITH 
ZELF, ZELVE. 



Mannelijk. Masculine. 

ik zelf I myself 

van mij zelven of me myself 

J mij zelven, or 

tome myself 
J aan mij zelven J J 

mij zelven me myself 

gij zelf you yourself 

van u zelven of you yourself 

u zelven, or 

to you yourself 
aan u zelven J 

u zelven you yourself 

hij zelf he himself 

van hem zelven of him himself 

hem zelven, or 

, , to him himself 

aan hem zelven 

hem zelven him himself 

Onzijdig. 

1. het zelf 

2. van het zelf 

3. aan het zelf 

4. hH zelf 



Vrouwelijk. 

ik zelvs 
van mij zelve 
my zelve , or 
aan mij zelve 
mij zelve 

gij zelve 
van u zelve 
u zelve, or 
aan u zelve 
u zelve 
zij zelve 
van haar zelve \ 
haar zelve, or 
aan haar zelve 
haar zelve 

Neuter. 

it itself 
of it itself 
to it itself 
it itself 



Feminine. 

/ myself 

of me myself 

to me myself 

me myself 

you yourself 
ofyo u your self 

to you yourself 

you yourself 

she herself 
of her herself 

to her herself 

her herself 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 49 

Hetzelf is little used ; as in speaking of a child , we 
do not say, ik heb hetzelf gezien, I have seen it (itself); 
it is better to say , ik heb hot hind zelf gezien , I have 
seen the child itself. 

The plural of zelf in all the cases and genders is zel- 
ven ; as , wij zelven , we ourselves ; gij zelven , you your- 
selves ; zij zelven, they themselves ; van hen zelven, of them- 
selves ; etc. 

Zich zelven , himself or themselves , etc. is often used 
for the sake of energy ; as , hij spreekt van zich zelven , he 
speaks of himself; zij beminnen zich zelven , they love 
themselves ; hij heeft geen rijkdommen van zich zelven , he 
has no riches of his own. 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Possessive pronouns imply possession or a property, and 
represent not only the gender of the person or the thing 
that is the possession , but also sometimes the gender of 
the person or thing that possesses. In the third person 
the pronoun indicates the gender of the possessor, and 
the inBection indicates that of the poss' ssed ; but in the 
first and second persons only the gender of the posses- 
sed is identified. 

The possessive pronouns are mijn , my ; uw , your ; -zijn , 
his; haar , her, for the singular; ons , our; uw, your; hun, 
their; haar , their , for the plural. 

The possessive pronouns are declined like adjectives, 
and must agree with the thing possessed in gender , num- 
ber , and case. 

List of the possessive pronouns joined to nouns in the 
nominative case : 

Eerste Persoon , First Person , 

Voor alle geslachten, For all genders. 

M. mij:\ vader my father mijne vaders my fathers 

V. mijne roceder my mother ' mijne moeders my mothers 
0. mijn boek my book mijne boeken my books 

M. onze broeder our brother omc broeders our brothers 

V. onze zuster our sister onze zusters our sisters 

0. ons paard our horse onze paarden our horses. 

4 



50 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



TWEEDE PEKSOON, 

Voor alle geslachten, 

M. uw man your husband 
V. uwe vrouw your roife 
O. uw kind your child 

Derde Persoon, 
Man. en Onz. Enkelvoudig 

M. zijn knecht his man servant 
V. zijne dienstmeid his maid 
servant. 
0. zijn huis his house 



Man. en Onz. Meervoudig , 



M. hun knecht their servant 
V. hunne moeder their mother 
0. hun kind their child 



Second Person. 
For all genders. 

uwe mannen your husbands 
uwe vrouwen your wives 
uwe kinderen your children. 

Third Person. 
Mas. and Neut. Singular. 

zijne knechten his man servants 
zijne dienstmeiden his maid ser- 
vants. 
zijne huizen his houses 

Mas. and Neut. Plural. 

hunne knechten their servants 
hunne moeders their mothers 
hunne kinderen their children 



Vrouwelijk, Enkelvoudig, Feminine, Singular. 



M. haar neef her nephew 

V. hare nicht her niece 

0. haar kleed her dress 

Vrouwelijk , Meervoudig , 

BI. haar knecht their servant 

V. hare moeder their mother 

0. haar kind their child 



hare neven her nephews 
hare nichten her nieces 
hare kleederen her dresses 

Feminine , Plural. 

hare knechten their servants 
hare moeders their mothers 
hare kinderen their children 



DECLENSION OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS WITH 

A NOUN. 



Mannelijk. 



Enkelvoudig. 
Vrouwelijk. 



mijn vader mijne moeder 

mijn.s vaders, or mijner moeder, or 

van mijnen vader van mijne moeder 

mijnen vader , or mijner moeder, or 

aan mijnen vader aan mijne moeder 
mijnen vader mijne moeder 



Onzijdig. 

mijn boek 
mijns boeks, or 
van mijn boek 
mijnen boek , or 
aan mijn boek 
mijn boek. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 51 

Meervoudig. 
Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. 

1 . mijne vaders mijne moeders mijne boeken 

j mijner vaders, or mijner moeders, or mijner boekeu , or 

I van mijne vaders van myne moeders van mijne boeken. 

_ I mijnen vaders, or mijner moeders, or mijnen boeken , or 

I aan mijne vaders aan mijne moeders aan mijne boeken 

4. mijne vaders mijne moeders mijne boeken. 

In like manner are declined, ons> uw, zijn, haar, hun, hare. 

Uw Edele , UEd. ; Zijn Edele, ZEd. ; Haar Edele , HEd. ; 
Hun Edele , HEd. ; are used in polite writing for the pos- 
sessive pronouns ; as, UEds. huis for uw huis, your house ; 
ZEds. koets for zxjne koets, his coach; HEd. zuster for hare 
zuster , her sister; HEd. paarden for hunne paarden , their 
horses. 

The possessive pronouns are sometimes used without 
the noun or thing possessed, and then they take the de- 
finite article de for the masculine or feminine, and 
het for the neuter before them , and will have e short 
final in the nominative singular , and take en in the plural 
like nouns ; as, uw huis is fraai, maar de mijnen (mijne huizen) 
zijn fraaijer dan het uwe (uw huis) , your house is fine but 
mine are finer than yours; they are de or het mijne, mine; 
de or het uwe , yours; de or het zijne , his; de or het hare , 
hers ; de or het onze , ours ; de or het hare, theirs ; de or 
het hunne , theirs ; they are declined in the following 
manner , and the article as when before nouns. 

DECLENSION OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS WITH- 
OUT THE NOUN. 

The thing possessed in the singular. 
Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. Forallgend. 

1. de mijne de mijne het mijne mine 

I des mijnen, or der mijne , or des mijnen, or 

2. , , , of mine 
j van den mijnen van de mijne van het mijne 

„ I den mijnen , or der mijne , or den mijne, or 

' J J U x - t0 minB 

I aan den mijnen aan de mijne aan het mijne 

4. den mijnen de mijne het mijne mine 

The thing possessed in the plural. 






52 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. Forallgend. 

de mijnen de mijnen de mijnen 

der mijnen, or der mijnen, or der mijnen, or 

van de mijnen van de mijnen van de mijnen 

den mijnen, or der mijnen, or den mijnen, or 

aan de mijnen aan de mijnen aan de mijnen 

4- de mijnen de mijnen de mijnen 



mine 
of mine 



The other possessives are declined after the same manner. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative pronouns serve to point out the object 
with greater precision than is done by the definite ar- 
ticle de , het , the ; they are 



deze 
dit 
die 
dat 

gene 

degene 

diegene 

hetgeen 

hetgene 



this 



that 



that which 



dezelve 

dezelfde 

zekere 

desgelijke 

dergelijke 

dusdanige 

zoodanige 

zulk 



he , she , it 
the same 
certain 

such like 



tuch 



The demonstrative pronouns deze , dit , this , refer to 
the thing nearest; die, dat, that, refer to the object at 
a greater distance, and gene, that, that yonder, refers to 
an object at the greatest distance ; they are always follow- 
ed by a noun expressed or understood , with, which they 
must agree in gender, number, and case ; as, Ik bemin deze 
Moemen , mijne zuster die , en haar zwager gene, I love these 
flowers , my sister those , and her brother in law those ; 
they are thus declined : 

DECLENSION OF DEZE, DIT, THIS. 



Mannelijk , Masculine. 

Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meerwudig 



Plural, 
these boys 



dezejongen this boy 

dezesjongens, or ^ ^, 

van dezenjongen 

dezenjongen,or t0 this boy dezen jongens, or fQ the$e boy$ 

aan d ezenjongen aan deze jongens 

dezeii jongen this boy deze jongens these boys 



deze jongens 

dezer jongens, or . - . r 

' a these boys r 

van deze jongens 

dezen jongens, 01 

aan dezejongen! 

deze jongens 



I) UTCH E T Y M L G Y. 



Enkelvoitdig , 

deze bloom 
j dezer bloem, or 
1 van deze bloem 
I dezer bloem, or 
1 aan deze bloem 

deze bloem 



Yrouwelijk, Feminine. 

Singular. Mcervoadig , 
this flower 

this flower' s 



to this flower 
this flower 



Onzijdig , 

dit huis this house 

dezes huizes, or 

van dit huis 

dezen huis, or 

aan dit huis 

dit huis this house 



this houses' 1 s 
to this house 



deze bloemen 
dezer bloemen, or 
van deze bloemen 
dezer bloemen, or 
aan deze bloemen 
deze bloemen 

Neuter. 

deze huizen 
dezer huizen, or 
van deze huizen 
dezen huizen, or 
aan deze huizen 
deze huizen 



Plural. 

these flowers 
these flowers' 

to these flowers 
these flowers 

these houses 
these houses' 

to these houses 
these houses 



DECLENSION OF DIE , DAT , THAT. 









Mannelijk , 


Masculine. 






Enkelvoudig. 




Singular. 


Meervoudig. 


Plural. 


i. 


die knaap 




that lad 


die knapen 


those lads 


2. 


I diens knaaps, ot 
1 van dien knaap 


that lad's 


dier knapen, or 
van die knapen 


those lads' 


3. 


j dien knaap, or 
1 aan dien knaap 


to that lad 


dien knapen, or 
aan die knapen 


to those lads 


4. 


dien knaap 




that lad 

Yrouwelijk , 


die knapen 

Feminine. 


those lads 


1. 


die leeuwin 




that lioness 


die leeuwinnen 


those lionesses 


2. 


1 dier leeuwin, or 
j van die leeuwin 


that lioness's 


dier leeuwinnen, or 
van die leeuwinnen 


those lionesses ' 


3. 


| dier leeuwin, or 
J aan die leeuwin 


iothat lioness 


dier leeuwinnen, or 
aan die leeuwinnen 


to those lio- 
nesses 


4. 


die leeuwin 




that lioness 

Onzijdig;, 


die leeuwinnen 

Neuter. 


those lionesses 


1. 


dat meisje 




that girl 


die meisje* 


those girls 


2. 


j diens meisjet 
1 van dat mei 


, 01 

sje 


that girl's 


dier meisjes, or 
van die meisjes 


those girls' 


3. 


I dien meisje, or 
1 , aan dat meisje 


to that girl 


dien meisjes, or 
aan die meisjes 


to those git Is 


4. 


dat meisje 




that girl 


die meisjes 


those girls 



54 



DUTCH ETYMO LOGY. 



DECLENSION OE THE PRONOUN GENE, THAT, THE 
OTHER OR THAT YONDER. 

Mannelijk, Masculine. 

Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig , Plural. 



gene graaf 
genes graafs, or 
van genen graaf 
genen graaf, or 
aan genen graaf 
genen graaf 



that count 
that count's 

to that count 
that count 



gene graven 
gener graven, or 
van gene graven 
genen graven, or 
aan gene graven 
gene graven 



those counts 
those counts' 

to those counts 
those counts 



Vrouwelijk, Feminine. 

Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig , Plural. 

I . gene gravin that countess gene gravinnen 



gener gravin, or , 

that countess's 
van gene gravin 



those coun- 
tesses 
gener gravinnen, or those coun- 
van gene gravinnen tesses' 



gener gravin, or .'.,', . gener gravinnen, or to those 

00 to that countess ° & 



I aan gene gravin 
gene gravin that countess 



aan gene gravinnen countesses 
gene gravinnen those coun- 

tesses 



Enkelvoudig 

gene paleis 
I genes paleizes, or 
J van gene paleis 
f genen paleis, or 



Onzijdig, 
Singular. 

that palace 
that palace' * 

to that palace 



Neuter. 

Meervoudig , 



Plural. 



gene paleizen those palaces 

gener paleizen, or , , 

r , those palaces 

van gene paleizen 



genen paleizen, or 



aan gene paleis 

gene palsis that palace 



to the palaces 



aan gene paleizen 

gene paleizen those palaces 



The demonstrative pronoun degene , that which , is less 
vague in pointing out the thing referred to than diegene , 
that which , the former is followed by the relative pro- 
noun die or welke , who or which , and the latter by 
welke only; these pronouns when met with in the nomi- 
native case can be replaced by hi) , he , or zij , she ; as , 
degene (hij or zij) die mij vriendschap oewijst , he who shows 
me friendship; diegenen welke zich daaraan heooen ver- 
grepen , those who have renderd themselves culpable. 

The compound demonstrative pronouns are declined in 
both parts of their composition de , die and gene. 



DUTCH E T YMOLOG Y. 



55 



DECLENSION OF THE PRONOUN DEGENE, HE, OR 
SHE , OR THE PERSON. 





Mannelijk , 


Masculine. 




Enkelvoudig , 


Singular. 


Meervoudig , 


Plural 


1. degene 


he 


degenen 


they 


1 desgenen, or 
1 van dengenen 


his 


dergenen , or 
van degenen 


theirs 


„ [ dengenen, or 
\ aan dengenen 


to him 


dengenen, or 
aan degenen 


to them 


4. dengenen 


him 


degenen 


them 


Vrouwelijk, 


Feminine. 




Enkelvoudig , 


Singular. 


Meervoudig, 


Plural. 


1. degene 


she 


degenen 


they 


2. 


dergene, or 
van degene 


hers 


dergenen, or 
van degenen 


theirs 


Q [ dergene, or 
j aan degene 


to her 


dergenen, or 
aan degenen 


to them 


4. 


degene 


her 


degenen 


them 



The demonstrative hetgene , hctgeen , what or that which; 
is thns declined , 



Onzijdig , 

Enkelvoudig , Singular. 
1 . hetgene, hetgeen it 

I desgenen , or 

I van hetgene 
r, [ dengenen , or 

I aan hetgene 
4. hetgene it 



Neuter. 

Meervoudig , 
degenen 



Plural. 

they 



to it 



dergenen, or 
van degenen 
dengenen, or 
aan degenen 
degenen them 



theirs 



to them 



Diegene is declined like degene , with this difference that 
die follows the declension of that pronoun when before 
a noun , as at page 55. 

The demonstrative pronouns dezelve , he , she ; hetzelve , 
it , are substantive pronouns ; and dezelfde , helzelfde , the 
same , are adjective pronouns, and are always followed by 
a noun expressed or understood ; as , deze twee gcschriften 
zijn door dezelfde hand geschreven , these two writings are 
written by the same hand ; de som is groot hoe zal ik 
dezelve betalen , the sum is great how shall I pay it ? 



56 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Dezelve , he , she ; hetzelve , it , are thus declined : 
Mannelijk , Masculine. 



l. 



3. 



Enkelvoudig , 


Singular. Meervoudig , 


Plural. 


dezelve 


he 


dezelve 


they 


deszelfs , deszelven, or 

his 
van denzelven 


derzelver, or 
van dezelve 


theirs 


denzelven, or 
aan denzelven 


to him 


denzelven, or 
aan dezelve 


to them 


denzelven 


him 


dezelve 


them 


Vrouwelijk , F 


eminine. 




Enkelvoudig , 


Singular. 


Meervoudig , PluraU 


1. dezelve 


she 


dezelve they 


1 derzelver, or 
1 van dezelve 


her 


derzelver, or 

i , theirs 
van dezelve 


j derzelver, or 
1 aan dezelve 


to her 


derzelver, or j7 

to them 
aan dezelve 


4. dezelve 


her 


dezelve them 




Onzijdig , Neuter. 




Enkelvoudig , 


Singular. 


Meervoudig , 


Plural. 


hetzelve 


it 


dezelve 


they 


deszelfs, deszelven 
van hetzelve 


, or 

its 


derzelver, or 
van dezelve 


theirs 


denzelven, or 
aan hetzelve 


to it 


denzelven, or 
aan dezelve 


to them 


hetzelve 


it 


dezelve 


them 



The pronoun dezelfde , the same ; follows the same 
declension as dezelve , except the masculine and neuter 
singular in which they are thus declined: 



Mannelijk , 

dezelfde 
f deszelfden, or 
j van denzelfden 
denzelfden, or 
aan denzelfden 
denzelfden 



Masculine. 

the same 
of the same 

to the same 
the same 



Onzijdig , 

hetzelfde 
deszelfden, or 
van hetzelfde 
denzelfden, or 
aan denzelfden 
hetzelfde 



Neuter. 
the same 
of the same 

to the same 
the same 



The demonstrative pronouns zeker, certain; zulk, such; 
desgelijke , dergelijke , such like ; dusdanige , and zoodanige , 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



51 



such, are all declined after the same manner; as for 
example , zulk , with a noun understood. 



Enkelvoudig , 
Mann. Vrouw. Onz. 

zulke zulke zulk 



Meervoudig. 
Mann. Vrouw. Onz. 

zulke 



van zulken van zulke van zulk van zulke 



zulke zulke 

zulker, or zulker, or 

van zulke van zulke 

zulken, or zulke, or zulken zulken, or zulker, zulken, 

aan zulken aan zulke zulk, or aan zulke zulke, or zulke, or 

aan zulk aan zulke aan zulke 

zulken zulke zulk zulke zulke zulke 



When these pronouns are followed by een they remain 
undeclined; as, zulk een, zulk eene; ik heb zulk eenen man 
gezien , I have seen such a man. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



Relative pronouns , betrckkelijke voornaamwoorden , refer 
to persons or things already expressed or understood , 
with which they agree in gender and number ; as , de 
edelmoedige man, wien wij reel verpligt'mg hebben, the gene- 
rous man to whom we are much obliged. Sometimes a 
relative is employed substantively, in which case two 
relatives are present in the same sentence ; as , wien ik 
lets beloof, dien zal ik woord houden , to whom I promise 
any thing , with him I shall keep my word. 

The relative pronouns are 



die , dat 

wie , wat 

welke 

dewelke , helwelk 



>/jo , xchich , that 



Die and wie , who or which , in the nominative and 
accusative , are used only for the masculine and femi- 
nine , they have the same meaning , but die is used more 
for the nominative and wie for the genitive and dative, 
and die or wie indiscriminately for the objective ; as , de 
koning die ons beschermt , the king who protects us ; de 
honing wiens liefde wij kennen , the king whose love we 
know ; de koning wien ik dat gezegd heb , the king to whom 

4 * 



58 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

I have told it ; de honing dien or wien ik hoogacht , the 
king whom I esteem. 

Welke is used in more elevated style , while die and wie 
are used more in familiar intercourse. 

DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Enkelwudig , Singular. 

Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijd. For all gend. 

1. die wie welke die wie welke welk who, or which 

2. diens wiens welks dier wier welker welks whose 

3. dien wien welken die wie welke welken to whom, or which 

4. dien wien welken die wie welke welk whom, or which 

Meervoudig , Plural. 

Mannelijk en Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. For all gend. 

1 . die wie welke die welke who , or which 

2. dier wier welker dier welker whose 

3. die wie welke die welke to whom, or which 

4. die wie welke die welke whom , or which 

Dal , and wat , that or which , are used in the neuter 
singular only and are indeclinable ; as , het huts dot gij 
gekocht hebt , the house that you have bought ; alles wat 
van hem geschreven wordt is waar , all that is written of 
him is true : die and welke are used for the neuter plu- 
ral ; as, de paarden die (or welke) ik gekocht heb, the horses 
which I have bought ; and also for the genitive and da- 
tive singular ; as , het paard welks veulen dood is , the horse 
whose foal is dead. 

The genitive , dative , and accusative , in both numbers 
of the relatives , are sometimes expressed thus : 

waarvan for van die , wat , or welke. 

waaraan for aan die , wat , or welke. 

waarin for in die , wat , or welke. 

waaruit for uit die , wat , or welke. 

waardoor for door die, wat, or welke. 

This form is only used when animals or inanimate things 
are referred to , and never for persons ; as, de boomen 
waarvan gij spreekt, the trees of which you speak; de bloem 
waaraan het behoort , the flower to which it belongs. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



3.9 



The compound relative dewelke who or which ; is sel- 
dom used and when used is generally in more elevated 
style , and can be replaced by welke. 

Dewelke , hetwelk , is declined in both parts of its com- 
position ; thus , 







Enkelwudig , 




Singular. 




Mannelijk. 


Vrouwelijk. 


Onzijdig. 


Forallgend. 


1. 


dewelke 


dewelke 


hetwelk 


who , or 

which 


2. 


| deswelken , or 


derwelke , or 


deswelken , or 


whose 


1 van denwelken 


van dewelke 


van hetwelk 


3. 


J denwelken , or 


derwelker, or 


denwelken, or 


to whom, or 




1 aan denwelken 


aan dewelke 


aan hetwelk 


which 


4. 


denwelken 


dewelke 
Meervoudig. 


hetwelk 


whom , or 

which 

Plural. 




Mannelijk. 


Vrouwelijk. 


Onzijdig. 


Forallgend. 


1. 


dewelke 


dewelke 


dewelke 


who , or 

which 


2. 


| derwelker , or 
J van dewelke 


derwelker, or 
van dewelke 


derwelker , or 
van dewelke 


whose 


3. 


j denwelken, or 


dewelke , or 


dewelke , or 


to whom, ox 


1 aan dewelke 


aan dewelke 


aan dewelke 


which 


4. 


dewelke 


dewelke 


dewelke 


whom, or 

which 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Interrogative pronouns are placed before the person or 
thing referred to, and are used in asking questions; the 
answer to the question being in the same case as the in- 
terrogative ; as , wiens huts is dit ? het is van mij , or het 
mijne, whose house is this? it is mine. 

The interrogative pronouns are, 



wie 

welke 



who 
which 



wat 
hoedani/r 



what 
what sort 



The interrogative wie is used for persons only. When 
the gender of the person is not known the relative is then 



60 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

declined in the masculine, but when the gender is ex- 
pressed then it must agree with it; as, Wie is daar? Jan. 
Who is there ? John ; van wien spreekt gij ? of whom do 
you speak ? wien hebt gij het gegeven ? aan niemand ; to 
whom have you given it ? to no one ; wie heb ik de eer 
te spreken? (aan) de Jufvrouio B; to whom have I the 
honor to speak? to M rs . B. 

Die interrogative is declined like die relative and never 
takes the noun after it. 

Welke is employed as well for persons as for things , 
and is followed by a noun expressed or understood ; as r 
van welke Moemen spreekt gij? van deze , of which flowers 
do you speak ? of these ; welke uwer zonen heeft den brief 
weggebragt, de oudste of de jongste? which of your sons 
has taken the letter, the youngest or the eldest? this 
interrogative is declined like welke relative. 

The interrogative teat considered as the neuter of wie 
is used for things in general , the nature , gender , or 
number not being known ; it is indeclinable ; it is used 
sometimes alone , and when followed by a substantive it 
generally takes voor immediatly after it; as , wot zoekt gij? 
what are you looking for ? wat voor eene vrouw is die ? 
what woman is that? wat voor eenen landsman zijt gij ? 
what countryman are you ? 

Waarvan , waardoor , etc. are often used for van wat , 
door wat, when things are referred to; as, waarvan wordt 
dat gemaakt? of what is that made? 

Hoedanig is used to enquire after the nature or quality 
of persons or things ; and is always followed by a sub- 
stantive or a verb; as, hoedanige man is het? het is een 
minzaam man , what sort of a man is it? it is an afTable 
man; hoedanig gebouw is het? het is een ruim gebouw , what 
sort of a building is it ? it is a capacious building ; this 
interrogative is declined like an adjective. 

Welk and hoedanig sometimes take een after them , in 
which cases the pronouns remain undeclined and een fol- 
lows the declension of the article een and gives to the 
noun which follows an additional precision; as, hoedanig 
eenen man hebt gij ooit gezien ? have you ever seen such a 
man? welk een is het van die boomen? which one is it of 
those trees? 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



in 



PRAXIS ON THE USE OF THE PRONOUNS. 



Ik geef hen het boek. 

Van welke boeken spreekt gij ? 

van die en van dit. 
Breng mij die pen en dat pen- 

nemes. 
Ik schrijf mijnen vriendsn. 
Wiens huis is dit? het is van mij. 
Men moot d" wetten gehoorzamen. 
Waarvan spreekt gij ? van nuttigc 

wetensehappcn. 



/ giro the book to them. 

Of which books do you speak? 
of those and of this. 

Bring me that pen and that pen- 
knife. 

I am writing to my friends. 

Whose house is this? it is mine. 

One must obey the laws. 

Of what are you speaking ? of 
useful sciences. 



Iedereen weet het nieuws hetwclk Every one knows the news which 



gij in den brief uws vriends 

hebt gelezen. 
Waaraan h?eft hij zich schuldig 

gemaakt ? aan hoogverraad. 
Wat voor een boek is dat ? het 

is Ho o f t s werken. 
Heeft hij zich bezeerd ? 



you have read in your friend's 
letter. 
Of what icas he guilty ? of high- 
treason. 
What book is that? it is Hooft's 

icorks. 
lias he wounded himself? 



De ziekte waaraan zij overladen is. The sickness of which she died. 



e 8?y 



The observation of which you 

speak. 
Who toill come hither to day , 

your nephew or your cousin ? 
What will you do ? 



De aanmerking van welk 

spreekt. 
Wie zal heden hier komen , uw 

neef of uwe nicht ? 
Wat wilt gij doen ? 

Mijn paard is fraai , maarhetuwe My horse is fine, but yours is 

is fraaijer dan het mijne. finer than mine. 

De weinigen die daaraan deeln?men. The few who take a part in it. 

Waren er veel ? Were there many ? 

Een land dat van zoodanigen mil- A country that must exist by such 

handel raoet bestaan. a barter trade. 

Na deze aanmerkingen wegens onze After these observations respecting 

zeevaart en onzen zeehandel gaan our navigation and trade we 

wij thans tot derzelver eigenlijke proceed now to their particular 

geschiedenis over. history. 

Daartoe was zulk eene geaardheid Thereto such a disposition as he 

als hij bezit , noodig , zulk een possesses , was requisite , such 



welberaden overleg, zulk eene 
zucht tot werkzaamheid , zulk 
een bedaarde moed in de groot- 
ste gevaren. 



a deliberate consideration, such 
an inclination to industry, such 
a cool courage in the greatest 
dangers. 



VERBS. 



,V Verb , werkwoord , expresses the existance of a thing: '- 



62 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

as, zijn, to be, and can signify also the modification of this 
existance as to action, repose, or suffering; as, beminnen, 
to love; slaan. to strike; slapen, to sleep; grieven, to grieve. 
Zijn , wezen , or worden , to be , are the only verbs which 
express existance , and they are present , expressed or un- 
derstood in all other verbs , which are in fact but a state 
or modification of the verb To be ; as , ik ben , I am ; ik 
loop , for ik ben loopende) I run , for am running) ; zij bemin- 
nen, (or zij zijn beminnende), they love, (or are loving.) 

The Verbs may he divided into simple and compound , 
the former are chiefly derived, in common with other words, 
from the Teutonic, and the compound verbs are formed 
by the union of a simple verb with a noun , a preposi- 
tion , or a particle , the number of which , from the faci- 
lity with which the Dutch language compounds verbs, is 
very great ; as , from beeld an image, houwen, to cut, comes 
beeldhouwen, to carve; from brand, fire, stichten, to raise, 
brandsiichten , to set on fire ; from door , through , reizen , 
to travel, doorreizen, to travel through. 

Verbs are also divided into hulp-werkwoorden , auxiliary 
verbs , bedrijvende werkwoorden , active verbs ; lijdende werk- 
ivoorden , passive verbs ; onzijdige werkwoorden , neuter verbs; 
wederkeerige werkwoorden , reflective verbs , and onpersoon- 
lijke werkwoorden, impersonal verbs. 

Verbs are varied by verbuiging , conjugation , which is 
their modification as to wijs , mood ; tijd , tense ; persoon , 
person; getal , number. 

The root of the verb is its imperative mood , gebiedende 
ivijs; it is at least naturally to be inferred that that was 
its first form and use ; as , geef, give ; min , love ; ween 
niet, do not cry; eet , eat. 

Verbs, as to their conjugation, are divided into regelmati- 
ge werkwoorden , regular verbs , and onregelmatige werkwoor- 
den, irregular verbs. 

CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

In the conjugation of verbs there are five moods, three 
participles , three tenses , three persons, and two numbers. 

OF THE MOODS. 

Mood of a verb is that form of it which shows the man- 
ner in which it is to be taken. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 63 

There are four moods: de gebiedende wijs , the impera- 
tive mood ; de onbepaalde wijs , the infinitive mood ; de 
aantoonende wijs, the indicative mood; and de aanvoegende 
wijs, the subjunctive mood. 

THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

The imperative mood , gebiedende wijs ; which is the 
root of the verb, and commands, exhorts, entreats, or 
permits; as, doe dit, do this; wees opleltend, be attentive; 
hoor naar mijne raad , listen to my advice. 

THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 

The infinitive mood, onbepaalde wijs, expresses a thing 
in a general manner without distinction of number, or 
person ; as , lezen , to read ; schrijven , to write ; loopen , to 
run ; te zullen loopen , about to run. 

If the infinitive is not preceded by the preposition te, the 
signification is then direct and immediate , when the pre- 
position te precedes the infinitive the signification of the verb 
is then oblique ; as , ik blijf eten, I remain dining ; ik blijf 
om te eten, I remain to dine (for the purpose of dining). 

Other prepositions also modify the infinitive, they are 
placed before the verb and have te between it and the pre- 
position; as, omtewcrken, for working; zonder te wer- 
ken , without working, 

The infinitive is often used as a noun and is then pre- 
ceded by het; as, het leeren is nattig , learning is useful; 
het schrijven is eene kunst , writing is an art. 

THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

The indicative mood, aantoonende icijs, simply expres- 
ses the existance or state of a thing ; as , hij is rijk , he 
is rich; wij wandelden , we walked; zy hat en , they hate. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

The subjunctive mood, aanvoegende wijs, represents a thing 
under a condition , supposition , motive, wish, etc. accom- 
panied with a futurity , and preceded by a conjunction 
expressed or understood ; as , indien ik het koope , zal ik 
het betalen , if I buy it, I will pay for it ; leer opdat gij ver- 
standig wordet , learn that you may become wise. 



64 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

PARTICIPLES. 

The participle, deelwoord, is a form of the verb partici- 
pating in the form of a verb and an adjective. 

In the conjugation of a verb three forms of the parti- 
ciple are present; as, 

The Present Participle; as from arbeiden, to work; 
arbeidende , working, in which is signified the act of wor- 
king at a time present. 

The Past Participle, which is formed by the particle ge and 
the root of the verb , and conveys an idea of time past in 
conjunction with the act; as, gcarbeid, worked; it is use4 
in the formation of the compound past tenses of verbs in 
conjunction with the auxiliary ; as , ik heb gearbeid , I 
have worked. Those verbs compounded of an initial 
particle or an inseparable preposition do not take ge in 
the formation of the past-participle ; as , herstellen , to res- 
tore , hersteld , restored. 

The Future Participle is formed of the infinitive and 
the auxiliary zullen , and conveys an idea of future time 
with the action ; as , zullende arbeiden , about working. 

Participles are often used as adjectives but differ from 
them in this particular that they not only qualify the 
noun but mark also a time and an action ; as , een ar- 
beidende man , a working man , or a man who works , 
or is working; een fraai gewerkte doos, a beautifully wor- 
ked box. 

THE TENSES. 

Tense, tijd , is a modification of the verb as to time. 
There are three tenses : the present , de tegemvoordige ; 
the past , verledene ; and the future , de toekomende. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

The present tense , tegemvoordige tijd , expresses what is 
going on at the present time or at the time the person is 
speaking or writing ; as , ik schrijf nu aan mijnen broeder, 
I am now writing to my brother ; ik hoor wat gij zegt , 
I hear what you say ; zij slapen , they sleep. 

PAST TENSE. 

There are three past tenses , de onvolmaakt verledene tijd, 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. C5 

the imperfect past tense ; de volmaakt verlcdene tijd , the 
perfect past tense ; and de zamengestelde verlcdene tijd , the 
compound past tense. 

IMPERFECT PAST TENSE. 

The imperfect past tense represents a time as imper- 
fectly or definitely past, or as having taken place at a 
certain specified time ; as , ik glng gisteren naar Amsterdam, 
I went yesterday to Amsterdam ; ik zag hem tocn hij hier 
was , I saw him when he was here; ik beminde haar voor hare 
deugd en zedigheid, I loved her for her virtue and modesty. 

PERFECT PAST TENSE. 

The perfect past tense , de volmaakt verledene tijd , re- 
presents a time as perfectly past without reference to 
any other time , or in reference to a time that is pas- 
sing away when speaking ; as , ik heb Hollandsch geleerd , 
I have learned Dutch ; wij zijn in Engeland geweest , we 
have been in England; ik heb hem van daag gezien, I have 
seen him to day. 

COMPOUND PAST TENSE. * 

The compound past tense , zamengestelde verledene tijd , 
represents an action as past before another event happen- 
ed ; as , ik was mrtrokken eer de kiok sloeg , I had depart- 
ed before the clock struck ; ik had mijnen brief geschreven 
tocn de post vertrok, I had written my letter when the post 
departed. 

FUTURE TENSE. 

There are two future tenses , toekomende tijden : the fu- 
ture tense , and the compound future tense. 

The future tense, de toekomende tijd, represents an ac- 
tion as yet to come, either with or without respect to the 
precise time ; as , wij zullen morgeti vertrekken , we shall 
depart to morrow ; wij zullen alien sterven, we shall all die. 



* This tense is commonly called the Meer dan volmaakt verledene 
tijd j Pluperfect past tense ; but improperly so. 

5 



«« DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

COMPOUND FUTURE TENSE. 

The compound future tense , zamengestelde toelwmende tijd , 
intimates that the action will be fully accomplished at or 
before the time of another future action or event ; as , eer 
de post wrtrekt , zal ik mjjnen brief geschreven hebben, before 
the post departs , I shall have written my letter. ' 

All the foregoing tenses belong also to the subjunctive 
mood , and convey the same idea of time as in the in- 
dicative , but are accompanied with a conjunction ex- 
pressed or understood , and have a connection with an- 
other verb which precedes or follows, carrying with it 
an idea of futurity; as, indien hij zich vlijtig oefene , zal 
hij geleerd worden , if he study diligently , he will become 
learned ; of hij home of niet , zal ik toch mijne reis voort- 
zetten , whether he come or not , I shall continue my 
journey ; indien hij het gedaan hadde , zoude ik op hem boos 
geweest zijh , if he had done it , I should have been an- 
gry with him ; indien gij zoudet naar Amsterdam gaan , zal 
ik ook derwaarls gaan, if you should go to Amsterdam, 
I will go thither also. 

OF NUMBER. 

Verbs have two numbers, a singular and plural, like 
nouns and pronouns with which the verbs must agree; 
as , ik leer , I learn ; wij spreken , we speak ; hij is vertrok- 
ken, he is gone; zij geven , they give; een vogel vliegt , 
a bird flies ; dieren loopen , animals walk. 

OF PERSON. 

Verbs have three persons , a first , second , and third , 
like personal pronouns with which the verbs must agree; 
nouns are always in the third person ; as , 

Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meerwudig , Plural. 

ik loop / run wij loopen we run 

gij loopt thou runnest gij loopt you run 

hij loopt he runs zij loopen they run 

de paarden loopen , horses run ; de leerling leert , the pupil 
learns; vogelen vliegen en dieren loopen, birds fly and ani- 
mals walk. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



ci 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 

Auxiliary verbs are those which are used in conjuga- 
ting other verbs through their compound moods and ten- 
ses , tbey are zullen, shall or will J hebben, to have; ztjn, 
wezen or worden , to be. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ZULLEN. 

Zullen , shall or will , is used in expressing the future 
tense. 



ONBEPAALDE YVlJS, 1 






te zullen 


N 


o Infinitive Mood, 


Deelwoord, 




nor Participle. 


zullende 






Aamoonende Wus , 




Indicative Mood. 


ik zal / shall 




wij zullen we shall 


gij zult thou wilt 




gij zult you will 


hij zal he will 




zij zullen they will 



Aanvoegende Wus , 

ik zou or zoude I should 

gij zoudet thou wouldst 

hij zoude he would 



Subjunctive Mood. 

wij zouden we should 
gij zoudet you would 

zij zouden they would 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY YERB HEBBEN. 

Hebben, to have , is used in expressing the past tenses 
of verbs. 



Gebiedende Wus , 

heb have 

Onbepaalde Wus , 

tegenw. tijd hebben 
veiled, tijd gehad hebben 
tOKkom. tijd te zullen hebben 

Deelwoorden , 

tegenw. tijd hebbende 

verled. tijd gehad 

toekom. tijd zullende hebben 



Imperative Mood. 

hebt have 

Infinitive Mood. 

present tense to have 
past tense to have had 

future tense about to have 

Participles. 

present tense having 

past tense had 

future tense about having 



68 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Aantoonende Wijs , 

Tegenwoordige Tijd , 
Ik heb I have 

gij hebt thou hast 

h.ij heeft he has 

Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , 

ik bad I had 

gij hadt thou hadst 

hij had he had 

Volmaalit Verledene Tijd , 
ik heb gehad / have had 

gij hebt gehad thou hast had 
hij heeft gehad he has had 

Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd, 
ik had gehad / had had 

gij hadt g( j had thou hadst had 
hij had gehad he had had 

Toekomende Tijd , 
ik zal hebben / shall have 
gij zult hebben thou wilt have 
hij zal hebben he will have 

Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd 

ik zal gehad hebben 
gij zult gehad hebben 
hij zal gehad hebben 
wij zullen gehad hebben 
gij zult gehad hebben 
zij zullen gehad hebben 

Aanvoegende Wijs , 

Tegenwoordige Tijd, 

dat ik hebbe that I have 

dat gij hebbet that thou have 

dat hij hebbe that he have 
Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd, 

dat ik hadde that I had 

dat gij haddet that thou had 

dat hij hadde that he had 



Indicative Mood. 

Present tense. 

wij hebben we have 
gij hebt you have 

zij hebben they have 

Imperfect Past Tense. 
wij hadden we had 
gij hadt you had 

zij hadden they had 

Perfect Past Tense. 
wij hebben gehad we have had 
gij hebt gehad you have had 

zij hebben gehad they have had 

Compound Past Tense. 
wij hadden gehad we had had 
gij hadt gehad you had had 

zij hadden gehad they had had 

Future Tense. 
wij zullen hebben we shall have 
gij zult hebben you will have 
zij zullen hsbben they will have 

, Compound Future Tense. 

I shall have had 
thou unit have had 
he ivill have had 
we shall have had 
you will have had 
they will have had 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present Tense. 

dat wij hebben that we have 
dat gij hebbet that you have 
dat zij hebben that they have 

Imperfect Past Tense. 

dat wij hadden that we had 
dat gij haddet that you had 
dat zij hadden that they had 



DITCH ETYMOLOGY 



r.» 



Volmaakt Yerlcd. Tijd, 

dat ik gehad hebbe 
dat <jij g^had hebbet 
dat hij g 'had hebbe 
dat wij g j had hebben 
dat gij gehad hebbet 
dat zij gehad hebben 

Zameiigest. Yerled. Tijd , 

dat ik g°had hadde 
dat gij gehad haddet 
dat hij gehad hadde 
dat wij gehad hadden 
dat gij gehad haddet 
dat zij gehad hadden 

Toekomende Tijd , 

ik zou or zoude hebben 

gij zoudet hebben 

hij zou or zoude hebben 

wij zouden hebben 

gij zoudet hebben 

zij zouden hebben 

Zamengestelde Toekomende Tijd, 
ik zou or zoude gehad hebben 
gij zoudet gehad hebben 
hij zou or zoude gehad hebben 
wij zouden gehad hebben 
gij zoudet gehad hebben 
zij zouden gehad hebben 



Perfect Past Tense, 
that 1 hate had 
that thou hate had 
that he have had 
that we have had 
that you have had 
that they have had 

Compound Past Tense, 
that I had had 
that thou had had 
that he had had 
that we had had 
that you had had 
that they had had 

Future Tense. 
I should have 
thou wouldst have 
he would have 
•we should have 
you would have 
they would have 

Compound Future Tense. 
J should have had 
thou shouldst have had 
he should have had 
we should have had 
you should have had 
they should have had 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ZIJN 
OR WEZEN. 

Zijn or ivezen , to be , is used in conjugating verbs pas- 
sive , and some neuter verbs implying a state of exis- 
tence. 



Gebiedende Wijs , 

wees , or zij be 

0>BEPAALDE WlJS , 

tegenw. tijd zijn , or wezen 

verled. tijd zijn geweest 

toekom. tijd te zullen zijn 



Imperative Mood. 

weest, or zijt be 

Infinitive Mood. 

present tense to be 

past tense to have been 

future tense about to be 



*G 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Beelwoorden , 

tegenw. tijd zijnds, or wezende 

verled. tijd geweest 

toekom. tijd zullende zijn 

AANTOONENDE Wus, 
Tegenwoordige Tijd , 



Participles. 

present tense being 

past tense been 

future tense about being 

Indicative Mood. 

Present Tense. 



ik ben 


/ am 


gij "J* 


thou art 


hij is 


he is 


Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , 


ik was 


J was 


gij waart 


thou toast 


hij was 


he was 



wy zijn 


toe are 


gij z ijt 


you are 


zij zijn 


they are 



Yolmaakt Verledene Tijd , 

ik ben geweest / have been 
gij zijt geweest thou hast been 
hij is geweest he has been 

Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd , 

ik was geweest / had been 
gij waart geweest thou hadst been 
hij was geweest he had been 

Toekomende Tijd , 

ik zal zijn / shall he 

gij zult zijn thou icilt be 

hij zal zijn he will be 

Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd 

ik zal geweest zijn 
gij zult geweest zijn 
hij zal geweest zijn 
wij zullen geweest zijn 
gij zult geweest zijn 
zij zullen geweest zijn 

Aanvoegende Wus , 

Tegemvoordige Tijd , 



Imperfect Past Tense. 

wij war en we were 
gij waart you were 
zij waren they were 

Perfect Past Tense. 

wij waren geweest we have been 
gij waart geweest you have been 
zij waren geweest they have been 

Compound Past Tense. 
wij waren geweest we had been 
gij waart geweest you had been 
zij waren geweest they had been 

Future Tense. 

wij zullen zijn we shall be 



gij zult zijn 
zij zullen zijn 



we 

you will be 

they will be 



Compound Future Tense. 
I shall have been 
thou wilt have been, 
he will have been 
we shall have been 
you will have been 
they will have been 

Surjunctive Mood. 

Present Tense 



indien ik zij 
indien gij zijt 
indien hij zij 



if I be 
if thou be 
if he be 



indien wij zijn 
indien gij zijt 
indien zij zijn 



if we be 
if you be 
if they be 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd, 

indien ik ware if J were 

indien gij waret if thou were 
indien hij ware if he were 

Volmaakl Verledene Tijd, 

indien ik zij geweest 
indien gij zijt geweest 
indien hij zij geweest 
indien wij zijn geweest 
indien gij zijt geweest 
indien zij zijn geweest 

Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd, 
indien ik ware geweest 
indien gij waret geweest 
indien hij ware geweest 
indien wij waren geweest 
indien gij waret geweest 
indien zij waren geweest 

Toekomende Tijd, 
indien ik zoude zijn 
indien gij zoudet zijn 
indien hij zonde zijn 
indien wij zouden zijn 
indien gij zoudet zijn 
indien zij zouden zijn 

Zamengestelde Toekomende. Tijd , 

indien ik zoude geweest zijn 
indien gij zoudet geweest zijn 
indien hij zoude geweest zijn 
indien wij zouden geweest zijn 
indien gij zoudet geweest zijn 
indien zij zouden geweest zijn 



Imperfect Past Tense. 

indien wij waren if we were 
indien gij waret if you were 

indien zij waren if they v;ere 

Perfect Past Tense. 

if I hare been 
if thou have been 
if he have been 
if ice have been 
if you have been 
if they have been 

Compound Past Tense. 

if I had been 
if thou had been 
if he had been 
if we had been 
if you had been 
if they had been 

Future Tense. 

if I should be 
if thou should be 
if he should be 
if we should be 
if you should be 
if they should be 

Compound Future Tense. 

if I should have been 
if thou should have been 
if he should have been 
if we should have been 
if you should have been 
if they should have been 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB WORDEN. 

Wordcn , to be , or become , or grow , is used in con- 
jugating verbs passive , and indicates a passive state , or 
a passive duration , or amelioration. 



Gebiedende Wijs, 

word be or become 



Imperative Mood. 

wordt be or become 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Onbepaalde Wijs 



Infinitive Mood. 



tegenw. tijd worden 


present tense to be 


verled. tijd worden geweest 


past tense to have been 


toekom. tijd te zullen worden 


future tense about to be 


Deelwoorden , 


Participles. 


tegenw. tijd wordende 


present tense being 


verled. tijd geworden 


past tense been 


toekom. tijd zullende worden 


future tense about being 


Aantoonende Wijs , 


Indicative Mood. 


Tegenwoordige Tijd, 


Present Tense. 


ik word I am 


wij worden we are 


gij wordt thou art 


gij wordt you are 


hij wordt he is 


zij worden they are 


Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , 


Imperfect Past Tense. 


ik werd J was 


wij werden we were 


gij werdt thou wast 


gij werdt you were 


hij werdt he was 


zij werden they vjere 


Volmaakt Verleden Tijd , 


Perfect Past Tense. 



ik ben geworden I have been wij zijn geworden we have been 

gij zij t geworden thou hast been gij zijt geworden you hare been 

hij is geworden he has been zij zijn gewo"d2.:i they have been 



Compound Past Tense. 



he has been 

Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd 

ik was geworden I had been wij waren geworden we had been 

p-ij waart geworden thou hadst been gij waart geworden you had been 
hij was geworden he had been zij waren geworden they had been \ 

Future Tense. 
wij zullen worden we shall be 
gij zult worden you wul be 

zij zullen worden they will be 

Compound Future Tense. 

J shall have been 



Toekomende Tijd , 
ik zal worden J shall be 

gij zult worden thou tcilt be 
hij zal worden he will be 

Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd 

ik zal geworden zijn 
gij zult geworden zijn 
hij zal geworden zijn 
wij zullen geworden zijn 
gij zult geworden zijn 
zij zullen geworden zijn 



thou wilt have been 
he will have been 
we shall have been 
you will have been 
they will have been 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



Aanvoegknde Wijs , 

legenwoordige Tijd , 

indien ik worde if I be 

indien gij wordet if thou be 
indien hij worde if he be 

Onvolmaakt Yerlcdene Tijd, 



indien ik wierdc 
indien gij wierdet 
indien hij wierde 



if I were 
if thou were 
if he were 



Yolmaakt Yerledene Tijd, 

indien ik zij geworden 
indien gij zijt gevvorden 
indien hij zij geworden 
indien wij zijn geworden 
indien gij zijt geworden 
indien zij zijn geworden 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present Tense. 

indien wij worden if we b" 
indien gij wordet if you be 
indien zij worden if they be 

Imperfect Past Tense. 

indien wij wierden if we were 
indien gij wierdet if yon were 
indien zij wierden if they were 

Perfect Past Tense. 

if I have been 
if thou hate been 
if he have been 
if we have been 
if you hare been 
if they have been 



Zamengestelde Yerledene Tijd, Compound Past Tense. 



indien ik ware geworden 
indien gij waret geworden 
indien hij ware geworden 
indien wij waren geworden 
indien gij waret geworden 
indien zij waren geworden 

Toekomende Tijd, 

indien ik zoude worden 
indien gij zoudet worden 
indien hij zoude worden 
indien wij zouden worden 
indien gij zoudet worden 
indien zij zouden worden 



if I had been 
if thou had been 
if he had been 
if we had been 
if you had been 
if they had been 

Future Tense. 

if I should be 
if thou should be 
if he should be 
if we should be 
if you should be 
if they should be 



Zamengestelde Toekomende Tijd , Compound Future Tense. 



indien ik zoude geworden zijn 
indien gij zoudet geworden zijn 
indien hij zoude geworden zijn 
indien wij zouden geworden zijn 
indien gij zoudet geworden zijn 
indien iij zouden <je worden zijn 



if I should hare been 
if thou should have been 
if he should have been 
if we should have been 
if you should have been 
if they should hate been 



74 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



VERBS ACTIVE. 

A verb active or transitive , bedrijvend werkwoord , has 
not only a nominative from which the action emanates, 
but must also have an object to which the action passes; 
as , ik sla den man , I strike the man ; hij schrijft eenen 
brief, he writes a letter. 

Verbs active are either regular or irregular in their 
conjugation. 

REGULAR VERBS. 

Regular verbs , gelijkvloeijende iverkwoorden or regelmalige 
werkwoorden , are those which form the Past Imperfect 
Tense by taking de or te at the end ; as , min , love , ik 
minde , I loved ; icerk , work , ik werkte , I worked ; and 
the Past Participle is formed by dropping the e final of 
the past imperfect and adding ge at the beginning of the 
word ; as , ik werkte , I worked ; ik heb gcwerkt , I have 
worked; ik iceende , I wept; ik heb geweend, I have wept. 
Except those verbs beginning with the particle , be , go , 
her , out , ver , or wan, which only drop the e of the 
imperfect ; as , ik beminde , I loved ; ik heb bemind , I have 
loved; ik geleide , I led; ik heb geleid, I have led; etc. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB LEEREN. 

Gebiedende Wijs , Imperative Mood. 

leer learn leert learn 

Onbepaaxde Wijs, Infinitive Mood. 

tegenw. tijd leeren present tense to learn 

verled. tijd geleerd hebben past tense to have learned 

toekora. tijd te zullen leeren future tense about to learn 

Deelwoorden , Participles. 

tegenw. tijd leerende present tense learning 

verled. tijd geleerd past tense learned 

toekom. tijd zullende leeren future tense about learning 

Aantoonende Wijs , Indicative Mood. 

Tegenwoordige Tijd, Present tense. 

ik leer / learn wij leeren we learn 

gij leert thou learnest gij leert you learn 

<hij leert he learn" zij leeren thetj learn 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



75 



Ojtvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , 

ik leerde I learned 

gij leerdet thou learnedst 

hij leerde he learned 

Volmaakt Verledene Tijd , 
ik heb geleerd 1 have learned 
gij hebt geleerd thou hast learned 
hij heeft geleerd he has learned 

Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd , 
ik had geleerd / had learned 



Imperfect Past Tense. 

wij leerden we learned 
gij leerdet you learned 
zij leerden they learned 

Perfect Past Tense. 
wij bebben geleerd we have learned 
gij hebt geleerd you have learned 
zij hebben geleerd they havelearned 

Compound Past Tense. 
wij hadden geleerd we had learned 



gij hadt geleerd thou hadst learned gij hadt geleerd you had learned 



hij had geleerd he hadlearned 

Toekomende Tijd, 

ik zal leeren / shall learn 
gij zult leeren thou wilt learn 
hij zal leeren ho will learn 

Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd , 

ik zal geleerd hebben 
gij zult geleerd hebben 
hij zal geleerd hebben 
wij zullen geleerd hebben 
gij zult geleerd hebben 
zij zullen geleerd hebben 

Aanvoegende Wijs , 

Tegenwoordige Tijd , 
indien ik leere if I learn 

indien gij leeret if thou learn 
indien hij leere if he learn 

Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd, 

indien ik leerde if I learned 
indien gij leerdet if thou learned 
indien hij leerde if he learned 

Volmaakt Verled. Tijd , 

indien ik hebbe geleerd 
indien gij hebbet geleerd 
indien hij hebbe geleerd 
indien wij hebben geleerd 
indien gij hebbet geleerd 
indien zij hebben geleerd 



zij hadden geleerd they hadlearned 

Future Tense. 
wij zullen leeren we shall learn 
gij zult leeren you will learn 

zij zullen leeren they will learn 

Compound Future Tense. 
I shall have learned 
thou wilt have learned 
he will have learned 
we shall have learned 
you will have learned 
they will have learned 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present Tense. 

indien wij leeren if we learn 
indien gij leeret if you learn 
indien zij leeren if they learn 

Imperfect Past Tense. 

indien wij leerden if we learned 
indien gij leerdet if you learned 
indien zij leerden if they learned 

Perfect Past Tense. 

if J have learned 
if thou have learned 
if he have learned 
if we have learned 
if you have learned 
if they have learned 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Zamengest. Verled. Tijd , 

indien ik hadde geleerd 

indien gij haddet geleerd 

fndien hij hadde geleerd 

indien wij hadden geleerd 

indien gij haddet gsleerd 

indien zij hadden geleerd 

Toekomende Tijd , 
indien ik zoude leeren 
indien gij zoudet leeren 
indien hij zoude leeren 
indien wij zouden leeren 
indien gij zoudet lesren 
indien zij zouden leeren 

Zamengestelde Toekomende Tijd, 

indien ik zoude geleerd hebbpn 
indien gij zoudet geleerd hebben 
indien hij zoude geleerd hehben 
indien wij zouden geleerd hebben 
indien gij zoudet geleerd hebben 
indien zij zouden geleerd hebben 



Compound Past Tense. 

if I had learned 
if thou had learned 
if he had learned 
if we had learned 
if you had learned 
if they had learned 

Future Tense. 

if I should learn 
if thou should learn 
if lis should learn 
if we should learn 
if you should learn 
if they should learn 

Compound Future Tense, 

if J should have learned 
if thou should have learned 
if he should have learned 
if we should have learned 
if you should have learned 
if they should have learned 



THE FORMATION OF THE MOODS AND TENSES 
OF VERBS. 

The Imperative Mood is the root of the verb. 

The Infinitive is formed bij adding en to the impera- 
tive ; as , leer , learn , leeren , to learn ; bemin , love , tie- 
minnen, to love; except verbs ending with a vowel, which 
only take n; as, zie, see, zien, to see; doe, do; doen, to do. ; 
and verbs in the imperative ending in a , which double 
that vowel ; as , sta , stand , staan , to stand ; ga , go , 
gaan , to go ; and except also verbs in a single conso- 
nant preceded by a short vowel , which double the final 
consonant in the infinitive ; as , bid , pray , bidden , to pray; 
ren, run, rennen , to run. Imperatives ending in a con- 
sonant preceded by a double vowel , drop one of the 
vowels , and the consonant goes to the next syllable ; as , 
gaap , gape , gapen , to gape ; huur , hire , huren, to hire; 
hoop, hope, hopen , to hope. 

Except the following verbs in ee, which retain the ee 



I) U T C II E T Y M L G Y 



77 



in conjugation ; as 
set all sail. 



beer aan , set all sail , aanbeeren , to 



beer aan press sail 

begeer desire 

beheer rule 

bekeer I urn, convert 

h?]i\eed furnish, cover 

benadeel injure 

beneen say no 

bezeer wound 

bleek bleech 

bleet bleat 

deel share 

clweep be bigoted 

eer honor 

fleem flatter 

geer run obliquely 

beel cure 

heet heat 

keer turn 

keet clean 



ketelstreel kittle 

kleed dress 

k!eem stick to 

krakcel cavil 

kreoi border 

kweek rear 

leem plaster with clay 

leen lend 

Jeer learn 

lillebeen tremble 

meed dye with madder 

meen mean 

meer wtoor 

neet rtce/ 

omkreel swarm round 

oordeel judge 

reed equip 

schaveel move round 



scheel separate 

smeek pray 

streel comb 

tecken draw 

tees fray 

veen make turf 

veet quarrel 

vereen unite 

verwees be orphanized 

vrees fear 

week soak 

ween weep 

weer indurate 

zeep sort/? 

zeer /iwrf 

zvveem resemble 

zweep whip 

zweet sweat 



and also their compounds which retain in like manner 
the ee ; as , bedeel , divide , Ideed aan, put on clothes, etc. 
Except also the following verbs in oo which retain the 
oo in conjugation ; as , begroot , estimate , begrooten , to 
estimate , etc. 



begroot estimate 
behoor belong 
Moot make naked 
boom push a boat 
dood kill 
doop babtize 
doof be deaf 
droog dry 
droom dream 
droop drop 
fool teaze 
gedoog allow 
geloof believe 
goor turn rancid 
hoog heighten 
hoop heap 



hoor hearken 
hoos lade 
knoop button 
koop buy 
kroon crown 
lood mark with a 

leaden ticket 
loog put into lye 
loon reward 
loop rim 
nood invite 
oog eye 
oon c£/s< young 
poos res/ 
rook smoke 



roof s/ea/ 

schoon c7can 

sloop break up 

»loot efft/c/a 

sloof toil 

stoot ^ms/i 

stroom stream 

stroop flay 

toog sAcio 

toom check 

toon f?tne 

troon govern 

verdoor become foolish 

verloom lire 

zoom border 



T« DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

Except also their compounds which retain in like man- 
ner the oo ; as , droop door , drop through, doordroopen, to 
drop through ; verhoog , heighten , verhoogen , to heighten. 
When the imperative ends in /", the /"is changed into 
v in the infinitive; as, leef, live, leven, to live; and when 
it ends in s , the s is changed into z ; as , lees , read , 
toft , to read ; verbs in % final in the imperative , take 
jen in the infinitive ; as maai , mow , maaijen, to mow. 

Infinitives in ssch or gch, drop the s or g in the im- 
perfect ; as , blusschen , to extinguish , ik bluschte, I extin- 
guished ; kugchen , to cough , ik kuchte , I coughed. 

The Present Participle is formed by adding de to the 
infinitive ; as , leeren , to learn , leerende , learning ; be- 
minnen , to love , beminnende , loving. 

The First Person of the Present Indicative is like the 
imperative; as, ga, go, ik ga, I go; hoor , hear, ik hoor> 
I hear ; zie , see , ik zie , I see. 

The Second Person is formed from the first by adding 
t ; as , ik zie, I see, gij ziet, thou seest; ik hoor, I hear, 
gij hoort , thou nearest. When the first person ends in t, 
the second remains unchanged ; as , ik zit , I sit , gij zit , 
you sit. The Third Person singular is like the second ; 
as , gij bemint , you love , hij bemint , he loves. 

The First and Third Person Plural are like the infini- 
tive ; and the Second Person Plural is like the second 
person singular. 

The Imperfect Past Tense is formed from the first per- 
son of the present indicative by taking de when it ends 
in b , d , g , i , I , m , n , r , u , t? , w , or z ; and by 
taking te , when it ends in f , k , p , s , J , or ch ; as , 
i/c fcemm , I love , ik beminde , I loved ; ik maak , I make , 
ik maakle , I made ; etc. When the First Person Present 
ends in d or t , the d or Ms doubled in the Past ; as , 
ik brand , I burn , ik brandde , I burned ; ik plant , I plant, 
ik planlte, I planted; etc. The Second Person of this tense 
is formed from the first by adding t ; as ; ik beminde , 
I loved , gij bemindet , thou lovedst ; ik redde , I deliver , 
gij reddet, thou deliveredst; etc. The Third Person is like 
the first. The First and Third Person plural are formed 
by adding en to the first person singular ; as , ik maakte , 
I made , wij maakten , we made , zij maakten , they made ; 
ik lachte , I laughed , wij lachten , we laughed , zij lachten , 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 79 

they laughed. Those past tenses in dd or tt take de in 
the first and second persons plural ; as , ik redde, I deliv- 
ered , wij reddeden , we delivered ; ik vatte , I seized , 
wij vatleden , we seized ; etc. 

The Present Tense of the Subjunctive is formed from 
the infinitive by dropping the final n; as, hoopen, to hope, 
indien ik hoope , if I hope ; zien , to see , indien ik zie , if 
I see; maken , to make , indien ik make , if I make; etc. 
except monosyllabic verbs in aa which drop also the 
latter of the two vowels as well as the n ; as , gaan , to 
go , indien ik ga , if I go ; slaan , to stand , indien ik sta , 
if I stand. The Second Person of this mood and tense 
is formed by adding t to the first person ; as , indien ik 
make , if I make , indien gij maket , if thou make , indien 
ik hoope , if I hope , indien gij hoopet , if you hope ; ex- 
cept those ending in a which double the final vowel ; 
as , indien ik ga , if I go , indien gij gaat , if thou go. 
The Third Person is like the first. The First and Third 
Persons plural are like the infinitive ; and the Second 
Person plural is like that of the singular. 

The Imperfect Past Tense of the Subjunctive is like the 
imperfect of the indicative; as, ik maakte, I made, indien 
ik maakte , if I made ; but those verbs which have 
double t or d in the infinitive take de , as , ik zette , I 
set, indien ik zettede , if lset; etc. however for the sake 
of harmony the de is often omitted. 

After this manner are conjugated the following Regular 
Verbs , as examples : 

Imp. Mood. Inf. Mood. Present. Imperf. Partic. 

bouw build bouwen ik bouw ik bouwde gebouwd 

pak pack pakken ik pak ik pakte gepakt 

kook cook kooken ik kook ik kooktc gekookt 

antwoord answer anlwoorden ik antwoord ik anlwoordde geantvvoord 

punt point punten ik punt ik puntte gepnnt 

wed bet wedden ik wed ik wedde gewod 

leef live leven ik leef ik leefde gelcefd 

begeer desire h ."gocrcn ik begeer ik begeerde begeerd 

berhaal relate herhalen ik herhaal ik herhaalde herhaald 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Irregular verbs , ongelijkvloeijende vserkicoorden or onrc- 



80 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



gelmatige werkwoorden , are those which differ from the 
foregoing in the formation of the past tense and past par- 
ticiple. 

The Dutch language , like others of Teutonic origin, 
contains many verbs which change the vowel of the root 
in the formation of the imperfect past tense; as, zie, see, 
zien , to see , ik zag , I saw , gezien , seen ; schrijf , write , 
schrijven, to write, ik schreef, I wrote, gesehreven, written; 
and some verbs change, as well, the final consonant, as, 
the radical vowel ; as , doe , do , doen , to do , deed , did , 
gedaan , done ; etc. The Irregular Verbs consist chiefly of 
those which change the vowels of the root , as follows : 



1. ij into ee 

2. ie — oo 

3. i — o 

4. ee — a 



5. e into a 

G. e — ie 

7. e — o 

8. aa — ie 



9. aa into oe 

10. ui — oo 

n. an — i 

12. ou ' — ie 



List of irregular Verbs, exhibiting the Root , the Infini- 
tive , the Past Imperfect , and the Past Participle. 

l. Those verbs which change ij into ee in the Past Im- 
perfect , and into e long in the Participle , which com- 
prehend upwards of one fourth of the whole : 



bezwijk 


bezwijken 


to faint 


bezweek 


bezweken 


bijt 


bij ten 


to bite. 


beet 


gebeten 


blijk 


blijken 


to seem 


bleek 


gebleken 


blijf 


blijven 


to remain 


bleef 


gebleven 


drijf 


drijven 


to drive 


dreef 


gedreven 


dijg 


dijgen 


to challenge 


deeg 


gedegen 


dvvijn 


dwijnen 


to disappear 


dween 


gedwenen 


gelijk 


gelijken 


to resemble 


geleek 


geleken 


sUJ d 


glijden 


to slide 


gleed 


gegleden 


s ri J n 


grijnen 


to wimper 


green 


gegrenen 


S ri JP 


grijpen 


to seize 


greep 


gegrepen 


hijg 


hijgen 


to pant 


heeg 


gehegen 


hijscb 


hijschen 


to hoist 


heesch 


geheschen 


kijk 


kijken 


to look 


keek 


gekeken 


kijf 


kijven 


to chide 


keef 


gekeven 


knijp 


knijpen 


to pinch 


kneep 


geknepen 


krijs 


krijgen 


to get 


kreeg 


gekregen 


krijt 


krijten 


to cry 


kreet 


gekreten 


kwijt 


kwijten 


to acquit 


kweet 


gekweten 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



81 



lijd 


lijden 


to suffer 


leed 


geleden 


lijk 


lijken 


to resemble 


leek 


geleken 


mijd 


mijden 


to avoid 


meed 


gemeden 


"iJS 


nijgen 


to curtsy 


neeg 


genegen 


ni JP 


nijpen 


to pinch 


neep 


genepen 


PUP 


pijpen 


to pipe 


peep 


gepepen 


prijs 


prijzen 


to commend 


prees 


geprezen 


rijd 


rijden 


to ride 


reed 


gereden 


"jg 


rijgen 


to lace 


reeg 


geregen 


rijt 


rijten 


to slit 


reet 


gereten 


rijf 


rijven 


to grate 


reef 


gereven 


rijs 


rijzen 


to mount 


rees 


gerezen 


schijn 


schijn en 


to appear 


scheen 


geschenen 


6chrijd 


schrijden 


to straddle 


schreed 


geschreden 


schrijf 


schrijven 


to write 


schreef 


geschreven 


slijp 


slijpen 


to grind 


sleep 


geslepen 


slijt 


slijten 


to wear 


sleet 


gesleten 


smijt 


smijten 


to throw 


smeet 


gesmeten 


snijd 


snijden 


to cut 


sneed 


gesneden 


spijt 


spijten 


to be sorry 


speet 


gespeten 


splijt 


splijten 


to split 


spleet 


gespleten 


«tiJS 


stijgen 


to mount 


steeg 


gestegen 


stijf 


stijven 


to starch 


steef 


gesteven 


strijd 


strijden 


to fight 


strecd 


gestredcn 


strijk 


strijken 


to strike 


streek 


gestreken 


UJS. 


tijgen 


to accuse 


teeg 


getegen 


wijk 


wijken 


to give way 


week 


geweken 


wijt 


wijten 


to impute 


weet 


geweten 


wijs 


wijzen 


to show 


wees 


gewezen 


wrijf 


wrijven 


to rub 


wreef 


gewreven 


zwijg 


zwijgen 


to be silent 


zweeg 


gezwegen 


zys 


zijgen 


to filtrate 


zeeg 


gezegen 



2. Those which change ie into oo in the Past Imperfect , 
and into o long in the Past Participle : 



bedrieg 


bedriegen 


to deceive 


bedroog 


Ledrogen 


bied 


bied en 


to offer 


bood 


geboden 


geniet 


genieten 


to enjoy 


genoot 


genoten 


giet 


gieten 


to pour 


goot 


gegoten 


kies 


kiezen 


to choose 


koos 


gekozen 


klief 


klieven 


to cleave 


kloof 


gekloven 


lieg 


liegen 


to lie 


loog 


gelogen 


riek 


rieken 


to smell 


rook 


geroken ' 
6 



82 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



schiet 


schieten 


to shoot 


schoot 


geschoten 


verdriet 


verdrieten 


to sadden, 


verdroot 


verdroteri 


verlies 


verliezen 


to lose 


verloor 


verloren 


vlied 


vlieden 


to flee 


vlood 


gevloden 


vlieg 


vliegen 


to fly 


vloog 


gevlogeu 


vliet 


vlieten 


to flow 


vloot 


gevloten 


vries 


vriezen 


to freeze 


vroor 


gevroren 


zied 


zieden 


to seethe 


zood 


gezoden 



3. Those which change i short into o short both in the 
Past Imperfect and Past Participle : 



begin 


beginnen 


to begin 


begon 


begonnen 


bezin 


bezinncn 


to ponder 


bezon 


bezonnen 


blink 


blinken 


to shine 


blonk 


geblonken 


bind 


binden 


to bind 


bond 


gebonden 


ding 


dingen 


to chaffer 


dong 


gedongen 


dring 


dringcn 


to press 


drong 


gedrongen 


drink 


drinken 


to drink 


dronk 


gcdronken 


dwing 


dwingen 


to force 


dwong 


gedwongen 


glim 


glimmen 


to shine 


glom 


geglommen 


klim 


klimrnen 


to climb 


klom 


geklommen 


klink 


klinken 


to sound 


klonk 


geklonken 


spin 


spinnen 


to spin 


spon 


gesponnen 


spring 


springen 


to leap 


sprong 


gesprongen 


stink 


stinkcn 


to stink 


stonk 


gestonken 


verzin 


verzinnen 


to invent 


verzon 


verzonnen 


verzwind 


verzwinden 


to disappear 


verzwond 


verzwonden 


vind 


vinden 


to find 


vend 


gevonden 


wind 


windcn 


to tcind 


wond 


gewonden 


win 


winnen 


to gain 


won 


gewonnen 


wring 


wringen 


to taring 


wrong 


gewrongen 


zing 


zingen 


to sing 


zong 


gczongen 


zink 


zinken 


to sink 


zonk 


gezonken 



4. Those which change ee long into a short in the Past 
Imperfect , and into o or e long in the Past Participle : 



beveel 


bevelen 


to command 


beval 


bevolen 


breek 


breken 


to break 


brak 


gebroken 


eet 


eten 


to cat 


at 


gegeten 


genees 


genezen 


to cure 


genaa 


genezen 


geef 


geven 


to give 


gaf 


gegeven 


Jees 


lezen 


to read 


las 


gelezen 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



83 



meet 


meten 


to measure 


mat 


gemeten 


neem 


nemen 


to take 


nam 


genomen 


spreek 


spreken 


to speak 


sprak 


gesproken 


steck 


steken 


to sting 


stak 


gestoken 


steel 


stelen 


to steal 


stal 


gestolen 


treed 


treden 


to tread 


trad 


getreden 


verged 


vergeten 


to forget 


vergat 


vergeten 


vreet 


vreten 


to devour 


vrat 


gevreten 


wees 


wezen 


to be 


was 


geweest 



Those which change e 



short into a short both in 
the Past Imperfect and Past Participle : 



breng 
denk 



brengen 
denken 



to bring 
to think 



bragt 
dacht 



gebragt 
gedacht 



6. Those which change e short into ie in the Past Im- 
perfect and into o short, or e or a long, in the Past 
Participle : 



bederf 


bcderven 


to spoil 


bedierf 


bedorven 


hef 


heffen 


to heave 


hief 


geheven 


help 


helpen 


to help 


hielp 


geholpen 


schep 


scheppen 


to create 


schiep 


geschapen 


sterf 


sterven 


to die 


stierf 


gestorven 


werf 


werven 


to enlist 


wierf 


gaworven 


werp 


werp en 


to throw 


wierp 


geworpen 



7. Those which change e short into o short both in the 
Past Imperfect tense and Past Participle : 



berst 


bersten 


to burst 


borst 


geborsten 


delf 


delven 


to dig 


dolf 


gedolven 


geld 


gelden 


to avail 


gold 


gegolden 


kerf 


kerven 


to hack 


korf 


gekorven 


melk 


melken 


to milk 


molk 


gemolken 


scheld 


schelden 


to scold 


schold 


gescholden 


achend 


schenden 


to spoil 


schond 


geschonden 


schenk 


schenken 


to pour 


schonk 


geschonken 


smelt 


smelten 


to melt 


sraolt 


gesmolten 


tref 


treffen 


to hit 


trof 


getroffen 


trek 


trekken 


to draw 


trok 


getrokken 


vecht 


vechteu 


to fight 


vocht 


gevochten 


▼erzwelg 


verzwelgen 


to swallow 


verzwolg 


verzwolgen 



84 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



▼lecht 


vlechten 


to plait 


vlocht 


gevlochten 


zend 


zenden 


to send 


zond 


gezonden 


zwel 


zwellen 


to swell 


zwol 


gezwollen 


zwem 


zwemmen 


to swim 


zwom 


gezwommen 


zwerf 


zwcrven 


to stray 


zworf 


gezworven 



8. Those which change aa and a short into ie in the 
Past Imperfect, and into a long or short in the Past Parti- 
ciple : 



blaas 


blazen 


to blow 


blies 


geblazen 


braad 


braden 


to roast 


bried or 
braadde 


gebraden 


laat 


laten 


to leave 


liet 


gelaten 


raad 


raden 


to councel 


ried 


geraden 


alaap 


slapen 


to sleep 


sliep 


geslapen 


val 


▼alien 


to fall 


viel 


gevallen 


wasch 


wasschen 


to wash 


wiesch 


gcwasschen 


was 


wassen 


to grow 


wies 


gewaasen 



9. Those which change aa into oe in the Past Imper- 
fect , and into a long in the Past Participle : 



draag 


dragen 


to carry 


droeg 


gedragen 


graaf 


graven 


to dig 


groef 


gegraven 


jaag 


jagen 


to hunt 


joeg or 
jaagde 


gejaagd 


laad 


laden 


to lade 


loed or 
laadde 


geladen 


vaar 


varen 


to navigate 


voer 


gevaren 


vraag 


vragen 


to ask 


vroeg or 


gevraagd 



vraagde 

10. Those which change ui into oo in the Past Imper- 
fect , and into o long in the Past Participle : 



buig 


buigen 


to bend 


boog 


gebogen 


druip 


druipen 


to drop 


droop 


gedropen 


duik 


duiken 


to dive 


dook 


gedoken 


fluit 


fluiten 


to whistle 


floot 


gefloten 


kluif 


kluiven 


to gnaw 


kloof 


gekloven 


krui 


kruijen 


to wheel 


krooi 


gekrooijen 


kruip 


kruipen 


to creep 


kroop 


gekropen 


luik 


luiken 


to close 


look 


geloken 


pluis 


pluizen 


to ravel out 


ploos 


geplozen 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



85 



ruik 


lulken 


to smell 


rook 


geroken 


schuil 


schuilen 


to shelter 


school 


gescholen 


schuif 


schuiven 


to push 


school 


geschoven 


sluik 


sluiken 


to smuggle 


slook 


gesloken 


sluip 


sluipen 


to sneak 


sloop 


geslopen 


shut 


sluiten 


to shut 


sloot 


gesloten 


snuit 


snuiten 


to snuff 


snoot 


gesnoten 


snuif 


snuiven 


to take snuff" 


snoof 


gesnoven 


spruit 


spruiten 


to sprout 


sprooi 


gesproten 


spuig 


6puigen 


to spew 


spoog 


gespogen 


spuit 


spuiten 


to spout 


spoot 


gespoten 


stuif 


sluiven 


to raise dust 


stoof 


gestoven 


zuig 


zuigen 


to such 


zoog 


gezogen 


'imp 


zuipen 


to tipple 


zoop 


gezopen 



11. Those which change a short into i short in the Past 
Imperfect , and into a short in the Past Participle : 



hang 
vang 



hangen 
vangen 



to hang 
to catch 



hing 
ving 



gehangen 
gevangen 



12. Those which change ou into ie in the Past Imper- 
fect , and into ou in the Past Participle : 



houd 
houw 



houden 
houwen 



to keep 
to hew 



hield 
hieuw 



gehouden 
gehouwen 



The following are also irregular in their conjugation, but 
do not come under either of the foregoing classifications : 



bid 


bidden 


to pray 


bad, gi^ 


baadt 


gebeden 


bak 


bakken 


to bake 


biek or 


bakte 


gebakken 


doe 


doen 


to do 


deed 




gedaan 


ga 


gaan 


to go 


ging 




gegaan 


heb 


hebben 


to have 


had 




gehad 


kom 


komen 


to come 


kwam , 


gij 


gekomen 








kwaamt 




koop 


koopen 


to buy 


kocht 




gekocht 


no imp. * 


kunnen 


to be able 


kon or 


konde 


gekonnen 


leg 


leggen 


to lay 


leide 




gelegd or 
geleid 


«g 


liggen 


to lie 


lag 




gelegen 



* Ind. Mood, Pres. Tense, ik kan, gij hunt , hij kan, icij kun- 
nen , enz. 



86 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



lagch 


lagch en 


to laugh 


lachte 


gelagchen 


loop 


loopen 


to run 


liep 


geloopen 


no imp. * 


mogen 


(to) may 


mogt 


gemogt 


no imp. 


moeten 


(to) must 


moest 


gemoeten 


pleeg 


plegen 


to tise 


plagt 


gepleegd 


roep 


rocpen 


to call 


riep 


geroepen 


scheer 


scheeren 


to shave 


schoor 


geschoren 


si a 


slaan 


to strike 


sloeg 


gestagen 


sta 


staan 


to stand 


stond 


gestaan 


spuug 


spugen 


to spit 


spoog 


gespogen 


weeg 


wegen 


to weigh 


woog 


gewogen 


weet 


weten 


to know 


wist 


geweten 


werk 


werken 


to work 


wrocht^>r 
werkte 


gewrocht or 
gewerkt 


wreek 


wreken 


to avenge 


wreek te 


gewroken 


word 


worden 


fo be 


wierd 


geworden 


zeg 


zeggen 


to say 


zeide or 
zegde 


gezegd or 
gezeid 


«j 


zijn 


to be 


was 


geweest 


zie 


zien 


to see 


za S> Si) zaagt gezien 


zit 


zitten 


to sit 


zat 


gezeten 


zoek 


zoeken 


to seek 


zocht 


gezocht 


no imp. 


zullen 


(to) shall 


zoude 




zweer 


zweren 


to swear 


zwoer 


gezworen 



In like manner are conjugated the compounds of these 
verbs ; as , verzoeken , to request , ik verzocht , I reques- 
ted ; etc. 

The other moods and tenses as also the numbers and 
persons of the foregoing irregular verbs will be sufficiently 
apparent as they follow the rules and forms of the regu- 
lar verbs in all other particulars , and as conjugated at 



page 74 



6 ; except the auxiliaries which are conjuga- 



ted throughout at page 67 — 73. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERB BIDDEN. 
Gebiedende Wijs, Imperavive Mood. 



bid 



pray 



bidt 



pray 



* In J. Mood, Pres. Tense, ik mag, gij moogt , hi} mag, wij 
mogen , cnz. 



DITCH ETYMOLOGY. 



ST 



Onbepaalde Wijs , 

tegenw. tijd bidden 

verled. tijd gebeden hebben 

torkom. tijd te zullen bidden 

Deelwoorden , 

tegenw. tijd biddende 

verled. tijd gebeden bebbende 

toekom. tijd zullende bidden 

Aantoonende Wijs , 

Tegenwoordige Tijd , 



Infinitive Mood. 



present tense 
post tense 
future tense 



to pray 

to hare prayed 

about to pray 



Participles. 



present tense 
past tense 
future tense 



praying 
having prayed 
about praying 



Indicative Mood. 

Present tense. 



ik bid 


i p™y 


gij bidt 


thou pray est 


hij bidt 


he prays 



wij bidden 
gij bidt 
zij bidden 



toe pray 
you pray 
they pray 



Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , 

ik bad / prayed 

gij baadt thou prayedst 

hij bad he prayed 

Volmaakt Verledene Tijd , 

ik heb gebeden 1 have prayed 
gij bebt gebeden thou hast prayed 
hij beef t gebeden he has prayed 

Zamengesielde Verledene Tijd , 

ik had gebeden / had prayed 

gij hadt gebeden thou hadst prayed gij hadt gebeden 

hij had gebeden he had prayed 

Tcekomende Tijd , 
ik zal bidden I shall pray 
gij zult bidden thou wilt pray 
hij zal bidden he will pray 

Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd 

ik zal gebeden hebben 
gij zult gebeden hebben 
hij zal gebeden hebben 
wij zullen gebeden hebben 
gij zult gebeden hebben 
zij zullen gebeden hebben 



Imperfect Past Tense. 

wij baden we prayed 
gij baadt you prayed 

zij baden they prayed 

Perfect Past Tense. 

wij hebben gebeden we have prayed 
gij hebt gebeden you have prayed 
zij hebben gebeden they haveprayed 

Compound Past Tense. 
wij hadden gebeden we had prayed 
you had prayed 
zij hadden gebeden they hadprayed 

Future Tense. 
wij zullen bidden we shall pray 
gij zult bidden you will pray 

zij zullen bidden they tcill pray 

Compound Future Tense. 
J shall have prayed 
thou wilt have prayed 
he will have prayed 
we shall have prayed 
you will have prayed 
they will have prayed 



88 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Aanvoegende Wijs , 

Tegenwoordige Tyd , 

indien ik bidde if J pray 
indien gij biddet if thou pray 
indien bij bidde if he pray 
Onvolmaakt Verledene Tyd, 

indien ik bade if I prayed 

indien gij badet if thou prayed 
indien bij bade if he prayed 

Volmaakt Verled. Tijd , 

indien ik bebbe gebeden 
indien gij hebbet gebeden 
indien hij hebbe gebeden 
indien wij hebben gebeden 
indien gij hebbet gebeden 
indien zij hebben gebeden 

Zamengest. Verled. Tijd , 

indien ik hadde gebeden 
indien gij haddet gebeden 
indien hij hadde gebeden 
indien wij hadden gebeden 
indien gij haddet gebeden 
indien zij hadden gebeden 

Toekomende Tyd , 
indien ik zoude bidden 
indien gij zoudet bidden 
indien hij zoude bidden 
indien wij zouden bidden 
indien gij zoudet bidden 
indien zij zouden bidden 

Zamengestelde Toekomende Tyd 
indien ik zoude gebeden hebben 
indien gij zoudet gebeden hebben 
indien hij zoude gebeden hebben 
indien wij zouden gebeden hebben 
indien gij zoudet gebeden hebben 
indien zij zouden gebeden hebben 



Subjunctive Mood, 

Present Tense. 

indien wij bidden if we pray 
indien gij biddet if you pray 
indien zij bidden if they pray 

Imperfect Past Tense. 
indien wij baden if toe prayed 
indien gij badet if you prayed 
ind ien zij baden if they prayed 

Perfect Past Tense. 

if 1 have prayed 
if thou have prayed 
if he have prayed 
if we have prayed 
if you have prayed 
if they have prayed 

Compound Past Tense, 
if I had prayed 
if thou had prayed 
if he had prayed 
if we had prayed 
if you had prayed 
if they had prayed 

Future Tense, 
if I should pray 
if thou should pray 
if he should pray 
if we should pray 
if you should pray 
if they should pray 

, Compound Future Tense, 
if I should have prayed 
if thou should have prayed 
if he should have prayed 
if we should have prayed 
if you should have prayed 
if they should have prayed 



VERBS PASSIVE. 
A verb passive expresses a passive state of its nomi- 



DUTCH ETYMpLOGY. 89 

native , and is formed by the auxiliary verb zijn or worden 
and the past participle of the active state or voice ; as , 
het boek is geschreven , the book is written. 

Zijn is used in the passive voice when merely a passive 
state is implied without reference to any collateral state , 
as , bemind zijn , to be loved ; ik ben bemind , I am loved ; 
hij is geleerd , he is learned ; here the passive state ac- 
tually exists and is become fixed and determined. 

Worden is used for the passive voice when not only a 
passive state is implied but also a progression ; as , be- 
mind worden, to become loved; ik word bemind, I become 
loved ; ik word geleerd , I become learned ; here the pas- 
sive state is accompanied with a notion of progression 
in the passive state. The meaning of these auxiliaries 
is shown in these sentences: als ik mijne zes jaren op de 
hoogeschool zal doorgebragt hebben, zdl ik geleerd zijn; when 
I shall have passed my six years at the university I shall 
be learned; als ik vlijlig mijne zes jaren op de hoogeschool 
doorbrenge , zal ik geleerd worden , if I diligently pass my 
six years at the university I shall (be) become learned. 

As every subject from which a transitive action emanates , 
is called active or the active voice , so every subject which 
is under the action of the verb, is called passive or the 
passive voice; thus every active verb can become passive 
and take zijn or worden according as the sense requires. 

CONJUGATION OF THE VERB PASSIVE GELEERD ZIJN. 

GEBIEDENDE WlJS , IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

zij geleerd be learned zijt geleerd be learned 

Onbepaalde Wijs, Infinitive Mood. 

tegenw. tijd geleerd zijn pres. tense to be learned 

verled. tijd geleerd geweest zijn past tense to have been learned 
toekom. tijd geleerd te zuller. zijn future tense about to be learned 

Deelwoorden , Participles. 

tegenw. tijd geleerd zijnde pres. tense being learned 

verled. tijd geleerd geweest zijnde past tense having been learned 
toekom. tijd zullende geleerd zijn future tense about being learned 

Aantoonende Wijs , Indicative Mood. 

Tegenwoordige Tijd, Present tense. 

ik ben geleerd I am learned wij zijn geleerd %oe are learned 

G * 



90 



DUTCH .ETYMOLOGY. 



gij zijt geleerd thou art learned gij zijt geleerd you are learned 
hij is geleerd he is learned zij zijn geleerd they are learned 

Onvolmaakt Verledene Tyd, Imperfect Past Tense. 

ik was geleerd 1 was learned wij waren geleerd we were learned 
gij waart geleerd thou wast learned gij waart geleerd you were learned 
hij was geleerd he was learned zij waren geleerd they were learned 



Volmaakt Verledene Tijd , 
ik ben geleerd geweest 
gij zijt geleerd geweest 
hij is geleerd geweest 
wij zijn geleerd geweest 
gij zijt geleerd geweest 
zij zijn geleerd geweest 

Zamengestelde Verledene Tyd , 

ik was geleerd geweest 
gij waart geleerd geweest 
hij was geleerd geweest 
wij waren geleerd geweest 
gij waart geleerd geweest 
zij waren geleerd geweest 

Toekomende Tijd, 

ik zal geleerd zijn 
gij zult geleerd zijn 
hij zal geleerd zijn 
wij zullen geleerd zijn 
gij zult geleerd zijn 
zij zullen geleerd zijn 

Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd, 

ik zal geleerd geweest zijn 
gij zult geleerd geweest zijn 
hij zal geleerd geweest zijn 
wij zullen geleerd geweest zijn 
gij zult geleerd geweest zijn 
zij zullen geleerd geweest zijn 

Aanvoegende Wijs , 
Tegenwoordige Tyd, 

indien ik geleerd zij 
indien gij geleerd zijt 
indien hij geleerd zij 



Perfect Past Tense. 

I have been learned 
thou hast been learned 
he has been learned 
we have been learned 
you have been learned 
they have been learned 

Compound Past Tense. 

I had been learned 
thou hadst been learned 
he had been learned 
we had been learned 
you had been learned 
they had been learned 

Future Tense. 

I shall be learned 
thou wilt be learned 
he will be learned 
we shall be learned 
you will be learned 
they will be learned 

Compound Future Tense. 
J shall have been learned 
thou wilt have been learned 
he will have been learned 
we shall have been learned 
you will have been learned 
they will have been learned 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present Tense. 

if I be learned 
if thou be learned 
if he be learned 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



91 



indien wij geleerd zijn 
indien gij geleerd zijt 
indien zij geleerd zijn 

Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , 

indien ik geleerd ware 
indien gij geleerd waret 
indien hij geleerd ware 
indien wij geleerd waren 
indien gij geleerd waret 
indien zij geleerd waren 

Volmaakt Verledene Tijd , 

indien ik geleerd geweest zij 
indien gij geleerd geweest zijt 
indien hij geleerd geweest zij 
indien wij geleerd geweest zijn 
indien gij geleerd geweest zijt 
indien zij geleerd geweest zijn 

Zamengest. Verled. Tijd , 

indien ik geleerd geweest ware 
indien gij geleerd geweest waret 
indien hij geleerd geweeat ware 
indien wij geleerd geweest waren 
indien gij geleerd geweest waret 
indien zij geleerd geweest waren 

Toekomende Tijd , 

indien ik zoude geleerd zijn 
indien gij zoudet geleerd zijn ' 
indien hij zoude geleerd zijn 
indien wij zouden geleerd zijn 
indien gij zoudet geleerd zijn 
indien zij zouden geleerd zijn 



if we be learned 
if you be learned 
if they be learned 

Imperfect Past Tense. 

if J were learned 
if thou were learned 
if he were learned 
if we were learned 
if you were learned 
if they were learned 

Perfect Past Tense. 

if I have been learned 
if thou have been learned 
if he have been learned 
if we have been learned 
if you have been learned 
if they have been learned 

Compound Past Tense. 

if J had been learned 
if thou had been learned 
if he had been learned 
if we had been learned 
if you had been learned 
if they had been learned 

Future Tense. 

if I should be learned 
if thou should be learned 
if he should be learned 
if we should be learned 
if you should be learned 
if they should be learned 



Zamengestelde Toekomende Tijd, Compound Future Tense. 



indien ik zoude geleerd geweest zijn 
indien gij zoudet geleerd geweest zijn 
indien hij zoude geleerd geweest zijn 
indien wij zouden geleerd geweest zijn 
indien gij zoudet geleerd geweest zijn 
indien zij zouden geleerd geweest zijn 



if I should have been learned 
if thou should have been learned 
if he should have been learned 
if we should have been learned 
if you should have been learned 
if they should have been learned 



92 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY, 

REFLECTIVE VERBS. 

Verbs reflective, wederkeerige werkwoorden, are those 
which have a personal pronoun after them of the same 
person as the nominative or subject which is thus also 
the object , the subject and object being one and the 
same person; in the infinitive and third persons they 
take always zich. There are about sixty verbs of this 
class; as, 



zich baden to bathe zich ontfermen to have mercy 

zich bedenken to reflect zich schamen to be ashamed 

zich behelpen to be content zich vergissen to be mistaken 
zich beroemen to boast zich verhoovaar- to vaunt 

digen 
zich bevinden to be (somewhere) zich verwaardi- to deign 

gen 
zich bezinnen to conceive zich verzetten 

zich matigen to be moderate zich verzinnen 



zich onthouden to abstain from zich verzweren 



to \be opposed to 
to deceive one's 

self, to err 
to bind one's self 

by oath 



and some others. 

The foregoing verbs reflective retain always this form; 
but also some active verbs often become verbs reflective ; as, 

zich beminnen to love one' s self zich wasschen to wash one's self 

and many others. 

CONJUGATION OF VERBS REFLECTIVE. 

As these verbs are active in their nature they are con- 
jugated through the compound tenses with heblen; thus, 



Gebiedende Wijs, 

beroem u boast 

Onbepaalde Wijs, 



Imperative Mood. 

beroemt u boast 

Infinitive Mood. 



tegenw. tijd zich beroemen pres. tense to boast 

verled. tijd zich beroemd hebben past tense to have boasted 
toekom. tijd zich te zullen beroemen future tense about to boast 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



93 



Deelwoorden , 



Participles. 



tegenw. tijd zich beroemende pre$. tense boasting 

verled. tijd zich beroemd past tense boasted 

toekom. tijd zullendc zich beroemen future tense about boasting 



Aantoonende WlJS , 

Tegenwoordige Tijd , 



ik beroem mij 
gij beroemt u 
hij beroemt zich 



/ boast 
thou boaslest 
he boasts 



Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd 



Indicative Mood. 

Present Tense. 

wij beroemen ons we boast 
gij beroemt u you boast 

zij beroemen zich they boast 

Imperfect Past Tense. 



ik beroemde mij / boasted wij beroemden ons we boasted 

gij beroemdet u thou boastedst gij beroemdet u you boasted 
hij beroemde zich he boasted zij beroemden zich they boasted 

Perfect Past Tense. 

I have boasted 
etc. 



Volmaalit Verledene Tijd, 
ik heb mij beroemd 
enz. 



Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd 

ik had mij beroemd 
enz. 

Toekomende Tijd, 

ik zal mij beroemen 

ens. 

Zamengestelde Toekom. Tijd , 

ik zal mij beroemd hebben 
enz. 

Aanvoegende Wijs , 

Tegenwoordige Tijd, 
indien ik mij beroeme 



Compound Past Tense. 

I had boasted 
etc. 

Future Tense. 

I shall boast 

etc. 

Compound Future Tense. 

I shall have boasted 

etc. 

Surjunctive Mood. 

Present Tense, 
if I boast 
etc. 



Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd, Imperfect Past Tense. 
indien ik mij beroemde if I boasted 

enz. etc. 



Volmaakt Verledene Tijd, 
indien ik mij hebbe beroemd 



Perfect Past Tense. 

if I have boasted 

etc. 



94 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd , Compound Past Tense. 
indien ik mij hadde beroemd if J had boasted 

enz. etc. 

Toekomende Tijd , Future Tense. 

indien ik mij zoude beroemen if I should boast 

enz. etc 

Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd , Compound Past Tense. 

indien ik mij zoude beroemd hebben if 1 should have boasted 
enz. etc. 

In like manner is translated the conjugation of a 
verb reflective when taking a neuter verb in English ; 
as , zich beroemen , to boast ; zich bedenken , to reflect ; 
etc. but when taking a verb active , the personal pro- 
noun is also translated ; as , zich verzweren , to perjure 
one's self ; ik verzweer mij, I perjure myself; gij verzweert u , 
you perjure yourself; hij verzweert zich, he perjures him- 
self ; wij verzweren ons , we perjure ourselves ; gij ver- 
zweert u , you purger yourselves ; zij verzweren zich , they 
perjure themselves ; etc. as also all verbs active when ta- 
king the reflective form ; as , zich bezeeren , to wound 
one's self ; ik bezeer mij , I wound myself ; etc. 

Verbs reflective compounded of a separable preposi- 
tion , as 

zich aankanten to be opposed to 

zich aanmatigen to presume 

zich inbeelden to imagine 

require the preposition after the verb and the pronoun in 
the imperative and in the indicative present and imper- 
fect, but in other tenses the pronoun is placed before 
the preposition and the verb; 

kant u aan be opposed to 

ik kant mij aan J am opposed 

ik kantte mij aan / was opposed to 

ik heb mij aangekant J have been opposed to 

ik zal mij aankanten / shall be opposed to 

VERBS NEUTER. 

Verbs neuter or intransitive , onzydige werkwoorden , are 



DUTCH E 1 YMOLOG Y. S>5 

verbs which express that kind of action or state which 
has no effect upon any thing beyond their nominative, or 
they express merely a state or condition of their nomina- 
tive ; as , Johanna danst , Jane danses ; het paard slaapt , the 
horse sleeps. They are distinguished from verbs active 
by not taking an object after them. 

CONJUGATION OF VERBS NEUTEK. 

Verbs neuter are conjugated like verbs active , but in 
the compound tenses some are conjugated with hebben 
and others with zijn, and some neuters are in one state 
conjugated with the former and in another with the latter. 

Verbs neuter are conjugated with zijn when they ex- 
press more a state of existance or suffering than an action ; 
such are 



blijven 


to stay 


komen 


to come 


sterven 


to die 


beschimmelen 


to mould 


vail en 


to fall 







zij zijn gebleven , they have remained ; hij is gestorven , he 
is dead ; de brood is beschimmeld , the bread is moldy ; 
de bode is gekomen , the messenger is arrived. 

Verbs neuter are conjugated with hebben when an ac- 
tion is implied; as 



grazen 


to graze 


lagcben 


to laugh 


arbeiden 


to work 


weenen 


to cry 


eten 


to eat 


wandelen 


to walk 



hebt gij gespeeld of gearbeid? ik heb gearbeid, have you 
played or worked? I have worked; het kind heeft ge- 
weend, the child has wept. 

Verbs neuter signifying motion are sometimes conjuga- 
ted with zijn and at other times with hebben; of this 
class are 

draven to trot loopen to run 

drentelen to come slowly rijdeu to ride 

duikelen to gambol rollen to roll 

duiken to duck under slenderen to walk slowly 

gaan to go springen to jump 



96 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



klimmen 


to climb 


wandelen 


to walk 


klouteren 


to climb 


zwemmen 


to swim 


vliegen 


to fly 







and many others. 

In the use of these and such like verbs , zijn is used 
when the place where the action occurred is designated; as> 

hij is naar Amsterdam gegaan he is gone to Amsterdam 

ik ben over dien steen gestruikeld / have stumbled over that stone 

wij rijn te vier uren van huis we went from home at four o' clock 

gereden 

gij zijt naar den Haag gewandeld you have walked to the Hague 

When merely the motion is indicated , without allusion 
to the place , the verb hebben is then used ; as , 

ik heb lang gegaan I have walked a long time 

hij heeft ook gestruikeld he has also stumbled 

wij hebben heden gewandeld we have walked to day 

VERBS IMPERSONAL. 

Some neuter verbs expressing certain operations or sta- 
tes of the elements , and taking het for the nominative , 
and being used in the infinitive mood and third person 
singular only, are called Verbs Impersonal, onpersoonlijke 
werkwoorden ; such are 

bliksemen het bliksemt it lightens ijzelen hetijzelt it freezes 

dooijen het dooit it thaws misten het mist it is misty 

donderen het dondert it thunders sneeuwen het sneeuwt it snows 

hagelen het hagelt it hails vriezen het vriest it freezes 

and some others. 

There are also some verbs in the active voice , which are 
only used in the third person singular with het for the 
nominative , and have a personal pronoun for object ; as , 



berouwen 


to regret 


lusten 


to wish 


betreffen 


to concern 


spijten 


to be sorry 


bevreemden 


to surprise 


verdrieten 


to distress 


gelukken 


to succeed 


verwonderen 


to astonish 


jammeren 


to pity 


walgen 


to disgust 



they are thus employed 



DUTCH E I Y M OLOGY. 97 

het betreft mij it concerns me 

het berouwt mij / regret it 

het jamraert u you pity 

het verwondert hem he is astonislwd 

het gelukt oris tee succeed 

het spijt hem he is sorry , or he regrets 

VERBS USED INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. 

Verbs throughout their conjugation can be used Inter- 
rogatively or Negatively , or Negatively Interrogatively. 

Verbs when used Interrogatively take then the nomi- 
native after the verb ; as, leert gij ? do you learn? schrij- 
ven zij ? do they write ? in the compound tenses of verbs 
the nominative is placed between the auxiliary and the 
principal verb ; as , heeft hij gelezen ? has he read ? zullen 
icij gaan ? shall we go ? 

Verbs when used Negatively take the adverb niet, not, 
after them ; as , hij spreekt niet , he does not speak ; het 
regent niet , it does not rain : in the compound tenses of 
verbs , the adverb niet is placed between the auxiliary 
and the principal verb ; as , ik zal niet vertrekken , I shall 
not depart ; zij hebben niet geschreven , they have not 
written. 

When verbs are used Negatively and Interrogatively , 
the nominative is placed after the verb , and the adverb 
niet after the nominative ; as , komt hij niet ? does he not 
come ? vriest het niet ? does it not freeze ? In the com- 
pound tenses the nominative and the adverb are placed 
between the auxiliary and the verb ; as , heeft hij niet 
gesproken ? has he not spoken ? zullen wij niet gaan ? shall 
we not go? 

CONJUGATION OF COMPOUND VERBS. 

In the conjugation of Compound Verbs , the adjunct 
sometimes becomes separated from the simple verb and 
sometimes not. 

Verbs are compounded of 

1. Verb and noun. 

2. Verb and adjective or adverb. 

3. Verb and particle. 

4. Verb and preposition. 



»8 DUTGH ETYMOLOGY. 

1 . Verbs compounded of a noun and another verb, are 
inseparable when the verb and noun , taken seperately , 
do not convey each a partial idea of the compound idea; 
as , beeldhouwen , to sculpture ; brandmerken , to brand ; 
dagvaarden , to summons ; handhaven , to maintain ; kiel- 
halen , to careen ; houwen , to hew ; merken , to mark ; 
warden — haven — halen , to fetch , not conveying the 
most distant idea of the signification of the compound , 
remain inseparable in their conjugation ; as , ik heb ge- 
beeldhouwd , I have carved ; hij is gedagvaard , he is sum- 
monsed ; hij was gebrandmerkt , he was branded ; ik zal 
gekielhaald hebben , I shall have careened. 

The Compounds , brandslichten , to set on fire ; houthakken, 
to hew wood; woordhouden , to keep word; etc. , are se- 
perable , because stichten , to cause ; hakken , to hew ; hou- 
den , to Seep ; convey a distinct idea which leads to a 
comprehension of the compound idea ; and therefore be- 
come disunited in conjugation ; as , brand te stichten , to 
set on fire ; hout te hakken , to hew wood. 

In the formation of the simple tenses of the indicative , 
the noun is placed last ; as , ik sticht brand , I set on 
fire ; ik hakte hout , I hewed wood. In tenses compoun- 
ded of the past participle , the particle ge is placed 
between the noun and the verb ; as , ik heb brand gesticht ; 
ik had hout gehakt ; ik zal woord gehouden hebben. In the 
simple future , the form of the infinitive is retained ; as , 
ik zal brand stichten. 

In the subjunctive mood the simple tenses are formed 
as in other verbs ; as , dot ik brandstichte ; dat ik hout 
hakte ; etc. and the compound tenses of this mood are 
formed like those of the indicative. 

The Imperative is like the present Indicative; as, sticht 
brand; hak hout. 

2. The greater part of verbs compounded of an adjec- 
tive or adverb and a simple verb are separable, and fol- 
low the same forms as those of the noun and verb ; as , 
nadoen , to imitate , ik heb nagedaan , na te doen , etc. ; 
except, liefkozen, to caress; weerlichten, to lighten, which 
are inseparable and follow the form of simple verbs in 
their conjugation; as, hij heeft geliefdkoosd ; het zal geweer- 
licht hebben , etc. 

5. The initial particles of verbs be, er , ge , her, mis , 



DITCH ETYMOLOGY. 99 

ont , ver , never admit ge in the formation of the past 
participle , anil merely serve to modify the meaning of 
the verb ; they are always inseparable, and the verbs are 
conjugated as when simple. 

4. Verbs taking a preposition, as an adjunct, are some- 
times separable and sometimes not. 

Verbs compounded of an inseparable preposition and 
a simple verb are of the same nature as those compoun 
ded of a verb and particle , and , like them , do not admit 
the particle ge in the formation of the past participle ; 
except, ant , and wan; as in antwoorden , to answer; ge- 
antwoord; wanhoopen, to despair, gewanhoopt; wantrouwen, 
to mistrust , gewantrouwd. 

Verbs compounded of a separable preposition are , 
l. those taken in a direct and positive sense , 2. those 
employed also in a figurative sense, but which in their direct 
acceptation are also conjugated sometimes inseparably; 
3. those which are always employed separably in their 
direct and material signification , and are inseparable in 
their figurative acceptations ouly. 

1. Verbs compounded of a separable preposition pre- 
sent a direct idea of its signification; and the verbs, in 
conjugation , follow the same form as verbs compoun- 
ded of a noun and verb when separable. When the pre- 
position is separable , the principal accent of the word 
falls upon it , it being considered as presenting the prin- 
cipal idea. 

2. Verbs taking a preposition as adjunct , the sense of 
which is sometimes direct and sometimes figurative , 
follow both forms of conjugation according as the 
signification and use require. Thus the preposition serves 
to modify the signification of the verb. The following 
are examples : 

Direct Meaning. Indirect Meaning. 

doorboren to bore through doorboren to penetrate 

doorkijken to look through doorkijken to examine 

doorklieven to split in two doorklieven to plough the waves 

doorknagen to knaw through doorknagen to grin with anger 

doorkruipen to creep through doorkruipen to penetrate 

doormengen to mix together doormengen to interfere 

doorschieten to shoot through doorschieten to intermix 



100 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY, 



doorsteken to cut through 
doorzoeken to search through 
misrekenen to misreckon 
mistellen to miscount 
overstijgen to pass over 



doorsteken to pierce 
doorzoeken to examine 
misrekenen to deceive 
mistellen to deceive 
overstijgen to surmount (difficulties) 



The two forms of conjugation assumed by this sort of 
compound verbs may be shown thus 



Direct Meaning. 

ik boor door 
ik boorde door 
ik heb doorgeboord 
ik had doorgeboord 
ik zal doorboren 
ik zal doorgeboord hebben 
enz. 



Indirect Meaning. 

ik doorboor 
ik doorboorde 
ik heb doorboord 
ik had doorboord 
ik zal doorboren 
ik zal doorboord hebben 
etc. 



3. Those verbs having a preposition always separable in 
the direct signification , and inseparable in the indirect or 
figurative sense , are more numerous than the former. 
The literal meaning of the componant parts of the com- 
pound taken separately, as well as the figurative mean- 
ing , is always obvious. In conjugation these verbs 
follow the same form as the preceding. The following 
are specimens of this sort : 



Direct Meaning. 

doorbladeren to turn over leaves 

(of a book) 
doordringen to pierce 
misdoen to do wrongly 
misgrijpen to take the wrong (one) 
omboorden to border round 
omzeilen to upset (a ship) 
ondervinden to find under 
overwegen to weigh again 
overzien to resee 
voorzeggen to dictate 
wederroepen to recall 



Indirect Meaning. 
doorbladeren to peruse (a book) 

doordringen to penetrate 
misdoen to offend against 
misgrijpen to misconceive 
omboorden to encompass 
omzeilen to sail round 
ondervinden to experience 
overwegen to consider 
overzien to overlook 
voorzeggen to predict 
wederroepen to revoke 



and many others. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



• 101 



PRAXIS ON THE USE OF VERBS WITH NOUNS AND 
PRONOUNS. 



Het land is bekoorlijk. 

De velden zijn welriekend. 

Een zachte wind is verkoelend. 

Een spelonk is eenzaam. 

Olifanten zijn sterk. 

De leerling wordt vlijtig. 

Het wordt donker. 

Het spijt mij dat ik het gedaan neb. 

Het is niet noodig dat gij aan hem 

spreekt. 
Hebt gij mijnen broeder gesproken? 
Ja, ik heb hem gesproken. 
Aan wien hoort dat mooi paard? 

Zijn de brieven aangekomen ? 
Neen Mijnheer, zij zijn niet aan- 
gekomen. 
Hoe vaart gij ? 
Ik ben ongesteld. 
Hoe vaart Mevrouw, uwe moeder ? 
Zij is niet wel. 
Ik ben blijde u te zien. 
Neem plaats. 
Ga zitten. 
laat ons gaan 
Waar zulien wij gaan ? 
Laat ons eene wandeling doen. 
Daar is een schip. 
Het schip zeilt. 
Wij zulien naar huis gaan. 
Lees voor mij. 
Lees op. 
Spel dat woord. 
Leg uw boek weg. 
Blader door. 
Ik heb doorgebladerd. 
Wees stil , maak geen geraas. 
Uilen vliegen in den donker. 
Moiled wonen in den grond. 
Ik houd van het lezen. 
Wat zal ik leaen ? 



The country is delightful. 

The fields arc fragrant. 

A soft wind is cooling. 

A cave is solitary. 

Elephants are strong. 

The pupil becomes diligent. 

It grows dark. 

I am sorry that I have done it. 

It is not necessary that you speak 
to him. 

Have you spoken to my brother ? 

Yes , / have spoken to him . 

To whom does that fine horse be- 
long? 

Are the letters arrived? 

No Sir , they are not arrived. 

How do you do? 
1 am indisposed. 
How does your mother do ? 
She is not well. 
I am glad to see you. 
Take a place. 
Sit down. 
Let us go. 

Whither shall we go ? 
Let us take a walk. 
There is a ship. 
The ship sails. 
We will go home. 
Read to me. 
Head out. 
Spell that word. 
Put your book aside. 
Turn over. 
I have turned over. 
Be still , do not make a noise. 
Owls fly in the dark. 
Moles live in the ground. 
I am fond of reading. 
What shall I read? 



io§ 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



Waar is mijn boek ? 

Heeft Antje haar werk af? 

Zij heeft het nog niet afgedaan? 

Wie klopt aan de dour ? 

Van welke dour spreekt gij ? 

Rofp de meid. 

Al de boomen zijn groen. 

De honden knaauwen de beenen 
door. 

Weet gij hoe laat het is ? 

Het is elf uren. 

Wij moeten gaan. 

Waar is uwe zuster? 

Mijne zuster is op reis door Hol- 
land. 

Hebt gij England doorgereisd ? 

Wij hebben Engeland doorreisd , 

en Schotland doorgereisd. 
Wanneer gaat gij weder op reis. 

Wij zijn voornemens morgen we- 
der op reis te gaan. 

Zullen wij zamen reizen ? 

Hebben zij zich gebaden ? 

Zij zullen zich morgen baden. 

Hoor ! wat voor een geraas is dat? 

Het is een inuis die piept. 

Hebt gij de hond hooren blaffen? 

Kom bij mij. 

Het wordt licht , de zon schijnt. 

Is de zon op ? 

Jan , haal mijnen hoed. 

Het is zulke mooi weer, laat ons 
uitgaan. 

Het wordt koudt, het vuur brandt 
niet. 

Het is een koude dag. 

Regent het? 

Het regent, sneeuwt , en hagelt. 

Hoe was het weer gisteren ? 

Het dooide? 

Zal het morgen vriezen ? 



Whore is my book? 

Has Anna done her work ? 

She has not done it yet. 

Who knocks at the door? 

Of which door do you speak ? 

Call the maid-servant. 

All the trees are green. 

The dogs knaw the bones through. 

Do you know how late it is 7 

7/ is eleven o'clock. 

We must go. 

Where is your sister ? 

My sister is on a tour through 

Holland. 
Have you traveled through Eng- 
land? 
We have travelled over England 

and through Scotland, 
When do you set out again on 

your journey? 
We intend to set out again to 

morrow. 
Shall ive travail together? 
Have they bathed? 
They will bathe to morrow. 
Hark ! what noise is that ? 
It is a mouse which squeaks. 
Have you heard the dog hark ? 
Come near me. 

It grows light, the sun shines. 
Js the sun risen ? 
John , fetch my hat. 
It is such fine weather , let us go 

out. 
It grows cold , the fire does not 

burn. 
It is a cold day. 
Does it rain ? 

It rains , snows , and hails. 
How was the weather yesterday ? 
It thaioed. 
IP ill it freeze to morrow ? 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



103 



Ik weet het niet. 

Ik ben koufl. 

Hebt gij honger ? 

Neen , maar ik heb dorst. 

Jaag de kat de kamer uit. 

De kat maauwt. 

Wat een verschrikkelijk geraas. 

Het is een ezel die balkt. 

Doe de dcur toe. 



/ do not know. 

J am cold. 

Are yon hungry ? 

No , but 1 am thirsty. 

Drive the cat out of the room. 

The cat mew*. 

What a dreadful noise! 

It is an ass that brays. 

Put the door to. 



ADVERBS. 

An adverb, bijwoord, serves lo qualify tbe action signi- 
fied by a verb , or it qualifies an adjective or another 
adverb ; as , hij spreeht duidelyk , he speaks distinctly ; het 
is een zeer goed man , it is a very good man ; het is bui- 
tengewoon duidelijk geschreven , it is very distinctly written. 
Tbe adverb is always placed before the adjective which 
it qualifies , but generally after the verb. 

Many words are used sometimes as adjectives and at 
other times as adverbs ; their situation in the sentence , 
renders it obvious to which class they belong. 

Adverbs are the most simple of all those words called 
subordinate or qualifying words ; they are imdeclinable , 
however some of them , like adjectives , can be com- 
pared ; as , 



min 


little 


minder 


less 


minst 


least 


na 


near 


nader 


nearer 


naast 


nearest 


veel 


much 


meer 


more 


meest 


most 


ver 


far 


verder 


farther 


verdste 


farthest 


wel 


well 


betcr 


better 


best 


best 



Adverbs may be divided into the following ten classes 
which comprehend those most in common use : 



BlJWOORDEN VAN TlJD , 

heden , van daag to day 

eergisteren the day before yesterday 

morgen to morrow 

overmorgen the day after to morrow 

eerstdaags shortly 

bij dag by day 



Adverbs of Time. 

bij nacht by night 

des nachts nightly 

altijd always 

nu now 

voor dezen formerly 

onverwachts suddenly 



104 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 

zondags on a sunday voorheen 



\ formerly 



straks presently voormaals 

eertijds formerly voortaan henceforth 

oudtijds anciently 

Bijwoorden van Plaats , Adverbs of Place. 

hier here regts to the right 

daar there links to the left 

ergens somewhere boven above 

nergens nowhere beneden below 

overal 1 regt uit straight along 

, > everywhere , . . ... 

alom J hier been this way 

elders other places ver far 

allerwegen everywhere berwaarts hither 

Bijwoorden van Hoegrootheid , 
Adverbs of Quantity. 

zeer very genoeg enough 

veel many gebeellijk entirely 

te veel too many ongevaar "| 

7 T > about 

oneven odds ongeveer J 

Bijwoorden van Hoedanigheid , 
Adverbs of Quality. 

wel well eerlijk honorably 

ligtelijk easily naauwelijks scarcely 

ongaarne unwillingly . billijk justly 
zachtelijk softly gaarne willingly 

Bijwoorden van Bevestiging , 

Adverbs of Affirmation. 

Ja yes zeker certainly 

waarlijk surely onfeilbaar infallibly 

werkelijk really ongetwijfeld undoubtedly 

altoos always nog tans always 

Bijwoorden van Ontkenning, 

Adverbs of Negation. 

neen no noch nor 

niet not nog met not yet 

geen not niets nothing 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 105 

BlJWOORDEN VAN TWIJFELING , 

Adverbs of Doubt. 

misschien 1 bezwaarlijk difficultly 

welligt J P erha P s twijfelachtig doubtfully 

mogelijk possibly onwaarschijnlijk improbably 

BlJWOORDEN VAN VeRGELIJKING , 

Adverbs of Comparison. 
als of as if naauwelijks scarcely 

zoo als so as zoo veel so much 

eerder rather meer more 

BlJWOORDEN VAN ONDERVRAGING , 

Adverbs of Interrogation. 

waar ? where ? hoeveel ? how much ? 

hoe ? how ? sedert wanneer ? how long 

waarom? why? since? 

hoedanig ? in what manner? 

BlJWOORDEN VAN ORDE , 

Adverbs of Order. 
eerst firstly aanvankelijk 1 

ii / \ fi rstl r 

vervolgens I , vooreerst I 

, > afterwards 

daarna J J ovengens moreover 

Beside those words properly classed as adverbs , there 
are in all languages certain expressions or idioms used 
adverbially ; as , amongst others , 

blootshoofds bear headed regt toe, regt ult straight on 

in der daad in reality nueens ... dan weder now and again 

mijns bedunkens in my opinion al of niet 

then or not 



\ 



des anderen daags the next day al dan niet 

van nu af aan henceforth blootsvoets barefooted 

daags te voren the day previous eens voor al once for all 

ten ontijde inopportunely zoo veel te minder so much the less 

ten einde in order van het oogenblik from the moment 

veel te veel much too much van af thence 

al ware het 1 van dan af ) 

i i . , * r c^en were it . j from that time 

al ware het zelfs J van toen at j 

in het geheel niet not at all van der jeugd af from youth up 

voor alles first of all wat dies meer is I , , ... 

J .» J , . 1 and the like 

mijnentwege I wat des meer is I 

... (as for me 
mijnenthalve J J 



106 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



het is dusdanig mede gelegen I 

het 13 er zoodanig mede gelegen \ U is SO » mch ia th& *■* 

and many others of a like nature. 



PRAXIS ON THE USE OF ADVERBS. 



Wandel langzaam. 

Loop zoo gaauw niet. 

Zwanen zwemmen trotsch. 

Deze jongen schrijft hoe langer 

hoc slechter. 
Jttijne zuster teekent hoe langer 

hoe beter. 
Verledene nacht ging ik vroeg te 

bed. 
Hij wierd dezen morgen plotseling 

wakker. 
Wij zullen stellig morgen ochtend 

vertrekken. 
Hij zal waarschijnlijk de aan- 

staande week terugkomen. 
De leerlingen hebben hunne op- 

etellen bijna af. 
Waar is u\v paard ? 
Waarheen gaat gij ? 
De reizigers zullen in tijds gereed 

zijn. 
Die daglooners werken vlijtig van 

den morgen tot den avond. 
Deze kooplieden zullen trapswijze 

groote schatten verzamelen. 
Die man doet niets dan heen en 

weer loopen. 
Voortaan moet gij uwe lessen vlij- 
tig leeren , want tot dus ver 

hebt gij dezelve verzuimd , en 

somtijds zijt gij lui gewee»t. 
Hij komt hier niet dikwijls maar 

thans meer dan eertijds. 
Eenman die eerlijk handelt houdt 

getrouwelijk zijn woord. 
Vervul stiptelijk uwe beloften. 
Doe altijd uwen pligt. 



Walk slowly. 
Do not go so fast. 
Stoans swim proudly. 
This box writes worse and fcorse. 

My sister draws better and better. 

I went early to bed last night. 

He awoke suddenly this morning. 

We shall certainly leave to mor- 
row morning. 

He will probably return next 
week. 

The pupils have almost finished 
their exdrcises. 

Where is your horse? 

Whither are you going ? 

The travellers will be ready in 
time. 

Those day laborers work dili- 
gently from morning till night. 

These merchants will by degrees 
hoard up great riches. 

That man does nothing but walk 
to and fro. 

In future you must learn your 
lessons diligently , for hitherto 
you have neglected them , and 
sometimes you have been idle. 

He seldom comes here but now 

more than formerly. 
A man who acts honorably keeps 

his word faithfully. 
Fulfill your promises punctually. 
Do always your duty. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 407 

Verzuim nooit te doen hetgene Never neglect to do what falls 

u te beurt valt. to your lot. 

Leef zuinig en wees tevreden met Live economically and be satisfied 

uw lot. with your lot. 

Houd u niet op met beuzeling^n. Never occupy yourself with trifles. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions , voorzetsels , express the relation which 
words bear to one another; they are commonly placed 
after verbs , before nouns and pronouns , influencing or 
modifying their meanings , and always have the accusa- 
tive case after them. 

These words are of great use and importance in lan- 
guage , they mainly characterise its genius and beauty , 
and their number and use may be considered as com- 
mensurate with the advancement of the nation in refine- 
ment and civilization. 

No language , perhaps, abounds more in the number of 
prepositions than the Dutch and English. 

As prepositions modify the relations between words , 
and as their meanings are varied and often arbitrary , 
a knowledge of their use and power is of importance to 
the student, and is to be acquired only by a careful 
study and exercise of the language. 

Prepositions may be divided into two classes : Particles , 
voor- en achterwegsels ; and Prepositions , voorzetsels , these 
latter being Prepositions properly so called. 

PARTICLES. 

Particles are divided into Initial Particles , voorwegsels; 
and Terminational Particles , achtervoegsels. 

INITIAL PARTICLES, 

Initial Particles are placed before verbs, and sometimes 
before nouns and adjectives , to give them an accessory 
meaning , or to qualify their general acceptation ; they 
are be , er , ge , her , mis , on , ont , ver , wan. 

Their use and influence may be exhibited in the follow- 
ing examples 



408 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



BE 

schrijven to write 
denken to think 
graven to dig 
legeren to encamp 
liegen to lie 
gieten to pour 

ER and HER 

langen to hand 
leven to live 
zien to see 
halen to fetch 
denken to think 



beschrijven to describe 
bedenken to reflect 
begraven to inter 
belegeren to besiege 
beliegen to belie 
begieten to pour on 



erlangen to obtain 
herleven to revive 
herzien to review 
herhalen to repeat 
herdenken to reflect 



GE , this Particle is the sign of the past participle , and 
is also placed before some verbs, adverbs, and neuter 
nouns , and gives them additional energy. 



bieden to offer 
leiden to lead 
rust rest 
lach a laugh 



geboden offered 
geleiden to conduct 
gerust reposedly 
gelach a laughter 



MIS has a privative or opposing acceptation : 



achten to esteem 
daad action 
moedig courageous 
handeling treatment 



misachten to neglect 
misdaad crime 
mismoedig low spirited 
mishandeling ill treatment 



ON is equivalent to the English particle un and conveys 
the idea of a negative to the word to which it is joined : 



vruchtbaar fruitful 
matig temperate 
mondig of age 
dankbaar grateful 



onvruchtbaar fruitless 
onmatig intemperate 
onmondig under age 
ondankbaar ungrateful 



ONT marks a privation or a negation : 



dekken to cover 
erven to inherit 
laden to load 
doen to do 



ontdekken to uncover 
onterven to disinherit 
ontladen to discharge 
ontdoen to undo 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



109 



It sometimes gives additonal force to the meaning : 



blooten to skin or shear 
ledigen to empty 
loopen to run 



ontblooten to uncover 
ontledigen to empty 
ontloopen to escape 



VER not only serves to modify the meaning but influ- 
ences it also as to quality ; as , 



arbciden to work 
bidden to pray 
drukken to press 
grijpen to seize 
klagen to complain 
maken to make 
timmeren to carpenter 



verarbeiden to use 
verbidden to intreat 
verdrukken to oppress 
vergrijpen to do wrong or ill 
verklagen to accuse 
vermaken to remake 
vertimmeren to rebuild 



WAN changes the meaning of the word to that of op- 
position : 



bedrijf action 
hoop hope 
geloof belief 
trouw faith 



wanbedrijf crime 
wanhoop despair 
wangeloof incredulity 
wantrouw mistrust 



TERMINATIONS PARTICLES. 



The terminational particles are much more numerous 
than the foregoing ; they are joined to nouns, adjectives , 
and adverbs , arid modify their meanings ; as , 



-aar 


as in 


liegen to lie 


liegenaar a liar 


-achtig 


» 


waar true 


waarachtig truly 


-baar 


» 


dank thank 


dankbaar thankful 


-dom 


» 


rijk rich 


rijkdom riches 


-eel 


p 


rond round 


rond eel roundlet 


-en 


» 


goud gold 


gouden golden 


-er 


» 


bedriegen to deceive 


bedrieger deceiver 


-je 


» 


kind child 


kindje little child 


-»g 


» 


vlijt industry 


vlijtig industrious 


-ij 


» 


brander distiller 


branderij distillery 


-ing 


» 


verkort shorten 


verkorting shortening 


-is 


» 


belijden to confess 


belijdenis confession 


-lei 


» 


aller all 


allerlei all sorts 


-Ujk 


7> 


minne love 


minnelijk lovely 



■110 



D U T C H B TYMOLOG Y. 



■ lijn 


as in oog an eye 


ooglijn o Wftfe eye 


-ling 


» 


ellonde misery 


ellendeling a wretch 


-loos 


» 


geld money 


geldeloos moneyless 


-ooi 


» 


pleit a lawsuit 


pleidooi a lawsuit 


-sch 


9 


groot grrea* 


grootsch ostentatious 


-schap 


» 


blijd g/ad 


blijdschap gladness 


-sel 


9 


borduurwerk embroidery 


borduursel galloon or lace 


-ster 


9 


vrijer a 6ea» 


vrijster a belle 


•voudig 


9 


een one 


eenvoudig single 


■waarts 


» 


daar f/iere 


daarwaarts thither 


wege 


» 


zijnent /us 


zijnentwege respecting hint 



PRINCIPAL PREPOSITIONS. 

The following is a list of the principal prepositions with 
many of their respective meanings and modifications of 
meanings , which will shew their use and importance in 
writing and discourse : 



aan 


to 


aan mij to me 


9 


on 


aan alle kanten on all sides 


9 


against 


het hangt aan de muur it hangs against 
the wall 


» 


of 


aan zijn geluk wanhoopen to despair of his 
hope 


chter 


behind 


achter de kerk behind the church 


k« 


h 


bij geluk by good fortune 



achter 


behind 


k« 


h 


9 


near 


9 


at 


• 9 


for 


lehalve 


except 


door 


by 


9 


through 


in 


in 


9 


into 


met 


with 


9 


by 


na 


after 


naar 


to 


9 


according to 


» 


for 


» 


after 



bij de kerk wonen to live near the church 

bij mijne moeder at my mother's 

bij gebrek aan geld for want of money 

behalve uwen broeder except your brother 

door mij by me 

door de rivier waden to wade through the 

river 
in de kerk in the church 
in misbruik geraken to fall into disuse 
met mij with me 
met list by intrigue 
na dit voorval after this event 
naar Amsterdam . gaan to go to Amsterdam 
naar de berigten according to the intelli- 
gences 
naar iemand zoeken to look for any one 
naar de natuur schilderen to paint after 
nature 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 



!fl 



naar 


to 


om 


for 


9 


round 


» 


in consequence of 


» 


upon 


om aan 


to 


onder 


under 


» 


during 


» 


amongst 


s 


with or between 


op 


on 


» 


upon 


» 


in 


» 


in 


» 


to 


» 


with 


te 


to 


x> 


by 


» 


in 


tegen 


against 


» 


at 


ten 


at 


» 


to 


tot 


to 


» 


to 


» 


M 


tussche 


a between 


uit 


out of 



for 
with 



dit gelijkt naar dat this resembles that 
om Gods wil for God's will 
om de stad wandelen to walk round the eit;/ 
om zijne misdaden in consequence of his 

crimes, 
hij viel hem om den hala he fell upon 

his neck. 
het is om aan den kost to komen it is to 

get a living 
onder het ongeluk bezwijken to sink under 

the misfortune 
onder den maaltijd during the meal 
onder raijne papieren amongst my papers 
dat wordt gezegd onder ons that is said 

bettceen ourselves 
op de tafel on the table 
leg het op de tafel lay it upon the table 
op de straat ontmoeten to meet in the 

street 
op eenen ernstigen toon in an earnest tone 
op een feest noodigen to invite to a feast 
hij is op u misnoegd he is dissatisfied 

with you 
te bed gaan to go to bed 
te water reizen to travel by water 
te midden van de menigte in the midst 

of the crowd 
tegen de muur against the wall 
tegen een gulden het pond at a guilder 

a pound 
ten mijnen huize at my house 
heden ten dage to this day 
van Rotterdam tot Amsterdam from Rot- 
terdam to Amsterdam 
tot op onzen tijd to our time 
het is tot uw best it is for your best 
tusschcn twee gevaren between two dangers 
zij komen uit de kerk they come out of 

the church 
uit ondervinding weten to know by expe- 
rience 
uit hoofde van on account 
uit alle magt achreeuwen to cry with all 

force 



fl2 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



uit from 



van 


from 


» 


"/ 


» 


by 


voor 


before 


« 


for 


» 


to 


» 


of 


zondei 


without 



ik zie uit uwen brief / see from your 

letter 
van Holland komen to come from Holland 
van icmand spreken to speak of any one 
van buiten leeren to learn by heart 
de vijand is voor de deur the enemy is 

before the door 
hij is voor alien gestorven he died for all 
voor iemand wijken to give way to any one 
wacht u voor hem take care of him 
zonder mijne hulp without my help 

PRAXIS ON THE PREPOSITIONS. 



Hij reed door de stad. 

De hoed hangt aan den wand. 

I) it is voor sommige menschen 

nadeelig. 
Het bevel van den koning wordt 

den volk aangekondigd. 
Ik heb het aan de kinderen ge- 

geven. 
Ik woon te Amsterdam. 
Zij komen van Leiden en gaan 

naar Utrecht. 
Hij houdt zijn verblijf te Dord- 
recht. 
Ik stond tusschen hem en haar. 
Hij rijdt te paard. 
Onder de regering van Koning 

"Willem den Tweeden. 
Hij verhief zich geenszins op deze 

onderscheiding. 
Zij wandelden buiten de stad. 
Op zekeren tijd stierf debroeder. 
Met de eerstkomende lente, ging 

het huisgezin naar buiten , om 

daar in de vrije natuur den 

zomer door te brengen. 
Hij heeft het regt , in geval van 

nood, zijn landgoed te ver- 

koopen. 
Het is uit dit boek vertaald. 
Hij bemint iedereen , tot zijne 

vijanden toe. 



He rode through the city. 

The hat hangs against the wall. 

This is injurious to some people. 

The king y s order is anounced to 

the people. 
J have given it to the children. 

1 live at Amsterdam. 

They come from Leiden, and are 

going to Utrecht. 
He resides at Dordrecht. 

1 stood between him and her. 

He rides on horseback. 

Under the governement of king 
William the Second. 

He did not exalt himself on this 
distinction. 

They walked out of the city. 

At a certain time the brother died. 

The first spring , the family went 
into the country to pass the 
summer in the enjoyment of 
the open air. 

He has the right to sell his es- 
tate in case of need. 

It is translated out of this book. 
He loves every one , even his ene- 
mies. 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. lis 

Hij is tot hooglecraar beroepen. He is nominated professor. 
Wij zorgen voor dc toekomst. Wc provide for the future. 

Den hoed voor iemand afnemen. To take off the hat to any one. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

A Conjunction, voegwoord, is a word used to join com- 
plete or elliptical sentences together ; as , hij en ilc moeten 
naar Amsterdam gaan , doch Pieter kan te huis blijven , he 
and I must go to Amsterdam, but Peter can remain at 
home. 

Prepositions and Conjunctions are those connecting bonds 
which serve to express the relation and connection which 
things bear to one another , their mutual influence , de- 
pendences, and coherences, thereby joining sentences to- 
gether into intelligible and significant propositions. They 
are indispensable in rational discourse which is no other 
than the connection of thought , and thus their num- 
ber has increased as mankind has advanced in the art 
of reasoning and reflection. The more any nation is 
improved by the arts and sciences , the more will the 
language abound with connective particles , which are 
necessary in expressing that concatination of things and 
transition of thought which would escape grosser views. 

LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL CONJUNCTIONS. 

en and verder further 

ook also insgelijks likewise 

niet alleen not only eindelijk finally 

raaar ook but also dat is that is 

hoe how dat that 



op dat 1 namelijk namely 

. . (in order that . 

ten einde J ah as 

om dat because daarom therefore 

want for zoo so 

dewijl as derhalve therefore 

maar but doch but 

fchter however gelijk as 

nogtans yet gelijk ala 50 as 

daarentegen on the contrary zoo als so as 

daarenboven moreover schoon though 

hehalve besides alhoewel I 

uitgezonderd except hoewel J 



114 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



indien if 

ten zij | 

} provided that 
ten ware J 

ten eerste firstly 



toch but 

terwijl as 

inmiddels at the same time 

voor als nog as yet 



Some Conjunctions take only an indicative mood after 
them , others , both indicative and subjunctive , and others 
take always a subjunctive. 

It will be observed also that relative pronouns per- 
form the function of conjunctions , and even render the 
connection of sentences closer and more intimate than 
conjunctions do , though the latter convey sufficient dis- 
tinctness of connection in sentences. 

PRAXIS ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 



Verstand en moed treffen hunne 
doelen met altijd. 

Huis en tuin zijn zonder koopers 
gebleven , zij zijn vervallen, en 
reeds in hunne waarde vermin- 
derd. 

Dewijl de zon opgegaan is , zullen 
wij onze arbeiden beginnen. 

Hij is zwak van Iigcbaam maar 
niet van geest. 

Iletzij hij wint of verliest hij is 
altijd dezelfde. 

Ik zal hem beloonen milis hij zijn 
pligt doet. 

Wij hebben noch boeken noch 
pennen , maar wij hebben goede 
zwarte inkt en goed papier. 

Hij deed eene poging om tot de 
keizsrin toegang te krijgen, doch 
dit inislukte hem te eenen male. 

Hij werdt door eenen aanzienlijken 
persoon , onder allerlei voor- 
wendsels, afgewezen, hetzij zijne 
jeugd daartoe de aanleidende 
oorzaak was , of dat deze man 
daartoe zijne bijzondere reden 
had. 



Understanding and courage do not 
ahcays attain their aim. 

House and garden have remained 
without purchasers , they are 
fallen to ruin?, and are already 
diminished in value. 

As the sun is up we will begin 
our labours. 

He is weak in body but not in 
mind. 

Whether he wins or loses he is 
always the same. 

I shall reward him if he do his 
duly. 

We have neither books nor pens , 
but we have good black ink and 
good paper. 

He made an attempt to get admis- 
sion to the Empress , but he 
failed in this altogether. 

He was put off by all sorts of 
pretences by some considerable 
person , either on account of 
his youth , or because this man 
had some private reasons for it 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 
INTERJECTIONS. 



115 



Interjections , iusschenwerpsels , are words expressive of 
some passion or emotion in the mind of the speaker 
or writer. 

Before words were invented and known, men could 
have had no other method of communicating to one an- 
other what they felt than by gesticulation and the inar- 
ticulate cries of passion ; these various modifications of 
utterance , interjections , were therefore probably the first 
elements or beginning of speech. 

The following are the principal ejaculations and words 
of this class made use of by the Dutch 



TUSSCUENWERPSELS 

VAN Verwondering : 


Interjections 
of Admiration. 


o , ach , ei , ha , he ! 


e! 


VAN SMEEKING, 


of Praying. 


ach , ei ! 


ah! 


VAN WENSCHING , 


of Wishing. 


och , ha ! 


ah , ha ! 


VAN BEDREIGING , 


of Threatening. 


wee ! 


We! 


VAN DROEFHEID, 


of Grief. 


ach , och , helaas , wee ! 


ah, alas! 


VAN BLIJDSCHAP , 


of Joy. 


el , hei9a , ha ! 


ay! 


VAN VERSMADING OF A FREER , 


of Disgust or Aversion 


foei , fij , weg ! 


fie , begone ! 


VAN GEROEP, 


of Calling to. 


hem , p»t , holla , he ! 


hem, ho, sohol 


VAN AANMOEDIGTNG , 


of Encouraging. 


sa , ei , hul ! 


ay, come come ! 


VAN STILTE, 


of Silence. 


st, sua, ho, hei, hou , holla, hem! 


hush 9 hut! 


VAN GROETING, 


of Saluting. 


heil , alle heil ! 


hail, all hail\ 



HO 



DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 



PRAXIS ON THE INTERJECTIONS. 



Helaas ! Ik ben ongelukkig gewor- 

den ! Huis en erve zijn weg ; 

vriendenenbloedverwanten heb- 

ben mij verlaten! 
lnderdaad ! Ik sta verwonderd ! 
, godsdienst , , deugd ! hoe 

onverschillig ben ik geweest aan 

uwe bekoorlijkheden ! 
Ah! de verleidingen van het ver- 

maak. 
, hoop ! gij troosteres des levens. 
Helaas? met welke beuzelingen 

heb ik mij bezig gehouden! 
O! de jammeren der ondeugd! 
Houd moed ! 
Gave God ! dat het moge beter 

gaan. 
Wee u ! booswicht ! 
Ah ! Mijn Heer ! mijne moeder is 

dood ! 
Kijk ! De heldere zon komt we- 

der te voorschijn ! Wees ver- 

heugd mijne kinderen. 



Alas ! J am become unfortunate 1 . 
House and land are gone; friends 
and relatives have deserted mel 

Really I J am astonished] 

, religion ! , Virtue ! how 

insensible 1 have been your 

charms ! 
Alas ! the delusions of pleasure. 

Oh ! hope , thou balm of life. 
Alas] with what trifles have J 

been occupied] 
] the miseries of vice ! 
Keep courage ! 
God grant ! that it may go better ! 

JVo to yon ! wicked wretch ! 
Ah] Sir, my mother is dead] 

Behold ] the bright sun appears 
again ! rejoice my children. 



DUTCH SYNTAX 



Dutch Syntax , Hollandsche Woordvoeging , is the art of 
combining words conformable to the genius of the Dutch 
language , in order to express a proposition which is 
called a sentenee. 

SENTENCE. 

A Sentence , eene Zinsnede , is that due combination of 
words expressive of a proposition, or as Aristotle defines it: 
It is a form of speech which has a beginning, a mid- 
dle , and an end within itself, and may be comprehen- 
ded at one view ; as , het leven is kort , life is short ; de 
man slaapt , the man sleeps; dejongen speelt , the boy plays. 

Sentences are divided into three sorts : explicative , in- 
terrogative , and imperative. 

EXPLICATIVE SENTENCE. 

An Explicative Sentence , Verldarende Zinsnede , is that 
in which something is affirmed or denied in a direct 
manner as , de mensch is sterfelijk , man is mortal ; water is 
vloeibaar , water is liquid ; de man slaal het paard , the 
man strikes the horse. 

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCE. 

An Interrogative Sentence , Vragende Zinsnede , is one in 
which something is asked, and has this distinguishing 
characteristic from the foregoing that the subject is pla- 
ced after the verb instead of before it ; as , is de aarde 
rond ? is the earth round ? heeft hij den brief geschreven ? 
has he written the letter? 



418 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

IMPERATIVE SENTENCE. 

An Imperative Sentence , Bevelende Zinmede , is that in 
which an order is given; as, ga weg , go away; kom hier, 
come hither ; wees op uw hoede , be on your guard. 

A Sentence may be either simple or compound. 

A SIMPLE SENTENCE, 

A Simple Sentence , Eenvoudige Zinsnede , consists of 
three essential materials : a subject or nominative , an 
attribute , and an object. 

The subject or nominative , het voorwerp , is the thing 
spoken of: the attribute, het gezegde, or geiveigerde, which 
expresses a state or action of the nominative : and the 
object, het onderwerp, which is the thing affected by the 
attribute when an action is expressed ; as , ik sla den 
hond , I strike the dog ; here I is the subject of which 
something is said, strikes is the attribute which expresses 
the state of its subject, and dog is the object on 
which the attribute acts. Those sentences which have 
a neuter verb for attribute do not take an object; as, 
de wereld is mrgankelijk , the world is transitory ; in this 
sentence world is the subject of which something is 
said as to its state , is , is the attribute which expresses 
the state or existence of the subject ; and transitory is 
an adjunct which merely serves to qualify the noun 
world; in such expressions the attribute goes back to 
the nominative instead of passing on to another thing 
or object ; so in the assertion , Johanna slaapt , or is sla- 
pend , Jane sleeps , or is sleeping ; here the state sleep 
applies to Jane , the subject or nominative , and the sen- 
tence is complete. 

COMPOUND SENTENCE. 

A Compound Sentence, Zamengestelde Zinsnede, is a sen- 
tence which contains two or more propositions which 
are connected sometiaies by a conjunction and sometimes 
not ; as , naarstigheid is lofwaardig en verschaft genoegen , 
diligence is praiseworthy and yields satisfaction. A com- 
pound sentence can be extended at pleasure provided it 
does not extend so far as to weary the attention of the 
hearer or reader ; as , 



DUTCH SYNTA X. 119 

Vrede vanen wapperen, vrede leu- Peace banners are /lying , peace 

zen schitteren; geen gevveer of garlands glisten; neither fire 

schietgevaarte braakt meer ver- arms nor artillery spread rfe- 

wocsting en dood ; de musket- vastation and death ; muskets 

ten knallen vrede ! de kanonnen announce peace ! the artillery 

bulderen vrede ! roars peace ! 
J. van der Palm. 

this sentence consists , first , of two simple sentences , then 
of a compound sentence , and then of four simple sen- 
tences , thus in all , of seven sentences or members united. 
Syntax is divided into two parts : Concord and Gover- 
nement. 

CONCORD. 

Concord , Verbinding , is the agreement which one word 
has with another with respect to gender , number , and 
person ; and consists of four principal rules : 

1. The Article with the noun. 

2. The Adjective with the noun. 

3. The Pronoun with the noun. 

4. The Verb with its nominative. 

De mensch is een redelijk schepsel, toch hij dwaalt dikwijls , 
man is a rational being, but he often errs; here the 
verb is agrees with man in number and person; and the 
pronoun he agrees with man in gender and number. 

GOVERNMENT. 

Government , Beheersching , is the power which one 
word has over another with respect to mood , tense , 
and case , and consists principally of the following rules : 

1. Adjectives with respect to case. 

2. Verbs with respect to case , and infinitive mood. 

3. Prepositions with respect to case. 

Indien hij daar zij , zullen wij hem straffen , if he be 
there we will punish him ; here , if governs the subjunc- 
tive mood ; punish governs Mm in the objective. 

The principles of Syntax are for the most part the 
same in all languages ; however every language has its 
peculiarities in construction arising out of the genius of 
the people with which the genius of the language will 
ever be found to carry with it a remarkable conformity. 



120 DUTCHSYNTAX. 

In the construction and union of sentences there must 
be a due arrangement of the succession of ideas so as 
readily to catch the conception of the hearer or reader , 
and at the same time , the words , whether principal or 
qualifying , must be so chosen , that their succession of 
sounds falls harmoniously on the ear. 

The following are the principal rules of Dutch Syntax, 
and such as are essential to be followed in order to pro- 
duce the right disposition of words in a sentence. 

RULE I. 

Concord of Article and Noun. 

The article must agree with the noun in gender, num- 
ber , and case ; as , 

Een zeeoverste heeft , boven eenen A naval commander has, above 

veldheer, het uiterste belang in that of a military commander, 

de hoedanigheden van zijn volk. the greatest interest in the 

S. Stijl. quality of his people. 

RULE II. 

Omission of the Article. 

No article is used before nouns taken in a general 
signification ; as , 

Verlichting, deugd, en tijd,zijn Enlightening, virtue, and time, 

denkbeelden welke elkander in are ideas which follow each 

orde opvolgen. other in succession and order. 
A. F. Simons. 

Except when a preposition goes before ; as , 

Voorlezingen over de verlichting, Lectures on enlightening, virtue, 
de deugd , en den tijd. and time. 

A. F. Simons. 

No article is used before nouns when used addressingly; as, 

Moet ik u noemen , Vorst der Must I mention you , Prince of 

Nederlandsche bardsn! Nooit Netherlands bards ! Von del r 

volprezen V o n d e 1. never fully praised. 
J. M. Schraet 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 121 

Much nice attention and judgment are required in the due 
use and omission of the article in sentences , as it de- 
pends more on good taste than on any fixed rules ; as 
in the following sentence , 

Op den maalstroom van gedurige To the whirlpool of constant re- 

oomentelingen en oorlogen volgf tolutions and tears , follows a 

een ataat van evenwigt en state of equalization and peace. 

vrede. Overvloed neerat de Abundance taken the place of 

plaats in van behoefte , gerust- want , quietude that of con- 

heid die van gedurige vreeze. stant fear. 
D. J. v. Lenn ep. 

Proper names of persons , countries , and cities , do not 
take an article; as, Hugo de Groot; Kornelis de Witt; 
Holland; Frankrijk; Amsterdam; Londen. 

Except when proper names are taken in a general 
sense, as an individual for a species, by way of emi- 
nence; as, de Be Ruiters en de Tromps der laatste eeuw , 
the De Ruiters and the Tromps of the last century; 
Leiden, liet Athene van Holland, Leiden, the Athens of Holland. 

Except also the names of certain countries and cities 
which take an article before them; as, de Nedcrlanden, 
the Netherlands; de Haag, the Hague; de Vereenigde Sta- 
ten, the United States; de Havana, the Havana; de Ca- 
raccas, the Caraccas. 

The definite article is used befor proper names when 
spoken of by way of pre-eminence ; as, de schriften van 
eenen Erasmus, of van eenen Hugo de Groot, the writings 
of an Erasmus or a Grotius. 

Proper names preceded by an adjective, require the 
definite article; as, het handel drijvende Holland, the tra- 
ding country of Holland; de oorlogzuchtige Napoleon, the 
war aspiring Napoleon. 

RULE III. 

Ellipses of the Article. 

To avoid disagreeable repetitions in speaking or writing 
and to express our ideas in few words, an ellipsis or 
omission of some word or words is frequently admitted; 
but this must not be done if the sentence should thereby 
be obscured, or its force weakened. 



122 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

When two or more nouns of the same gender and 
number follow each other in a sentence, the article is pla- 
ced before the first and omitted by ellipsis before the 
following ones; as, 

Do aarde , hemel , en maan lijn The earth , heaven, and moon are 
Goda werken. God's works. 

except when particular emphasis is required ; as , 

De lof, en de heerlijkheid , en Praise , and majesty, and wis- 

dewijsheid, en de dankzegging , dom , and thanksgiving, and 

en de eere , en de kracht, en honor, and power, and strength, 

de sterkte , zij onzen Gode in be unto our God unto eternity . 
alle eeuwigheid. 

B. A. B orger. 

Except also when the nouns are of different genders 
and numbers; as, de man, de vrouw, en het kind, the 
man, woman, and child; however when several plural 
nouns follow each other, though of different genders, 
the definite article de need not be repeated ; as , de 
mannen, paarden, en ossen, the men, horses, and oxen. 

In writing and speaking abreviations of the articles are 
sometimes used , however this must not be done too freely, 
it being a violation of polite style , except by a poetical 
licence, or to avoid a monotony or breach of harmony; 
as , een' for eenen , 't for het , '& for des , and <F for de or 
den. 

RULE IV. 

Two or more Nouns for one object. 

Two or more nouns referring to the same object are 
placed in the same number, case , and gender. The same 
person , place , or thing sometimes takes two or more na- 
mes in which case one name indicates the identical ob- 
ject or is the proper name , whilst the other name or 
names refer to the genus to which the thing belongs ; as , 
de stad Amsterdam, the city of Amsterdam; koning Willem, 
king William; de rivier de Maas, the river Maze; de 
Raadpensionaris de Witt , Councellor de Witt ; God , schep- 
per der wereld, God, creator of the world; from the fore- 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 125 

going examples it will be seen, that stad, honing, rivier, 
raadpensionaris , and schepper , are used for the genus; 
whilst, Amsterdam, Maas , de Witt, and God, are proper 



Onze doorziglige staathuishoud- Our penetrating political ccono- 
kundigelandgenootdeGraaf van mist and fellow countryman T 
Ho o gen dorp. tho Count of lloogcndoru. 

This rule is also applicable to the proper names of 
men ; as , Oldenbarneveld ; Martin Luther; Vict Ilein; how- 
ever , so as it is with many nations , so it is with the Dutch, 
that the preposition van or de is often placed before the 
family name ; as , Joost van Vondel ; Hugo de Groot ; and 
sometimes two prepositions are met with in the same 
situation ; as , Johannes van der Palm , such like , being 
family names of French origin which have assumed the 
addition of the Dutch preposition van. 

RULE V. 

Two or more Nouns for different objects. 

When two nouns come together , referring to different 
objects , then one of them is put in the possessive case; as, 

Na te sporcn , of daarin een be- To examine if there be therein 

wijs voor de eenheid Gods ge- a proof of the unity of God. 

legen zij. 

R. Koopman. 

Bij de droomen eens koortsigem. By the dreams of one, ill of a fever. 

Al wat de geschiedenis vermeldt All that history relates of tho 
van Farao 'sen Sanacheribs overthrow of P hara oh , Se- 
en Xerxes nederlagen. nacherib, and Xerxes. 
W. A. Oekerse. 

When three nouns referring to different objects come 
together the last is also put in the possessive case ; as , 

De onbestendigheid der goede- The instability of wordly posses- 
ren der wereld. sions. 

But for the sake of harmony the prepositian van is 
sometimes used with one of the two latter ; as , 

De vruchten van de bcoefening The fruits of the study of the 
der ^etenschappen. sciences. 



124 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

When two nouns referring to the same object are 
followed by a third noun referring to another object 
the latter only of the two first is put in the possessive 
case ; as , 

Koning Will em a regering. King William's reign. 

When one noun is used in reference to another the 
latter must be of the same gender ; as , 

De ondervinding is de beste leer- Experience is the best [female) 

meesteres (iiiet leermeester). teacher {not male teacher) 

De haat is de vader (niet de moe- Hate is the father {not the mother) 

der) der verachting , en de lief- of contempt , and love is the 

de is de dochter (niet de zoon) daughter {not the son) of es- 

der achting. teem. 

When two or more compounds come together and the 
latter noun of each compound is the same for all , it 
can be omitted by ellipsis to all but the last and a 
hyphen substituted ; as , drult- en spelfouten , errors of the 
press and spelling ; haas- boter- en eijerkooper , dealer in 
cheese, butter, and eggs. 

RULE VI. 

Concord of Adjective and Noun. 

The adjective must agree with the noun to which it 
belongs in gender , number , and case , and is generally 
placed before it ; as , 

Eene wijsbegeerte die den mensch A philosophy rohich lends to man 
reine zede leent. pure morals. 

R. Feith. 

When an adjective is used with a proper name as a mark 
of peculiar distinction , the adjective is placed after the 
noun and takes the article de before it ; as , Willem de 
tweede ; Karel de Groote. 

In compound words the adjective agrees with the last 
word of the compound ; as , de kimstige vuurwerkmaker , 
the skilful clock-maker ; except , de oude-vrouwenhuis , the 
old women's-house ; Hoogduitsche-taalmeester , German lan- 
guage-master ; dolle-hondsbeet t bite of a mad dog ; Franschc- 
broodbakker , a French-bread baker ; and some others. 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 125 

RULE VII. 

Adjective and Noun with ZIJX or WORDEX. 

When the verbs zijn , wezen , or worden, to be, come 
between the noun and adjective or after the adjective , 
the adjective remains then indeclinable and is placed 
after the noun ; as , 

En zoo deze zijne kennis gebrek- And if his knowledge is defective, 

kig is , moet dan ook zijn ge- then his conduct must be de- 

drag gebrekkig zijn. fectite also. 
W. Bilderdijk. 

RULE VIII. 

Adjectives governing certain Cases. 
Some adjectives govern certain cases ; as , 

gedachtig mindful waardig worthy 

kundig skillful zat satiated 

raoede tired bewust eonscious 

magtig mighty scbuldig endehled 

and their compounds , as onschuldig , innocent ; onkundig, 
ingorant; etc. which in more elevated style govern the 
possessive case , but in more familiar style govern the 
objective , and take the preposition van after them ; as , 

Zij zijn de3 verbonds gedachtig, or \ 

„.. .. , , .. . . , , f They are mindful of the pledge. 

Zij zyn gedachtig van net verbond. J J J r a 

Zij is der zake kundig , or 1 

,... . , j. j , } She is skillful in the affair. 

Zy is kundig van de zaak. J j jj 

Other adjectives govern the dative case ; as , 

aangenaam agreeable veroorloofd permitted 

ondergeschikt subservient gehoorzaam obedient 

gctrouw faithful onderworpen subjected 

toegedaan devoted verkleefd attached 
gevaarlijk dangerous 

and their compounds ; as , 

Zij is gehoorraam zijner ouders. She is ebedient to her parents. 
Der goede zaak uit pligt getrouw. Faithful to the good cause by duty. 



126 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

Adjectives expressive of measure , weight , age , or value , 
govern the objective case; as, 

een pond zwaar a pound heavy eenen duim breed an inch broad. 
eene el Iang an ell long eenen gulden waard a guilder value 

RULE IX. 

Adjectives requiring certain Prepositions. 

Certain adjectives will have certain prepositions after 
them; as, 

aangenaam zijn voor ielsof iemand, to be agreeable to any thing or 

any body. 
afkeerig zijn van iets, to have a dislike to any thing. 

bang zijn voor iemand of iets, to be afraid of any body or any 

thing. 
begaafd zijn met iets , to be endowed with any thing. 

beloond zijn voor iets , to be rewarded for any thing. 

bemorst zijn met iets , to be soiled with any thing. 

begunstigd zijn door iemand of to be favored by any one or any 

met iets , thing. 

begeerig zijn naar iets of iemand. to be desirous about any thing. 
bekwaam zijn tot of voor iets. to be capable of any thing. 

bezig zijn met iets of iemand , to be busy about any thing or 

with any body. 
bevreesd zijn voor iemand of iets , to be afraid of any body or any 

thing. 
boos zijn over iets of op iemand , to be angry at any thing or with 

any one. 
doof zijn voor iets , to be deaf to any thing. 

gebelgd zijn op iemand en over iets. to be angry with any one and 

about any thing. 
geneigd zijn tot iets of iemand. to be inclined to any thing or 

any body. 
genegen zijn tot iets , to be disposed to any thing. 

ingenomen zijn met iets of iemand, to be taken with any thing or 

any body. 
misnoegd zijn op of over iemand , to be dissatisfied with any one 

or any thing. 
nadeelig zijn voor , aan iemand to be prejudicial to any one or 

of iets « any thing. 

onschuldig zijn van iets, to he innocent of anr m „ gm 



DUTCH S Y N TAX. 427 

ongcvoclig lijn voor ieta , to be insensible to any thing. 

onvermonid zijn in icts , to be indefatigable in any thing. 

opletlend zijn op iets of iemand , to be attentive to any thing or 

any body. 
ongeruat zijn over ieta of iemand , to be uneasy about any body or 

any thing. 
ontroerd zijn over iets of iemand, to be disturbed about any thing 

or any body. 
tevreden zijn met iets en over to be satisfied witK any thing and 

iemand , any body. 

trotsch zijn op iets of iemand , to be proud of any thing or any 

body. 
vatbaar zijn voor iets, to be suitable for any thing. 

vertoornd zijn op iemand en over to be angry with any one and 

iets , at any thing. 

versierd zijn met iets, to be ornamented with any thing. 

verslingerd zijn op iets , to be swung upon any thing. 

verliefd zijn op iemand , to be in lore with any one. 

verlegen zijn met iets of iemand , to be inconvenienced with any 

thing or any body. 
verwonderd zijn over iets of ie- to be astonished at any thing or 

mand , any body. 

verontwaardigd zijn over iets of to be disdained at any thing or 

iemand , any body. 

verrijkt zijn met iets , to be enriched with any thing. 

voorzien zijn met iets , to be provided with any thing. 

RULE X. 

Ellipsis of the Adjective. 

When an adjective qualifies two or more nouns it is 
only placed before the first , being omitted by ellipsis to 
the following ; as , 

De bloeijende boomen, heesters , The flourishing trees, shrubs , 
gewassen , en planten. bushes , and plants. 

Except when the noun differs in number or gender , in 
which case the adjective must be repeated ; as , 

De bevallige aard , en het bevallig The agreeable disposition and 
karakter der inwoners. character of the inhabitants. 

Certain words compounded of an adjective and noun 



128 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

joined by the conjunction en and followed by one or more 
nouns may drop the latter word of the first compound 
and substitute a hyphen ; as , 

Een goud- en vlschrijk rivier. A river , rich in gold and fish. 

Een uit- en inwendig gevoel. An external and internal sensa- 

tion. 

RULL XI. 

Ellipsis of the Noun. 

When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun , 
the noun may be omitted by ellipsis to all but the last, 

Leermeester in de Hollandsche , Teacher of the Dutch , English , 

Engelsche , en de Hoogduitsche and German language. 
taal. 

De Engelsche en de Hollandsche The English and the Dutch Ian- 

taal hebbcnhet mannelijk, vrou- guage have the masculine, fe- 

welijk, en onzijdig geslacht; maar minine , and the neuter gender; 

de Fransche taal heeft slechts but the French language has 

het mannelijk en het vrouwelijk only the masculine and thefe- 

geslacht. minine gender. 

De Arabische , Engelsche, en Rus- The Arabian, English, and Rus- 

sische paarden zijn meest ge- sian horses are most vallued. 
waardeerd. 

The Adjective is often used alone; as, 

Ik gaf het den behoeftigen. / gave it to the necessitous* 

RULE XII 

The Comparative degree requires DAN. 
The comparative of adjectives requires dan after it ; as , 

Hij is sterker dan een paard. He is stronger than a horse. 

Uw broeder neemt den Iandbouw Your brother takes agriculture 

meer ter harte dan uw vader. more to heart than your father. 

Dit laken is minder duurzaam dan This cloth is less durable than 

men zoude gelooven. one would suppose. 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 129 

RULE XIII. 

The Superlative degree and the genitive , or VAN , UIT , 
or ONDER. 

The Superlative degree requires the genitive case , or 
one of the prepositions van , uit , onder , after it ; as , 

De rijkste inwoner der etad. The richest inhabitant of the city. 

De aanzienlijkste uit de buurt. The^ most respectable from the 

neighborhood. 
Gij spraakt den geleerdaten onder You spoke to the most learned of 
de tijdgenooten. the contemporaries. 

RULE XIV. 

Cardinal Numbers require the Noun in the Plural. 

The Cardinal numbers, used adjectively, require the noun 
in the plural ; as , 

Zes maanden geleden. Six months ago. 

Ik heb drie huizen en vier tuinen. J have three houses and four gar- 
dens. 

The nouns , jaar , dag , uur , are generally omitted , by 
an ellipsis , after numeral adjectives ; as , 

Op den noodlottigen tienden (dag) On the fatal tenth of August, J584. 

van oogslmaand, (het jaar) 1584. 

Hij kwam na half drie (uren). He came Rafter half past two. 

Rotterdam den lOden (dag van) Rotterdam August JO, J84J. 

Angustus, (het jaar) 1841. 

When a cardinal number is followed by een or half, 
the noun is omitted after the cardinal number , by el- 
lipsis , and is placed after een or half in the singular ; as , 

Drie honderd en een dukaat. Three hundred and one ducats. 

Twee duizend en een jaar. Two thousand and one years. 

Zes en een half uur gaana. Six leagues and a half. 

Vierde half gulden. Three guilders and a half. 

Er is achthalf el linncn. Seven ells and a half of Une7t. 

RULE XV. 

AL followed by DE. 

Al , all , remains undeclined when followed by the de- 
finite article de , het , or a possessive pronoun ; as , 



430 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

Al den arbeid verrigten. To do all the labor. 

Hebt gij al uwe raoeite vergeefs Have you done your utmost in 
gedaan ? vain f 

RULE XVI. 

Concord of Personal Pronouns. 

Personal pronouns agree in gender and number with 
the objects to which they relate ; as , 

Zoo veel vermag een groot man. So much is in the power of a 

Zoo werkt hij aan het geluk der- great man. So he labors for 

genen die de plaats van hem the happiness of those who will 

zullen vervullen. occupy his place. 
J. P. van Capelle. 

— De treurenden , van welke men — The weeping , of whom one 

zeggen kan ; zij zullen vertroost may say ; they shall be consoled. 
worden. 

J. van Teutem. 

When the noun comes after the personal pronoun , 
serving as a further explanation , the noun must agree 
with the pronoun in gender , number , and person ; as , 

Wij , afstammelingen van hetzelfde Wo , descendants of the same peo- 

volk. pie. I 

Ik gaf hem , mijnen vriend , dit / gave him , my friend, this pre- 

geschenk. sent. 

When two or more substantives of the same gender 
and number come together in the same phrase , the 
personal pronoun is employed for the first and the others 
are designated by the pronouns dezelve , deze , die. Care 
must be taken to avoid ambiguity, and that the pronoun 
may not refer indifferently to either the one or the other 
of the preceding nouns : 

Toen Jacob met zijnen broeder When Jacob would go out with 

zoude uitgaan viel hij van de his brother he fell from the 

trappen. steps. 

De nieuwspapieren verhalea dat The newspapers relate that the 

de Perzianen eene overwinning Persians have gained a victory 

op de Turken behaald hebben, over the Turks, and that in 

en dat zij in den laatsten veld- the last battle they lost their 

slag hunnen veldheer hebben general. 
verloren. 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 131 

It is here sufficiently obvious that viel hij refers to Ja- 
cob, and zij ', in the second example, to Perzianen. If the 
brother must have been spoken of, then it should have 
been viel dezelve or deze ; if the Turks , dat deze or de- 
zelve. 

When the noun is of another gender than that of the 
person referred to , the pronoun takes the gender of the 
person and not of the noun ; as , 

De schildwacht was verkleumd van The sentinel was benumbed with 

koude , hij was te beklagen. cold , he was to be pitied. 

Het wijf lulsterde naar niets, zij The woman listened to nothing, 

was onverbiddelijk. she was inexorable. 

RULE XVII. 

Ellipsis of the Personal Pronoun. 

When a conjunction couples parts of a sentence , the 
pronoun and also the verb are often omitted by ellipsis; as, 

Wij vertrekken en zullen u niet We depart and shall not forget 

vergeten. you. 

Ik verliet hem en beloofde dra I left hint and promised soon to 

weder te komen. return. 

Wij gaven hem en haar goeden We gave him and her good conn 

raad. set. 

RULE XVIII. 

The Indefinites , MEN , IEMAND , NIEMAND. 

The Indefinite Personal Pronouns men, iemand, niemand, 
are only employed for persons , iemand is often accom- 
panied by zeker to give it additional precision. Nie- 
mang , signifying exclusion , is often followed by dan ; as, 

Men segl. They say , or people say , or it 

is said, or we say. 

Kent gij er iemand? Do you know any one of them? 

Ik ken er niemand dan uwe zus- J know nono of them but your 

ter. sister. 

Het was zeker iemand , zoo groot It was a certain somebody ac 

als mijn vac! r. big as my father. 



132 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

The Indefinite Personal Pronoun het can but seldom 
refer to persons ; when met with in the nominative case 
and accompanied by a personal pronoun in the dative, 
it precedes the latter; as, 

Ik ben het die u roept. // is J who calls you. 

Het doet mij leed. 1 am sorry for it. 

Het kan hun ten tweeden male It can happen to them a second 
overkomen. time. 

The Indefinite Personal Pronoun er has a less definite 
signification than daar which is preferred when greater 
precission is required ; as , 

Er is papier. There is paper. 

Daar is papier. See, there is some paper. 

Er bestaat geen gevaar meer. There is no more clanger. 

Daar bestaat geen gevaar meer. There is there no more danger. 

RULE XIX. 

The Reflective Pronoun ZICH. 

The Personal Pronoun Reflective zich always follows the 
verb to which it belongs ; and when the verb is a com- 
pound it then follows the first *part of the compound; as, 

Zij bevonden zich te Dordrecht. They were at Dort. 
Gij hebt u vergist. You were deceived. 

Zij matigden zich veel aan. They arrogated much to them- 

selves. 

The Pronoun zich is often followed by zelf or alleen 
when used with verbs active employed reflectively , and 
marks additional force ; as , 

Hij prijst enkel zich zelven. He praises himself only. 

Gij hebt u zelven benadeeld. You have injured yourself. 

Zijne oudste zuster beminde zich His eldest sister loved herself 

zelve alleen. alone. 

Hij onthield zich dat genot. He denied himself that enjoyment. 

RULE XX. 

Concord of Possessive Pronouns. 
Possessive Pronouns in the first and second person agree 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 133 

in gender , number , and case with the noun which they 
precede and not with the person who possesses ; as , 
mijn vader , mijnc moeder, uw kind, but in the third per- 
son they express as well the gender of the possessor as 
of the thing possessed ; as , zijn brooder , haar brocder • 
zijne zuster , hare zuster. 

The possessive pronoun is placed before the noun to 
which it belongs, and agrees with it in gender, number, 
and case ; as , 

Hij verloor zijne eer en zijnen rang, lie lost his honor and his rank. 

Hunne eigendommen en bun huis- Their estates and their furniture. 

raad. 

Deze vrouw vreest haren man , This woman fears her husband , 

maar verwaarloost hare dochter but neglects her daughter and 

en bekommert zich weinig om concerns herself little about her 

haar huishouden. housekeeping. 

When the possessive pronoun is preceded by different 
nouns, in order to avoid an ambiguity the pronoun des- 
zelfs is used and refers always to the latter noun ; as , 

Mijn vriend schrijft aan zijnen My friend writes to his brother 

broeder dat hij deszelfs zoon that he has spoken to his son. 
heeft gesprokeu. 

Ale id schrijft aan hare moeder Ad el aid writes to her mother 

dat haar huis verkocht is. that her house is sold. 

Zijnen Zoon would imply the son of the friend; and 
deszelfs huis would imply the mother's house. 

When inanimate objects are spoken of, the demonstra- 
tive pronoun deszelfs or derzelver is often used for the 
possessive ; as , 

Wij bezochten eene landstreek We visited a country deserted by 

door derzelver bewonera verla- its inhahitants. 

ten. 

Het schip en deszelfs manschap , The ship and its crew , no one 

niemanduitgezonderd, gingen te excepted, went down. 

grond, 

RULE XXI. 

Ellipsis of Possessive Pronouns. 
When two or more nouns require the same possessive 



134 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

pronoun it is only placed before the first, being omitted 
by ellipsis to the following if they do not differ in 
gender and thus require a separate pronoun ; as , 

Hare liefde en trouw, Her love and fidelity, 

Zijne vrouw en dochter. His wife and daughter. 

Zijne moei en zijn oom. His aunt and uncle. 

Ik heb haren vader en haremoe- I have seen her father and mother. 
der gezien. 

RULE XXII. 

Concord of Demonstrative Pronouns. 

The Demonstrative Pronouns must agree with the nouns 
to which they belong in gender, number, and case; as, 

Dit opstel is moeijelijk maar dat This exercise is difficult but that 
is gemakkelijk. is cosy. 

The Demonstrative Pronouns die , dat , are used to ex- 
press an object in a vague manner and without indica- 
ting if the object is near or at a distance; deze, dit are 
used when the object is near; gene or gindsch, refers to 
an object at a greater distance; as, 

Deze is net waarvan ik spreek , // is this of which I speak, but 

doch die heeft het stukje uit- that it is who has done it , 

gevoerd en gene is onachtzaam and that yonder has been in- 

geweest. attentive. 

Mijn vader verrnaakt zich met deze, My father amuses himself with 
mijn oom met die, en mijn vriend these books, my uncle with 
met gene boeken. those, and my friend with those 

yonder. 

The Demonstrative Pronouns deze and gene are used 
also in reference to two nouns going before, then deze re- 
fers to the latter and gene to the former ; as , 

Arie en Rijk zijn yan een ver- Adrian and Richard behave 

schillend gedrag ; deze (R ij k) differently ; the latter does every 

doet alles wat zijne ouders hem thing that his parents order 

bevelen ; gene (Arie) weigert him; the other refuses to obey 

hen te gehoorzamen. them. 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 



is:> 



Leg u op de lijdzaamheid en on- 
schuld toe j want gene (lijd- 
zaamheid) lecrt u de weder- 
waardigheden verdragen , doze 
(onschuld) dezelve overwinnen. 



Apply yourself to forbearance and 
innocency; for the former teach- 
es you to endure adversities , 
the latter to conquer them. 



RULE XXIII. 

The Pronouns DEGENE, DIEGENE, and HETGENE. 

The Demonstrative Pronouns degene and diegene must be 
followed by a relative pronoun ; as , 



Degene die mij vriendschap bewijst. 

Wij apraken van degenen die zich 
zoo dapper gedragen hebben. 

Diegenen welke zich daaraan heb- 
ben vergrepen. 



He who shows me friendship. 

We spoke of those wlw have con- 
ducted themselves so bravely. 

Those who have rendered them- 
selves therein culpable. 



The Demonstrative hetgeen or hetgene , what or that 
which, including a relative within itself, does not take a 
relative after it ; as , 



Hetgeen hij ondervonden heeft weet What he has experienced no man 
geen mensch. knows. 

RULE XXIV. 

The Pronouns DEZELVE and DEZE. 

The Pronouns dezelve and deze are often used indiscri- 
minately , and to avoid their too frequent repetition. The 
pronouns hij and zij , and particularly ze , are frequently 
substituted for them ; as , 



Alva hoorende de tijding , kon 

hij ze in het eerst naauwelijka 

gelooven. 
De zaak leed geen uitstel, ze werd 

dadelijk verhandeld. 
Hij vond de papieren en bragt ze 

aan den eigenaar. 
Hier deed de vreugde de oogen 

schitteren , daar benevelde zij 

ze met den zoeten daauw der 

natuur. 



Alva hearing the news could at 
first scarcely believe it. 

The affair allowed no delay , it 

mas instantly treated upon. 
He found the papers and brought 

them to the proprietor. 
Here joy made the eyes sparkle 

there it obscured them with the 

9weet de\o of nature. 



136 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

RULE XXV. 
The Pronouns DUSDANIG and ZOODANIG. 

Dusdanig and zoodanig may serve as answers to the in- 
terrogative hoedanig; as, 

Hoedanig is die fcaak afgeloopen? How has that affair passed over? 

Zoodanig als ik het gewenscht so as I wished. 

heb. 

Hoedanig zult gij u hierin gedra- Bow will you conduct yourself 

gen? Dusdanig als overeenkom- herein ? so as is consistent with 

stig is met de goede trouw. good faith* 

RULE XXVI. 

Concord of the Relative and Antecedent. 

The Relative Pronoun agrees with the noun to which 
it relates , called its antecedent , in gender and number ; 
and when no nominative comes between it and the verb 
it is then the nominative to the verb; as, 

En waar zult gij eenen mensch And where will you find a per- 

vinden die voor uwe maat- son who is so justly formed 

schappij zoo juist gevormd i9 for your society as the true 

als de ware Christus? Christ? 
R. van Ommeren. 

But when, a nominative comes between the relative and 
the verb, the case of the relative is governed by the word 
which follows; as, 

De vorst wiens dood wij betreu- The prince whose death we la- 

ren. ment. 

De man wien wij zoo veel te dan- The man whom toe have so much 

ken hebben. to thank. 

When the relative has two or more antecedents it 
must then be put in the plural number; as, 

De tuin en het hufc welke ver- The house and garden which will 
kocht zullen worden. be sold. 

Sometimes a sentence is the antecedent to a relative, 
it is then put in the neuter gender; as, 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 



Zij sprakcn over deugd en gods- 

vrucht , dat mij zeer aangenaam 

was. 
De kinderen leerden hunae lessen, 

dat hun meester met genoegen 

rag. 



They conversed on virtue and 
piety , which was very agree- 
able to me. 

The children learned their les- 
sons , which their master saw 
with pleasure. 



If the phrase consists of several members the norm 
which is the principal subject can be repeated in order to 
give additional precision; as, 



De algemeene en bijzondere ge- 
schiedenis moet zooveel moge- 
lijk wijsgeerig behandsld wor- 
den , en op een oordeelkundig 
onderzoek van de drijfveeren 
dor daden en gabeurtenissen steu- 
nen ; welke geschiedenis dan 
inzonderheid nuttige wenken en 
lessen bevat. 



Universal and particular history 
must be treated upon as philo- 
sophically as possible, and be 
based on a critical examination 
of the motives of actions and 
events- which history then in- 
deed contains useful hints and 
lessons. 



RULE XXVII. 



The Relatives DIE, WELKE, WIE and WAT. 



The Relatives die and welke are used indiscriminately 
in familiar style, though sometimes the former is pre- 
ferred to the latter. Die is moreover preferred in fa- 
miliar style after a noun signifying a person , or after a 
personal pronoun if the relative should be in the nomi- 
native ; but when in any other case than the nominative , 
then the relative wie for the singular , and wie or welke 
for the plural is preferred ; as , 

Ik die steeds uw vriend ben ge- / who have always been your 

weest. friend. 

Zij die uw broeders ongeluk zoe- They who seek your brother's 

ken. misfortune. 

Ik, wien gij zoo vele weten- /, whom you have to thank 

schappelijke kundigheden te for so much scientific know- 

danken hebt. ledge. 

When the relative wie is used for persons, and is fol- 
lowed by a noun, it is then put in the possessive case; as, 

9 * 



158 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 



De Heer K. wiens dood nog on- 
zeker is, heeft eene fraaije 
boekerij, 

Zij , wier bedoelingen de zuiverste 
zijn. 

De armen , wier weldoener hij is. 

De man , wiens vriend gij zijt. 



Mr. K. whose death is yet un- 
certain , has a fine library. 

They , whose aims are the pu- 
rest. 
The poor, whose benefactor he is. 
The man , whose friend you are. 



When die , wie , wat , and welke, are used as relatives for 
animals and inanimate objects , and the pronouns must 
take a preposition before them, then the pronoun die is 
replaced by daar , wie by wat , welke by waar , and daar 
and waar are followed by the preposition ; as , 



De gronden waarmede gij hem 

denkt te overtuigen. 
De pen waarvan gij spreekt. 
Het onderwerp waarover de hoog- 

leeraar handelt. 
De gebeurtenisssn daar wij van 

gehoord hebben. 
De brief waar aan zij haar behoud 

te danken heeft. 
Het misdrijf waarvoor hij gevan- 

gen zit. 



The proofs ly which you think 
to convince him. 

The" pen of which you speak. 

The subject on which the profes- 
sor treats. 

The events of which we have 
heard. 

The letter to which she is indebt- 
ed for her safelty. 

The crime for which he is confi - 
ned. 



Sometimes the preposition is placed at a distance from 
daar or waar ; as , 

Sprekende oogen , waar een vurig Expressive eyes in which a warm 
en opregt karakter in door- and an upright character ylan- 
straalde. ced. 

The relatives die and wie are often met with in the 
same phrase. When they are both in the nominative , 
and die is placed after wie, the former can generally be 
omitted; when die is not in the nominative it must then 
be always expressed; as, 



Wie erkentelijkheid van anderen 

begeert, moet zelfs dankbaar 

zijn. 
Wie u vriendschap bewijst, dien 

moet gij geene vijandschap be- 

toonen. 



He who expects gratitude from 
others , must be grateful him- 
self. 

He who shows you friendship , 
to him you must not show 
enmity. 



\) I T C H S Y N T A X 



\7rt 



RULE XXVIII. 



Interrogalives and Answers. 



An agreement in gender , number, and case , must ex- 
ist between Interrogative Pronouns and answers; as, 



Welke dieren zijn de nuttigste ? 

de schapen. 
Wiens huis is dit ? des buurmana. 

Van wien hebt gij deze pennen ? 

van onzen meester. 
Uit wier schriften hebt gij deze 

daadzaken getrokken ? uit de 

uwe en de' zijne. 



Which animals are the mos fate- 
ful ? the shee/j. 

yVhose house is this? the neigh- 
bor's. 

From whom hate you these pens? 
from our master. 

Out of whose writings have you 
extracted these facts? out of 
yours and his. 



RULE XXIX. 
The Interrogates WAT and WELKE. 

The Interrogates wat and welke, preceded by a pre- 
position , are often replaced by waar , and the substantive 
which ought to follow welke 
omitted , and the preposition follows waar ; as , 



and might follow wat is 



Waarmede heeft hij hem vereerd ? Wherewith has he honored him ? 

Waarvan heeft uwe zuster tijding Of what has your sister received 

gekregen ? news. 

Waaraan i8 uw broeder gestorven ? Of what did your brother die? 

Waarover heeft men in de les Of what did they treat in the 

gehandeld ? lesson? 

Waarmede werd uw oudoom be- Of what was your giand-unclc 

tigt ? accused ? 

The Interrogative Pronouns are variously used ; as , 
wie , wat are followed by verbs ; as , wie spreekt ? who 
speaks? wat zegt gij? what do you say? welke is followed 
by a substantive; as, welke pen verkiest gij ? which pen 
do you choose? wat is also followed by a substantive 
and a preposition ; as , wat paard is dot ? what horse is 
that? wat wor een landsman zijt gij? what countryman are 
you? Hoedanig is followed by the substantive or the 
verb ; as , Hoedanig mensck is dot ? what sort of man is 
that? 



140 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

RULE XXX. 

Concord of Verb and Nominative. 

A verb must agree with its nominative in number and 
person ; as , 

De uitgestrektheid der kwaadspre- The extent of calumny shows 

kendheid vertoont zichnogdui- itself more plainly, if we take 

delijker , als wij in aanmerking into consideration, that it can 

nemen , dat zij zoo wel lijdelijk be committed as well passively 

als dadelijk gepleegd kan wor- as actively. 
den. J. H. v. d. Palm. 

Sometimes an infinitive or part of a sentence is the 
nominative to a verb ; as , 

God lief te hebben en te gehoor- To love and obey God is the 

zamen is 's menschen pligt. duty of man. 

Het roer van staat te besturen is To direct the rudder of state is 

eene moeijelijke kunst. a difficult art. 

Het haten van hen die ons wel- To hate those who do us good 

doen is afschuwelijk. is dreadful. 

When two or more nominatives precede the verb , 
the verb is then put in the plural ; as , 

Heldenmoed en menscblievendheid Bravery and humanity wereuni- 
waren in hem vereenigd. ted in him. 

The Imperative mood alone is used without the no- 
minative being expressed ; as , 

Zie den worstelaar. See the wrestler. 

Aanschouw de hooge bergtoppen ! Behold the mountain tops. 

Except when a noun precedes the verb , then a pro- 
noun can come after or before it ; as , 

Gij , Almagtige Vader ! help mij Thou , Almighty father ! help me 

uit mijn lijden ! out of my sufferings I 

Gij moeder ! heb medelijden met Thou mother ! have pity on thy 

uwe dochter. daughter. 

Gaat heen , gij onbezonnen! Go hence, ye foolish ! 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 1U 

RULE XXXI. 

Ellipsis of the Nominative. 

When two or more verbs require the same nomina- 
tive , it is expressed to the first only and omitted by 
ellipsis to the following; as, 

Gij leest en vertaalt wel. You read and translate well. 

Hij had beloofd te koraen maar He had promised to come but did 
kwam niet. not come. 

The nominative may sometimes be repeated for the 
sake of energy ; as , 

Gij leest en gij vertaalt wel. You read and you translate well. 

Also when the members of the phrase would place 
the nominative at too great a distance from the verb; as, 

Hij had beloofd hedcn namiddag He had promised to come to me 

bij mij te komen , maar hij is this afternoon , but he is not 

niet gekomen. come. 

Gij verstaat vrij wel en echter You understand very well and yet 

vertaalt gij slecht. you translate badly. 

Whenever the nominative comes after the verb it must 
then be repeated ; as , 

Handelt gij tegen mijne waarschu- Jf you act against my teaming 

wing en stort gij dus u zelven and plunge yourself into mis- 

in het ongeluk , zoo moet gij fortune, then you must no! rely 

op mijne hulp niet rekenen. on my assistance. 

RULE XXXII. 

First Second or Third Person as Nominative. 

If the first person is joined with the second or third 
person as subjects of the phrase , the verb agrees with 
the first person , but this person is repeated in the plu- 
ral ; as , 

Gij en ik , wij kennen deze ge- You and J know this event. 

gebeurtenis. 

Mijne moeder en ik , wij gaan wan- My mother and J are going to 

delen. take a walk. 



142 DUfCH SYNTAX. 

Wij , mijne moeder, mijne zuster, My mother, sister, and i, 
en ik , gaan uit. going out. 



are 



When a second and third person come together as the 
nominative to the same verb , the verb agrees with the 
second person which must be placed next the verb ; as , 

Uw broeder en gij gaat te Leiden. Yourl brother and you are going 

uwe studien eindigen. to Leiden to finish your studies. 

Uwe zusters en gij hebt wel ge- You and your sisters have done 

daan. ice//. 

a 

RULE XXXIII. 

Singular and Plural as Nominative. 

When a Singular and Plural nominative belong to the 
same verb, the verb agrees with the plural and it is 
placed next the] verb ; as , 

Hij en zijne neven komen van de lie and his nephews come from 
hoogeschool te Utrecht. the university of Utrecht. 

RULE XXXIV. 

Tense. 

There must be a due observance of time through 

the whole phrase , and the same tense must be used 

throughout; and in questions and answers the same uni- 
formity must be observed ; as , 

Hij gaf mij alles wat hij had. He gave me all that he had. 

Wij zullen u schrijven zc-odrawij We shall write to yon as soon 

iets zullen weten. os we shall know any thing. 

Van wien spreekt gij ? van uwen Of whom do you speak ? of your 

oom. unclc - 

Welk onderwerp heeft hij bezon- What subject has he sung? he 

tren ? Hij heeft de verdiensten has sung the merits ofR u be n s. 
vaii Rubens bezongen. 

The present tense is sometimes used for the future; as, 

Ik kc-m aanstonds weder. / return immediately. 

Ik vertrek morgen naar buiten. / go into the country to-morrow. 



DUTCH S V N T A X. 



u: 



Sometimes the Present is substituted for the Past Im- 
perfect ; as , 



Ik word uit mijne boekenkamer 
geroepen; ik kom beneden, zie 
een' onbekenden die geen woord 
«preekt , ik beschouw hem met 
aandacht en vlieg in zijne ar- 
men : het is mijn brooder, dieri 
ik in geen twaalf jaren gezien 
had. 



/ am called out of my library; 
I come below, see a strange per- 
son who does not speak a word, 
J look at him attentively and 
fly into his arms: it is my 
brother whom J had not seen 
for twelve years. 



It often happens that the sense of the phrase does not 
admit of its being continued in the same tense. The 
agreement of time then requires that a phrase beginning 
in the Indicative Present should be continued by a Per- 
fect Past , or a Future , or Compound Future of the In- 
dicative ; if the phrase begins with an Imperfect Past , 
it should be continued by a Compound Past , as also by 
a Future and a Compound Future of the Subjunctive; as, 



Ik kwam nadat gij vertrokken 

waart. 
Hij kwam terug , toen hij den 

brief weg gebragt had. 
Gij gaat , maar zult morgen niet 

terug zijn. 
Karel vertrok gisteren en zal 

weldra terug komen. 
Wij hebben het gedaan , doch 

zullen het niet weder doen. 
Mijn broeder bezocht hem ; maar 

zonder u t zoude hij hem niet 

bezocht hebben. 



1 came after you had departed. 

He came back , when he had ta- 
ken the letter. 

You go, but you will not be back 
to morroxo. 

Charles departed yesterday and 
will soon return. 

We hate done it but tot 11 not do 
it again. 

My brother visited him; but with- 
out you he would not have vi- 
sited him. 



The Imperfect Tense of the Subjunctive is often used 
instead of the Compound Future ; as , 

Ik wilde hem wel helpen, for I would indeed help him. 

Ik zoude hem wel willen helpen. J should be willing to help him. 

Hij koride reeds hier zijn , for He could already be here. 

Hij zoude reeds hier kunnen zijn. He should already be here. 

Also the Imperfect Tense of the Indicative is used for 
the Compound ; as , 



144 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

Ik hadde hem raaar laten vertrek- / ought to have let him go. 

ken , for 
Ik zoude hem maar hebben laten / should have let him go. 

vertrekken. 

RULE XXXV. 

Mood. 

An action represented in a positive manner is put in 
the Indicative mood, and the same mood must be obser- 
ved throughout the phrase if the sense does not require 
otherwise ; as , 

Zij gelooven u niet , en zullen They do not believe you , and 
mij ook niet gelooven. they tvill not believe me alio. 

An uncertain , doubtful / or conditional action is ex- 
pressed in the Subjunctive ; as also a wish , a desire , or 
an apprehension. The presence of the subjunctive mood 
depends also on the presence of a conjunction expressed 
or understood , and a futurity ; as , 

Uw grijs haar herinnere u dat het That your gray hairs may re- 
tijd is wijs te worden. mind you that it is time to be 

wise. 

Al kwame hij nu , zou het reeds // he came now , it would be 
te laat zijn. already too late. 

RULE XXXVI. 

Infinitive Mood. 

The Infinitive is often used substantively , in which case 
it can be preceded by an article , or an adverb , or an- 
other substantive ; as , 

Weldoen is pligt. To do good is a duty. 

Ik ben vermoeid van het wandelen. I am tired with walking. 

Spelen moet tot verpozing dienen. Play must serve for recreation. 

Veel werken. To work much. 

Te gulzig drenken. To drink greedily. 

Voedsel gebruiken. To take food. 

The Future Infinitive is little used , the Indicative Fu- 
ture conveying the same sense ; as , 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 



145 



Hi) heeft beloofd morgcn te zul- 
len komen , or, hij heeft be- 
loofd dat hij morgen komen zal. 



Ho has promised to come to mor- 
row , or, he has promised that 
he will come to morrow. 



RULE XXXVII. 



Participles. 

Present and Past Participles are used as adjectives to 
qualify nouns , and agree with the noun in gender , num- 
ber and case ; and they convey an active as well as a 
passive sense ; as , 



De ploegende landman. 

De moeder , hare kinderen bemin- 

nende en voor hen zorgende. 
Het winstgevende bedrijf. 
De ingebeelde ziekte. 
De geteekende landschap. 
De opgehoopte schatten. 



The ploughing peasant. 

The mother, loving her children 

and caring for them. 
The profitable occupation. 
The imaginary" disease. 
The drawn landscape. 
The heaped up riches. 



Besides the present and past participle there is the 
Future Participle , which however is seldom used, the 
future indicative conveying the same sense ; as , 



Ik begeer niet dat gij het doet , 
zullende ik zelf het doen (of, 
daar ik het zelf zal doen). 

Wij vertrekken te twaalf uur , 
zullende bij uwen broeder het 
middagmaal houden (of daar wij 
zullen enz). 

Hij gaat een uur vroeger naar 
school , zullende daar zijne taak 
afwerken , (of daar hij daar zijne 
taak zal afwerken). 



About do it myself, I do not 
wish you to do it, {or, as I 
myself shall do it). 

About to dine toith your brother, 
\or as we shall dine with. your 
brother) we depart at twelve o' 
clock. 

lie goes an hour earlier to school, 
as he will finish his task there. 



RULE XXXVIII 

Two Verbs. 



One verb governs another that follows it, or depends 
upon it , in the infinitive mood which takes te before it ; as , 



Ik kom u 1e spreken. 



lam come to speak to you. 
10 



146 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

Hij is daar altijd te vinden. He is always to be found there. 

Zij verlangen te vertrekken. They desire to depart. 

On3 staat veel te duchten. We have much to fear. 

Wij wenschen u te zien. We wish to sec you. 

Sometimes the Preposition om or zonder is placed before 
the infinitive to qualify the relation of the two verbs; as, 

Ik ga om hem gezelschap te hou- / am going te keep him company 

den. (or for the purpose of keeping 

him company). 

De mensch eet omteleven, maar Man eats to live [and by no means 

leeft geenszins om te eten. lives to eat. 

Hij vertrok zonder zich te ont- He departed without excusing him- 

schuldigcn. self. 

When the Perfect Past Infinitive is used, the participle 
is placed first and the preposition te between it and the 
infinitive; as, 

Ik wenschte hem gezien te hebben. / wished to have seen him. 
Gij gelooft van uwe kinderen be- You believe to have been beloved 
mind te zijn geweest. by your children. 

However zonder is sometimes employed without te; as, 

Hij is zonder vreezen. He is without fear. 

Sometimes verbs do not take te in the infinitive , as 
when followed by the auxiliary zullen ; as also the 
verbs 

durven to dare doen to do kunnen to be able laten lo let 

mogen may leeren to learn voelen to feel blijven to remain 

komen to come will en to will heeten to call helpen to help 

hooren to hear noemen to name zien to see gaan to go 
vinden to find. 

as , 

Ik zal gaan. I shall go. 

Hij durft niet uitgaan. He dares not go out. 

Hij kan niet vallen. He cannot fall. 

Wij moeten hem betalen. We must pay him. 

Hij doet mij lezen. He makes me read. 

Zij wilden die beginselen niet toe- They will not agree to those prin- 

stemmen. ciples. 

Ik mag u niet gelooven. / may not believe you. 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 147 

Sometimes a Participle is employed in the place of an 
infinitive ; as , 

Ik zag den brief geschreven. I saw the letter written. 

Wij vonden hem sukkelende. We found him suffering. 

Ik hoor imen broeder zingende. / hear your brother singing. 

When the Auxiliaries zjjn and hebben are used to imply 
possibility , necessity , or obligation , the verb which fol- 
lows in the infinitive takes te before it ; as , 

Er was een huis te zien. There was a home to be seen. 

Hij had eene groote som te betalen. He had a great sum to nay. 
Ik heb te leeren. 1 have to learn. 

The verb komen must be followed by te when it is 
employed in the sense of happening or taking place ; as , 

Zijne zuster kwain te overlijden. Eis sister happened to die. 

Mijn broeder kwam te sneuvelen. My brother happened to be killed. 

The verbs staan , zitten , and liggen , in the present and 
imperfect tense, require te to the infinitive following 
them ; but these verbs in the perfect and compound past 
tense do not take te in the infinitive after them ; as , 

Ik sta of stond te wachten. / stand or stood waiting. 

Hij ligt of lag te slapen. Ee lies or lay sleeping. 

Ik zit of zat te schrijven. / sit or sat writing. 

Hij heeft of had liggen slapen. Ee has or had lain sleeping. 

Ik heb of had zitten schrijven. i have or had sat writing. 

RULE XXXIX. 

The Verbs ZIJN and WORDEN. 

The verbs zijn and worden , to be ; and also blijven 
to remain , heeten to call , schijnen to seem , take the 
same case after them as before them ; as , 

Hij is een man. Ee is a man. 

Jan wordt een rijk koopman. John becomes a rich merchant. 

Hij bhjft de opregte en openhar- Ee remains the upright and open- 
tige vricnd mijner jeugd. hearted friend of my youth. 



148 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

Jacob heet de eerlijkste koop- Jacob is called the most honest 

man van de stad. merchant of the city*. 

Deze knechfc schijnt erft eerlijk This servant seems to he an 

roan te zijn. honest man. 

When the verb is followed by als the same case is 
used after it as before ; as , 

Jan van Schaffel a a* gedroeg John van Schaffelaar beha- 
zich als een dapper en zeldzaam red as a singularly amiable man . 
liefderijk raensch. 

Uw broeder leeft als een kluize- Your brother lives as a hermit. 
naar. 

RULE XL. 

Verb and Possessive Case. 

In solemn style some verbs take the possessive case 
after them ; as , 

Gedenk onzer. Think of us. 

Ontferm u onzer. Have merry upon us. 

Erbarm u mijner. Pity me. 

Ik schaam mij uwer. / am ashamed of you. 

However in familiar style it is better to employ a pre- 
position after such verbs , and say or write gedenk aan 
ons ; ontferm u over ons ; erbarm u over mij ; ik schaam mij 
over w. 

RULE XLT. 

Verb and Dative Case. 

When a noun comes after a verb as an indirect ob- 
ject to the verb , it is put in the dative case; and also 
when a verb active is used in the passive voice ; as , 

Hij leerde den jongeling de aard- He taught the boy geography. 

rijkskunde. 

De aard rijkskunde werd den jon- Geography was taught the boy 

geling door hem geleerd. by him. 

The verbs beloven , to promise ; berigten , to inform ; 
betalen , to pay ; borgen ; to lend ; brengen , to bring ; gc- 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 149 

ven , to give ; klagen , to complain ; schenken , to serve ; 
etc. and many verbs compounded of the preposition aan , 
af , toe, or ont , have the dative case after them; as, 

Hij heeft zijnen broeder die goe- He has sent his brother those 

deren toegezonden. goods. 

Ik gaf hem zijn boek. J gate him his booh. 

Breng den meester deze papieren. Take these papers to the master. 
Uw vader klaagde mij zijnen nood. Your father complained to me of 

his want. 

Many verbs neuter require also a dative case after 
them ; as behoorcn , to belong to ; bevallen , to please ; 
blijven , to remain ; gelijken , to resemble ; etc. and also 
some impersonals as blijken , to seem ; berouwen , to re- 
pent ; etc. as , 

De waarheid ia mij gisteren ge- The truth appeared to me ycs- 

bleken. terday. 

Deze kneeht bevalt aan mijne on- This servant pleases my parents. 

ders. 

IHjj ge8cbiedt een groot onregt. A great injustice is done me. 

RULE XLH. 

Verb Active and Objective Case. 
Verbs active require an objective case after them ; as , 

De arbeid veraterkt den menach. Labor strengthens man. 

Two or more objectives can follow the same verb, the 
verb being used only to the first and omitted to the fol- 
lowing by ellipsis ; as , 

Zij onderwcea haren zoon en hare She taught her son and daughter. 

dochter. 
Deze zaak betreft mij en u. This affair concerns me and you. 

RULE XLIII. 

Verb Neuter and Preposition. 
Verbs neuter require a preposition after them ; as , 



150 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 



Ik lach over u. 
Ik denk van hem. 



/ laugh at you. 
J think of him. 



However some neuter verbs take an objective case after 
them when they signify an action passing to an object 
or as passing back to the object ; as , 

Eenen geweldigen dood sterven. To die a violent death. 

Den langsten weg gaan. To go the longest road. 

Men vischt barnsteen in de oost- They fish for amber in the Baltic, 

zee. 

Deze ieerling gaat steeds zijnen This pupil always continues his 

gang. course. 

Determination of length , breadth , height , weight , va- 
lue , and price of things expressed after neuter verbs, are 
in the objective case ; as , 



Hi| keerde den derden dag na zijn 

vertrek terug. 
Hij is eenen duim gegroeid. 
Het kost eenen gulden. 



He returned on the third day 

after his departure. 
He has grown an inch. 
It costs a guilder. 



RULE XLIV. 

Position of Subject or Nominative , Verb or Attribute , and 
Object, in Sentences. 

In positive sentences the subject or nominative is pla- 
ced at the commencement of the phrase and the verb 
immediately after it, and the object at the end of the 
phrase ; as , 



De kinderen volgen het voorbeeld 

hunner ouders. 
De overheid waakt voor het wel- 

zijn der burgers. 



The children follow the example 

of their parents. 
The magistrate watches over the 

welfare of the citizens. 



In compound tenses of verbs the auxiliary immediately 
follows the subject of the phrase and the past participle 
or infinitive is placed at the end ; as , 

Ikzoudeuwenbroedergaarnedaar- l[should willingly have spoken 

over gesproken hebben. with your brother on that affair. 

Mijn vader zal morgen ochtend met My father will depart to morrow 

de postkoets naar Utrecht ver- with the mail-coach to Utrecht. 
trekken. 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 151 

Ik heb zoowel den man als de / hate seen the man as well ax 
vrouw gezien. the woman. 

If the verb is compounded of a separable preposition , 
the preposition is placed at the end of the phrase in 
the imperative , and in the present or the imperfect 
of the indicative ; but in the same tenses of the subjunc- 
tive mood the preposition precedes the verb ; and in the 
remainder tenses of both moods, the preposition precedes 
the past participle or infinitive of the verb ; as , 

Rijd snel de stad door. Rido rapidly through the city. 

Hij haalde vele schrijvers in zijne lie quoted many authors in his 

verhandeling aan. treatise. 

Hij zag van zijne eerste voorne- He relinquished his former in- 

mens af. tentions. 

Feith heeft in zijne verhandeling Feith has quoted many authors 

over het heldendicht, vele schrij- in his treatise on heroic poems. 

vers aangehaald. 

In phrases having a relative pronoun which acts at the 
same time as a conjunction , the nominative immediately 
follows the pronoun and the verb is placed at the end 
of the phrase ; as , 

De omstandighedcn , die ik alien 7he circumstances, all of which J 

heb opgenoemd. have enumerated. 

Het geloof dat gij aan zijne woor- The belief thai you cm attach 

den kunt hschten. to his words. 

De erkentenis die ons geslacht The gratitude which our family 

aan zijne belangeloosheid ver- awes to his disinterestedness. 

schuldigd is. 

Veroorloof dat ik weinige werken Permit that I quote a few works 

over het g.^schilpunt aanhale. on the point in dispute. 

RULE XLV. 

Adverbs. 

Adverbs must be placed next those words which they 
qualify and generally before adjectives , after simple verbs, 
and between the auxiliary and the verb in compound 
tenses of verbs ; as , 

Een zeer kostbaar geschenk. A very costly present. 



152 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 



Wij hadden weinig, 
Het is mij met geoorloofd te gaan. 
Het is mij geoorloofd niet te gaan. 
Zij zullen dagelijks weldaden ont- 

vangen. 
Hi] heeft weinig papier gehad. 



We had little. 
I am not permitted to go. 
I am permitted not to go. 
They will receive benefits daily. 

Re has had little paper. 



When a conjunction or relative pronoun is at the be- 
ginning of a phrase , the verb is then placed at the end , 
and the adverb precedes it ; as , 

Wanneer zij u nimnier gekend // they had never known you. 

hadden. 

Uwe moeder beweert dat zij u Your mother shows that she can 

nooit gelooven kan. never believe you. 

Indien hij u dagelijks kwame be- // ho visited you daily. 

zoeken. 



When the same quality or the same action is accom- 
panied by several adverbs , then that of time takes pre- 
cedence , then that of place , and then that of quantity , 
quality, or manner; as, 



Wij lezen van eene doorbraak die 
's vrijdag nachts den 4 n . van 
sprokkelraaand 1825, te Durger- 
dam , geweldig vele vewoestin- 
gen aanrigtede. 

Mijn grootvader is gisteren namid- 
dag, van hier, ongaarne, en to 
voet vertrokken. 



W@ read of a rupture of a dyke 
which took place in the night 
of the 4th. of February , at 
Durgerdam, and caused much 
destruction. 

My grandfather departed- hence 
yesterday afternoon , with re~ 
gret , and on foot. 



Sometimes an adverb begins the phrase ; as , 

Naauwelijks had hij mij verstaan He had scarcely understood me 

of hij gehoorzaamde. but he obeyed. 

Terstond kom ik terug. / return immediately. 

Nergens heeft de booswicht rust The tascal has not found repose 

gevonden. anywhere. 

The adverb generally precedes the infinitive of verbs ; as , 



Er is genoeg te gebruiken, 
Naar elders gaan. 
Naar meer te trachten. 



There is enough to use. 
To go elsewhere. 
To try for more. 



1) U T Cil S Y X i A X. 155 

RULE XLVI. 

Preposition and Objective. 

Prepositions govern the objective case, am! are placed 
immediately before the words on which they acl; except 
when they are joined to verbs ; as , 

Ik heb het aaa de kinderen gcgeven. / hnve given it to the children. 
De zoon van den vriendmijns ooms. The so)i of my uncle's friend. 

If the same preposition governs two or more substan- 
tives joined by copulative conjunctions , the preposition 
is expressed to the first only , and omitted to the fol- 
lowing by ellipsis; as, 



Deze redenaar munt ait in geluk- 
kige wendingen en gepastheid 
van uitdrukking. 

De geleerde van wien wij spreken , 
onderscheidt zich door uitge- 
breide kennis , grondige geleerd- 
heid , en ongeveinsde zedigheid. 



This orator excells in happy tur- 
nings and appropriate expres- 
sions. 

The learned man of whom we 
speak , distinguishes himself by 
an extensive knowledge , pro- 
found learning and genuine 
modesty. 



But when the substantives are joined by adversative or 
conditional conjunctions , the preposition must be repeat- 
ed ; as , 



Ifij heeft het gedaan deels tot 
zijne verstrooijing , en deels tot 
genoegen zijner vrouw. 

U\v zoon doet het noch uil fiefde, 
noch ait pligt. 

Mijne dochter heeft zich op ver- 
schillende handwerken toege- 
legd , niet alleen om mij te vol- 
doen , maar ook om zichzelve 
bezigheid te geven. 



He has done it partly for his 
distraction , and partly for the 
pleasure of his wife. 

Your son does it neither from 
love, n or from duty. 

My daughter has applied herself 
to different hind* of work, not 
only to satisfy me , but also 
to find herself employment. 



The preposition is sometimes repealed before each noun 
for the sake of energy ; as , 

De landgenoot wiens ontijdig ver- The fellow countryman whose un- 
ites wij betreuren , muntte uit timely loss we lament, wasdis- 

10 * 



154 DUTCH SYNTAX. 

onder zijrie medeburgeren, door tinguished amongst his fellow 
algemeene omvattende kenni8 , citizens , for his general cow- 
door diepdringende geleerdheid, prehensive knowledge , pene- 
door vlughfid van bevatting , trating learning, quickness of 
door scherpzinnigheid van oor- apprehension , perspicacity of 
deel , door gemakkelijkheid en judgement , for facility and or - 
door sierlijkheid van voordragt. nament of elocution. 

The preposition te has a wide signification and use ; 
and is equivalent to some other preposition and an ar- 
ticle ; as , 

te paard riiden , for 1 

'- ride on horse back 



.:/ > to ric 
riiden J 



op een paard rijde 

Te before nouns masculine and neuter , sometimes be- 
comes ten, and before nouns feminine, ter ; as, 

ten voordeele to the advantage ter plaatse at the place 

ter waarde to the value ten behoeve for the profit 

ten nadeele to the disadvantage ter gunste »» favor 

ten hemel to the heavens ter maaltijd to the feast 

te veld in the field te land by land 

RULE XLVII. 

Conjunctions. 

Conjunctions connect the same cases of nouns and pro- 
nouns , and the same moods and tenses of verbs ; as , 

Ik zag uwen vader en uwe moe- J mto your father and mother, 
der , en ook uwe zuster. and also your sister. 

Wij zagen en hoorden dien rede- We saw and heard that orator. 
naar. 

Compound tenses connected by a conjunction have the 
auxiliary repeated to the first verb in the sentence but 
omitted by ellipsis to the following ; as , 

Hij zal slechts schrijven en rekenen. He will only write and cypher. 

Wij hebben niet alleen gedanst We have not only dansed but also 

maar ook gezongen. sung. 

Ik had noch geteekend, noch ge- / had neither drawn, nor read r 

lezen , noch geschreven. nor written. 



DUTCH S Y N T A X. 155 

However for the sake of energy , the auxiliary is some 
times repeated ; as , 

Alva werd in de Nederlanden Alva was not only feared in the 

niet ulleen gevreesd , hij werd Netherlands , but he teas hated 

ook gehaat , hij werd zelfa ge- also, he was even cursed. 
vloekt. 

When three or more nouns or verbs follow each other 
in a sentence , the ^conjunction is expressed before the 
last only ; as , 

Zij hebben aan het huis van uwen They have sung , dansed , and 

broeder , gezongen , gedanst , played at your brother's. 
en gespeeld. 

Hij die eenmaal hare waarde heeft He who has once learned to know \ 

leeren kennen , en gevoelen , and feel her worth , will not sell 

zal haar noch voor goud of eer- her for gold, or honors , nor 

ambten veil hebben", noch voor offer her up for marble statues. 
marmeren ^tandbeelden op- 
offeren. 

When the conjunction is negative , it is repeated before 
all the nouns and verbs following in the sentence ; as , 

Zij gaf mij noch boeken , noch She gave me neither books , nor 
pennen, noch papier, noch inkt. pens , nor paper , nor ink. 

The conjunction is also repeated before each noun or 
other word in a more elevated style , for the sake of 
energy ; as ; 

Hij heeft alles verloren, en bezit- He\haslost all, possessions, friends, 

tingen , en vrienden , en eer. and honor. 

Hij bezit geestdrift voor al wat He posseses enthusiasm for all 

groot , en schoon , en goed is. that is great , and beautiful , 

and good. 

RULE XLVIII. 

Conjunction and Indicative. 

Some Conjunctions will generally have an indicative 
mood after them ; as , als , alzoo , dewijl , naardien , nmdat 



156 I) U T C H S Y N T A X. 

torn , vermits , waarom , want , weshalve , zoodat , zoodra . 
and such like ; as , 

Hij doet het oradat gij het gedaan Re does it because you have 

hebt. done it. 

Zij ontdekten het eiland toen het They discovered the island wh<>n 

licht werd. it teas light. 

Ik zal het nalaten , alzoo mijn J shall leave it, because my fa- 

vader zulks begeert. ther desires it. 

RULE XLIX. 

Conjunction and Subjunctive. 

There are also some conjunctions which convey a con- 
ditional or subjunctive meaning , and when futurity is 
implied, are generally followed by the subjunctive mood ; 
they are mits , opdat , ten einde , ten ware , ten zij ; as , 

Hij verlangtnaar meer boeken , op- He desires more books, to the end 

dat hij te beter aan zijne lees- that he may satisfy his incli- 

lust kunne voldoen. nation for reading. 

Gij zult nooit leeren, ten ware gij You will never learn unless you 

oplettender wordet. are more attentive. 

Ik zal mij verdedigen , mits hij / shall defend mysslf provided 

aiij gehoor wille geven. he listen to me. 

RULE L. 

Some Conjunctions require other Conjunctions. 

Certain conjunctions require other certain conjunctions 



them ; as , 






niet alleen 


requires 


maar ook 


even 


— 


als 


niet slechts 


— 


maar ook 


zoo 


— 


dan 


even zoo 


— 


als 


zoo wel 


— 


als 


hoe 


— 


hoe 



Ik geloof niet alleen uwe veront- / not only believe your justifi- 
schuldiging , maar ook zal ik cation , but 1 will also make 
die bij uwen vader doen gelden. it available with your father. 



1) I T C H sn 1 A \ 



Hij heelt die beginselen zoo wcl 
nageloefd als aangenomen. 

Ora niet slecbts 1c volharden waar 
pligt gebiedt; maar ook om to 
kunnen buigen waar eer en trouw 
het gedoogen. 

Zoo hij het doet,danzaI hij ge- 
etraft worden. 

Zoowel bij als zijn medepligtige 
waren schuldig verklaard. 

Gij schrijft hoe langer hoe beter. 



Ho has fallowed those prineipli i 
as tcell as accepted I hem. 

Not only to persevere where duty 
calls-, but also to be submissive 
where honor and fidelity permit '• 

If ho do it, he shall be punished. 

Uoth he and his accomplice were 

pronounced guilty. 
You write better and better. 



RULE LI. 

Power of Conjunctions in Sentences. 

The Conjunctions dock , en , maar, may be termed simple 
conjunctions , as serving to connect the parts of a phrase , 
and do not influence or alter the arrangement of the 
words in the sentence; as, 

Mijn vader sprak hem aan , doch My father spoke to him , but he 

hij antwoordde niet. did not answer. 

Ik onderhield hem daarover en hij J drew his attention to this sub - 

beloofde niet meer zoo nalatig ject and he promised not to 

te zijn. be more so negligent. 

The following Conjunctions may be termed adverbial 
conjunctions , daarom , daarentegen , daarenboven , derhalve , 
echter , cvemvel , hierom , dan , maar ook , niet alleen , niet 
slechts, nogtans , niettemiri', and in simple tenses of verbs 
are immediately followed by the verb, and in compound 
tenses they are immediately followed by the auxiliary , 
whilst the past participle or infinitive or the separable 
preposition is placed at the conclusion of the phrase: as, 

Daarentegen is hij een man van On the contrary he is a man of 

eer. honor. 

Derhalve zal hij met het schip ver- Therefore he will depart with 

trekken. the ship. 

Daarom neemt hij deze goederen Therefore he accepts these goods. 



Niettemin heb ik dcze taak op mij Notxoithslanding I hate taker 
genomen. this task upon me. 



15S 



DUTCH SYNTAX. 



The conjunctions dewfjl , daar , hoe , hoewel , hoedanig , 
hoezeer , indien , ate , naardien , naardien zulks , o/* , omdaJ , 
na dat , vermits , waar , and the compounds of waar , wan- 
neer , toen , Jo£ da£ , zoo , schoon , ofschoon , may be called 
relative conjunctions, and , in sentences in which they are 
used , will have the verb placed at the end ; as , 



Indien zijn vader zich daartoe ver- 

bonden had. 
Dewijl gij uwen tijd met ijdelhe- 

den doorbrengt. 



If his father had engaged in it. 

As you spend your time in fri- 
volities. 



RULE LII. 



Interjections. 

Interjections must be placed in that part of the sentence 
in which they produce the most effect; as, 



Eensklaps hoorde men : holla ! 

houdt op. 
Hoe ongelukkig ben ik , helaas ! 
Fij ! de booswicht. 
Ach ! hoe langdurig heeft dat huis- 

gezin geaukkeld. 
Ei! knaapje, zijt gij daar? 
menschlievende Trijheids-leer ! 



On a sudden was heard ; holla ! 

stop. 
How unfortunate am I , alass ! 
Fye ! the wretch. 
Ah ! what a length of time has 

that family endured calamity. 
Eh I my lad, are you there? 
Oh humane doctrine of liberty ! 



PROSODY. 



Prosody is that division of grammar which treats on 
the pronunciation of words , comprising the accent and 
quantity of syllables in them , and the Emphasis , Pause , 
and Tone of words in sentences ; and it treats also on 
the Laws of Versification. 

The Accent and Quantity of syllables have already been 
cursorily treated upon in the former part of this work , 
under Orthography , and do not seem to require further 
elucidation here. 

Emphasis , Pause , and Tone, cannot be treated upon 
in books with advantage to the student , and indeed 
these are matters belonging more particularly to the art 
of Rhetoric , a higher branch of Grammar , and are of 
importance to those only , who aspire to the acquisition 
of eloquence in public speaking; and must be taught 
orally. 

As to Versification, though belonging , in some measure, 
to the grammatical art , it cannot be expected to find a 
place here. To treat on the various Feet or Measures 
into which verse is divided , or on the different kinds 
of verse , would be of use and interest to none but those 
of poetical taste and genius. We will therefore dismis 
these matters and supply the place with a few Extracts 
from one or other of the Dutch Prose-Writers of the 
last and present century. 

The Dutch language will be found to be sonorous and 
emphatic , and possessed of much vigor. It has retained 
more of its original character than any other of the 
Teutonic branches. The affinity which exists between 
this language and our own is calculated to raise our 
warmest sympathy and esteem. This affinity is exhibited 
in the following Old Dutch Proverb : 



ICO PROSODY, 

Wtnn ben hinn t£ in tien man/ 
3«i be hinsljeia in bz ftm. 

TRANSLATION. 

When the wine is in the man , 
Is the wisdom in the can. 

Indeed no language claims a closer kindred with ours 
than this , as will be further seen on a perusal of the 
following specimens. 

The number of Dutch Writers of eminence , as also 
that of men of genius distinguished in the arts , is per- 
haps greater than that of any other country of Europe , 
in proportion to the number of inhabitants ; yet 1 » strange 
it is" » says M r . Bowring ," that there is a country almost 
within sight of the shores of our island , whose literature is 
Jess known than that of Persia or Hindostan , a country too 
distinguished for its civilization and its important con- 
tributions to the mass of human knowledge — It is in- 
deed most strange , that , while the Poets of Germany have 
found hundreds of admirers and thousands of critics, those 
of a land nearer in position — more allied by habit and 
by history with our thoughts and recollections — should 
have been passed by unnoticed — yet there are many 
among them , whose reputation is as firmly established , 
though not so widely diffused , as that of the most re- 
nowned among the sons of fame. Rut Vondel himself, 
ingenious , emphatic , and sublime , as he is , has never 
found an interpreter , scarcely a reader , in England/' 

The English Version adjoined to the Praxis is as literal 
as the genius and analogy of the two languages will admit ; 
indeed all translations , to be faithful, ought to be as literal 
as the genius and the structure of the language into which 
the translation is made, will allow, observing, however, 
that the laws of Syntax and harmony are not violated ; 
as it is by this means that the sense and style of the au- 
thor is conveyed into the language , into which the trans- 
lation is rendered , whilst a deviation from this particu- 
lar , or what is termed a free translation , is rather an 
imitation , than , strictly speaking , a translation. 

The following Praxis on Dutch Grammar can be em- 
ployed by the student as exercises in reading and for 



P K S O D Y. 161 

translation ; to which end it is recommended that 
he make a translation from the Dutch into the English , 
without looking to the English Version on the opposite 
page ; having completed which , he can compare his trans- 
lation with that in the book, and correct where necessary; 
and then translate it back into Dutch in the same man- 
ner. The contents of the piece being well understood , 
the studentcan then derive advantage from a repeated rea- 
ding of it. 



II 



165 



OEFENINGEN 

Uitircksels nit Nieuwe Holiandsche Proza-Schrijvers. 



Met Fort Erfprins aan den H elder. 

Het Fort Erfprins is eerie van die schoone sterkten, 
welk zijn aanzijn aan Napoleon verschuldigd is. Bij 
den gelukkigen ommekeer van zaken, in het jaar 1813, 
ontving het den naam van Erfprins, eenen titel , welke 
ieder INederlander den dapperen Vorst te binnen brengt, 
die in de velden van Waterloo bloed en leven voor de 
vrijheid en onafkankelijklieid van Nederland toonde veil 
te liebben , en die thans on der den naam van Willem 
den Tweeden den scepter voert over liel vrije land, dat 
wij het onze noemen • een land, klein van omvang, 
doch sterk door eendragt , en dat , lioe dan ook door 
opstand, afval , en verraad verkleind, dank hebbe den 
Opperbestuurder der volkeren , tot heden zijne onaf- 
hankelijklieid heeft weten te handhaven , en bevrijd is 
gebleven voor den schok der omwentelingen en tegen- 
omwentelingen , die, sedert 1830, een groot deel van 
Europa, in vuur en vlam hebben gezet. 






PRAXIS 

on the ZRutch Grammar, 

Extracts from Modern Dutch Prose- Writers. 
The Fort (Erfprins) Crownprince at the Helder. 

The Fori [Erfprins) Crownprince is one of those 
beautiful fortresses , which is indebted to Napoleon 
for its existence. On the fortunate turn of affairs in 
the year J8J3 , it received the name of Erfprince , a 
title , which brings to tJie mind of every Netherlander , 
the heroic prince , who showed, in the field of Waterloo , 
t/ial he was ready to sacrifice his life Jor the liberty 
and independence of the Netherlands , and who now 
under the name of William the Second sways the 
scepter over that free country which we call ours ; a 
country small in circuit , but strong by union , and 
that, though diminished by rebellion, revolt, and treach- 
ery , thanks be to the Supreme Ruler of nations , has 
been able to maintain its independence ; and has re- 
mained free from the shock of the revolutions and coun- 
ter revolutions , which, since J830 , have set a grea 
portion of Europe in a flame. 



ir.i PRAXIS ON THE 

Ik ben geen vesting-bouwkundige , gij kunt dan ook 
van mij geenszins eene naaawkeurfge beschrijving van 
dit fort yerwachten. Alleen wil ik u mededeelen , dat 
deskundigen het eene schoone sterkte noemen , omringd 
van hooge aarden wallen en breede grachten , die het 
binnenkomen van een' vijand zeer moeijelijkzouden maken. 

Napoleon, wiens ijzeren wil alles deed doorzetten , 
wat hij voor de bereikinp zijner oogmerking dienstig of 
noodzakelijk oordeelde , begreep , dat de Helder door 
deszelfs Jigging al de noodige vereischten had , om een- 
maal aan den mond der Noordzee datgene te worden , 
wat Antwerpen aan de Schelde is. Hij begreep daaren- 
boven , dat het voor de veiligheid van zijn rijk een te 
gevaarlijk punt was , om langer zoo ongedekt te blijven 
als het toen was , want de landing der Engelschen was 
hem nog geenszins door het hoofd gegaan. Hij wilde 
dergelijke gebeurtenissen in het vervolg voorkomen, daar 
hij de innerlijke overt uiging bezat , dat die roodrokken 
geenszins tot het getal zijner beste vrienden behoorden. 
De Helder moest dus worden versterkt ; het moest eene 
vesting, en wel eene zeer belangrijke sterkte worden; 
en daar besluiten en uitvoeren niet zelden het werk was 
van hetzelfde oogenblik, zoo dagteekenen zich ook van 
dien stond af aan de verbazende veranderingen , welke 
deze plaats in de laatste dertig jaren heeft ondergaan. 

Na den val des Keizers is het Nederlandsche Gouver- 
nement den door hem ingeslagen weg blijven bewande- 
len , en heeft het de nog niet uitgevoerde plannen van 
Napoleon, ofschoon eenigzins gewijzigd, ten uitvoer 
laten brengen ; doch voorzeker zou de Helder nn reeds 
lang onder de aanzienhjkste steden der Nederlanden eene 
gewigtige plaats hebben bekleed, als de grootsche plannen 
van den vroegeren wereldbeheerscher waren ten uitvoer 
gebragt. 

A. R. Stoos. 



D l T C li G K A M M A R. 

/ am no military Architecht , therefore you must not 
expect from me a minute description of this fort. I 
will merely inform you, that competent judges pro- 
nounce it a beautiful fortress , surrounded with lofty 
earthen ramparts , and broad ditches, which would ren- 
der the entrance of an enemy very difficult, 

Napoleon , whose iron will , prosecuted every thing 
that he deemed necessary or serviceable for the accom- 
plishment of Ids designs , conceived , that the Helder , 
from, its situation, possessed all the requisites of 'becom- 
ing , for the mouth of the North-sea , what Antwerp 
is for the Schelt. He conceived moreover , that it was 
a too dangerous spot for the safety of his empire , to 
remain longer exposed as it then did ; for the landing 
of the English [there) was not yet out of his head. 
He desired to avoid similar events in the future , as 
he was fully convinced that those red jacketed [lads) 
were not by any means to be ranked in tlie list of his 
best friends. The Helder must therefore be fortified ; 
it must become a fortified place and an important for- 
tress f and as it generally happened with the Emperor, 
that resolutions and executions were the work of one 
and the same instant , so , the astonishing changes } 
which this place has undergone in the last thirty years, 
are dated from that period. 

After the fall of the Emperor , the Netherlands Go- 
vernment prosecuted the plan commenced by him , and 
has executed, however with some modifications, the 
unfinished plans of Napoleon ; but it is certain, that 
the Helder would long eer this have occupied a place 
among the most important cities of the Netherlands , 
if the gigantic plans of the previous ruler of the world 
had been accomplished. 



166 PRAXIS ON THE 

Opkomst, bloei, en verval der Letter ew. 

Op den maalstroom van gedurige orawentelingen en 
oorlogen volgt een staat van evenwigt en vrede. Over- 
vloed neemt de plaats in van behoefte , gerustheid die 
van gedurige vreeze. Geen wonder , zoo men zicli nu 
van zijnen overvloed bedienen wil , om den kring der 
genoegens van het leven uit te breiden; genoegens, die 
men nu in veiligheid genieten , en , zonder gevaar van 
stoornis ; smaken kan. De weelde moet alsdan geboren 
worden. Het noodlottig , onvermijdelijk tijdstip is daar. 
Gelukkig , zoo als dan ook de letteren tot een heilzaam 
tegengift ontluiken ; zoo , naarmate de weelde het lig- 
chaam in veerkracht en sterkte doet afnemen , deze de 
vermogens van den geest ontwikkelen ; zoo , naarmate 
de aanlokselen tot ondeugd vermeerderen , het verstand 
de hartstogten leert bestieren en in toorn houden ; zoo , 
wanneer de natuurdrift, die de helden vormde, zich al- 
lengs door de weelde belezen laat en in vuur verflaauwt , 
de letteren daarentegen hare stem verheffen, den niensch 
naar het gebod des pligts doen hooren , zijne deugd te- 
gen de verleiding der ondeugden wapenen, en , door het 
te bovenstreven aller hinderpalen ; werkelijk den naam 
van deugd doen verdienen. Rampzalig daarentegen het 
volk , dat , door een toevalligen zamenloop van omstan- 
digheden , eerder met de weelde , dan met de lelteren , 
bekend wierd; aan ; t welk bruisende hartstogten gretig 
het vergift deden inzwelgen , zonder dat het tegengift 
nog daar was. Vloek over de Europeers , die aan zoo 
vele volkeren der onderscheidene werelddeelen de nood- 
lottige voortbrengselen hunner weelde toedienden , eer 
zij hen door beschaving tot kennis, tot het regte gebruik 
hunner geestvermogens hadden opgeleid. 

D. J. van Lennef. 



D I T C H GRAM >1 A B. igt 

Rise, prosperity, and decline of Learning. 

To the whirlpool of continual revolutions and wars 
follows a state of equalization and peace. Superfluity 
occupies the place of want , quietude that of continual 
fear, JS/o wonder, if we desire to avail of our su- 
perfluity to extend the range of the comforts of life ; 
comforts , which are now enjoyed in security , and 
which we can taste without apprehension of disturbance. 
Luxury must tlien be bom. The fatal and inevitable 
period is there. Fortunate if then learning springs 
forth as a salutary antidote; so that in proportion as 
luxury deprives the body of its elasticity and force , 
the former may unfold the powers of the mind; so, that 
in proportion as the allurements of vice increase , the 
understanding may learn to guide the passions and 
check them (in their progress); so , that when the pas- 
sion of nature which formed heroes, allows itself to be 
gradually seduced by luxury, and loses its energy , 
learning on the other hand may raise its voice , tell 
to man tlie calls of duty , arm his virtue against the 
seduction of vice , and , by subduing all resistance , 
virtually merit t/ie name of virtue. IVretched on the 
other hand is that nation, which, by an accidental 
combination of circumstances , rather embraced luxury 
than learning ; besides which , foaming passions greedily 
swallowed tJie poison, whilst the antidote was out of 
reach. JL curse on the Europeans , who distributed to 
so many nations of different parts of the world the 
fatal productions of their luxury f before first leading 
them to knowledge and to a right use of their mental 
faculties. 



1(>8 P R A X I 8 G N T H E 

De Aokoshoom. 

U zal ik het eerst bewonderen , — prachtige kokos- 
boom ! — die uwen ronden en gladden stam lijnregt 
in de hoogte verheft , en met #e lange bladeren de wol- 
ken geesselt ; eenige boom van den weldadigen Schepper 
uit het Paradijs aan de bewoners der lieete werelddee- 
len geschonken ! onwaardeerbare gift ! die alleen genoeg- 
zaam is tot de meeste noodwendigheden des levens ! die 
in den onvruchtbaarsten bodem groeit, en het dorre 
zand met de prachtige kroon beschaduwt, en uit den 
ziltigen oever der zee zelfs verkwikkelijk vocht zuigt. 
Het bittere zeewater spoelt onschadelijk om zijtien slan- 
ken stam , hij bloeit met te meerder luister , buigt zich 
over de donderpnde golven en lacht om hun geweld ; 
kjaterende slaan de zware noten tegen elkander, doch 
geen eenige valt daardoor ter aarde. 

J. Haafner 

Reize te poet door het eiland Ceilon. 

Hu.XG DE GHOOT. 

Huio de Groot stamde af van een der aanzienlijkste 
hollandsche geslachten , dat reeds sedert eeuwen de 
hoogste waardigheden in de stad Delft bekleed had. Zijn 
vader was Burgemeester dier stad, en tevens bezorger 
der hoogeschool te Leiden , tot welken laatsten post , 
ten dien tijde , geene dan de aanzienlijkste personen 
werden gekozen. Deze was een geleerd man en vlijtig 
beoefenaar der letterkunde , en tevens , door zijn aan- 
zien en middelen een bevorderaar van dezelve. Hier 
trof men dan alies te zamen : goed zaad , uitmuntenden 
grond, en de beste opkweekers. Hoe veel goeds kon 
men van de kinderen dezes mans niet verwachten ! 

Reeds in de vroegste jeugd van de Groot ontluikten 



DUTC H (i K A M M A R. iflfl 

The Cocoa-tree. 

1 will first admire thee , — sumptuous cocoa-tree I — 
who raiseth thy round and smooth trunk perpendicularly 
on high, and bujfeteth the clouds with thy long leaves; 
the only tree of the beneficent Creator out of paradise 
presented to the inhabitants of the torrid zone ! inesti- 
mable gift / which is sufficient of itself for most of the 
necessaries of life ! which grows on the most barren 
soil, and shadows the parched sand with its sumptuous 
crown } and absorbs even refreshing moisture from the 
briny strand of the sea. The bitter sea-water washes 
harmlessly around its slender stem, it flourishes with 
increased lustre, bends over the roaring waves , and 
smiles at their fury ; the ponderous nuts dash against 
each other, but not one of them falls to the earth. 

J. Haafner , 
Pedestrian Tour through the island of Ceylon. 



Hugo de Ghoot , (Ghotius.) 

Hugo de Groot , better known in England by tlie 
name of Grotius descended from one of the most res- 
pectable families of Holland , which had for several 
centuries filled the highest offices in the city of Delft. 
His father was Mayor of that city , and also Pro- 
curator of the University of Leiden , to which office , 
at that time , none but the most respectable were cho- 
sen. He was a man of learning and a zealous cul- 
tivator of literature , and also , by his respectability 
and means , a promoter of it. Therefore every thing 
was found here concentrated: good seed, excellent soil, 
and the best cultivators. How much good was there 
not to be expected from the children of this man / 

Already , in the earliest years of Grotius , abilities 



170 PKAXiS ON THE 

vermogens en talenten , die duidelijk voorspelden , welk 
eenen trap van grootlieid hij ten eenigen tijd kon beklim- 
men. Verre boven zijne jaren, waren zijti geheagen , 
zijne opinerkzaamlieid , vatbaarheid, en zijn oordeel. 
Deze onschatbare gaven werden gelnkkig aangeprikkeld 
door eene blakende leerzucht en onvernioeide werk- 
zaamheid. Op zijn zevende jaar reeds begon hij Latijn 
en Giieksch te leeren ; een jaar zich hierop toegelegd 
hebbende , schreef hij Latijnsche verzen , waarvan een 
waardig geaclit werd, om aan den Prins van Oranje 
vertoond te worden. Zijn ijver was zoo groot, dat hij 
zelfs een groot gedeelte van den nacht tot leeren be- 
sleedde , en, daar zijne ouders , nit zorg voor zijne ge- 
zondheid , hem daartoe licht weigerden , kocht hij van 
zijn zondagsgeld heimelijk kaarsen. Intusschen bepaalde 
hij zich alleen tot deze oefeningeu. Op zijn eifde jaar 
vertrok hij reeds naar de hoogeschool te Leijden, om 
daar het onderwijs der Hoogleeraren te genieten. 

C. R.OGGE. 

Prosodie. 

De Prosodie van eene taal is dat gedeelte van hare 
spraakkunst , waardoor de regels der uitspraak bepaald 
worden. 

Zal eene Prosodie dus volledig zijn ; dan moet men 
in dezelve niet alleen die regels aanlreffen, waarbij de 
langheid of kortheid der lettergrepen aangetoond wordt, 
maar ook die , welke , in het algemeen , tot het toon- 
kundige van eene spraak behooren : want ook het spre- 
ken, schoon van het eigenlijk gezegde zingen onder- 
scheiden , is een, van de kracht en beteekenis der woor- 
den afhangende , en door den smaak des sprekers ge- 
wijzigde zang, die wel minder aangehonden , vloeijend, 
en zamensmeltend is dan die des rangers ; maar daarom 
niet minder in toon , maal , en folding bestaat , dan de 



DUTCH GHA M M A K. 171 

and talents developed themselves , which clearly prog- 
nosticated to what a high degree of celebrity he might at 
sometime arrive. His memory, observation, capacity, and 
judgment , were far beyond his years. These invalua- 
ble gifts were luckily encouraged by a passionate 
desire for learning and an indefatigable industry. In his 
seventh year he began to learn Latin and Greek , and 
having applied himself to them a year , he wrote Latin 
verses / one of which was considered worthy of being 
shown to the Prince of Orange. His zeal was so great, 
that he passed a great part of the night in study ; 
and, when his parents , from a regard for his /wait h , 
denied him a light for that purpose, he secretly bought 
candles with his sunday pocket-money. In the mean 
time he devoted himself exclusively to this study- In 
his eleventh year he went to the University of Leiden, 
for the purpose of enjoying the instruction of the Pro- 
fessors. 



Prosody. 

Tlie Prosody of a language is that part of its gram- 
mar , by which the rules of its pronunciation are de- 
termined. 

If a Prosody be therefore perfect ; tJien , we shall 
not only find there those rules , by which the length or 
shortness of syllables is shown , but also those, which, 
in general , belong to the harmony of a language : for 
speaking , also , though differing from singing , literally 
. so called , is a song dependent on the power and mean- 
ing of the words , and modified by the taste of the 
speaker , which is indeed less continued , flowing , and 
incorporated than that of a singer ; but tJierefore does 
not depend less on tone , measure, and guidance , than 
song. TVe can perceive this not only in the reheasal 



172 ' P K A X 1 S N T H E 

zang zelve. Niet alleen in het opzeggen van verzen en 
net uitspreken eener redevoering , maar ook in het ge- 
wone spreken eener taal , in tie dagelijksche zamenle* 
ving , kunnen wij dit opmerken. 

Nimmer worden wij bedrogen in den toon , waardoor 
bijv. eene vraag , of een geeindigde volzin aangednid 
wordt. Het toestemmende of ontkennende wordt niet 
alleen door woorden, maar ook door den toon, te ken- 
nen gegeven. Het vervolg eener rede , waarin meer 
aangedrongen wordt door een a want/' is, in den klank, 
gelieel anders dan dat, waarin een, j) maar" uitzonde- 
ringen of nadere bepalingen opgeeft. Ik zwijg van de 
levendige uitdrukking der hartstogten , welke, door bet 
verheffen en nederdrukken der toonen , de leiding der 
stem , de snelheid of traaglieid der elkander in liet spre- 
ken opvolgende woorden , bijna alleen , geboren wordt 

Mr. J. KlNKER. 

De Batavieren- 

De Batavieren waren de oudste bewoners van een 
gedeelte van het tegenwoordige Kleefsland, Gelderland, 
en Holland , oorspronkelijk een Germaanscli volk , uit 
Hessen afkomstig ; zij kwamen , ten gevolge van een' 
twist met hunne naburen , op den raad hunner pries- 
ters , zich hier te lande nederzetten , ruim 100 jaren 
voor Jesus Christtjs. Zij werden weldra door de Ro- 
meinen beoorloogd , en , na een' hardnekkigen en dap- 
peren tegenstand , eindelijk wel overwonnen , maar toch 
als vrienden en bondgenooten des Romeinschen volks 
aangemerkt, hetwelk inderdaad goede diensten van de 
Batavieren genoot , maar dezen met ondank en onder- 
drukking beloonde. Deze behandeling eindelijk moede , 
spoorde Claudius Civilis, een aanzienlijk, onderne- 
mend, en dapper Batavier, zijne landslieden tot opstand 
aan } voerde langen tijd opcnbaren coring met de Ro- 



!) I 1 C H G H A M M A K. I7r> 

of verses or the delivery of an oration, but also in 
tlie familiar speaking of a language , arid in daily 
conversation. 

T^Ve are never deceived in the tone , whereby , for 
example, a question or the conclusion of a sentence is 
shown. The admitting or denying is not communica- 
ted by words merely, but by the tone. The continua- 
tion of a discourse , in which more is enforced by a 
)) because , " is , in sound , quite otherwise than that , 
in which a )) but " gives exceptions of closer limitations. 
I say nothing of the lively expressions of the passions, 
which almost exclusively arise out of the rising or fall 
ing of the tone , the conducting of the voice , and 
the velocity or slowness of the words in following each 
other. 



The Batayians. 

The Batavians were the oldest inhabitants of apart 
of the present Cleefland , Guelderland , and Holland , 
originally a German people , from Hesse ; they came 
and established themselves in this country, at the ad- 
vice of their Priests, in consequence of a quarrel with 
their neighbors , about JOO years before Christ. The 
Romans soon made war upon them, and, after an ob- 
stinate and brave resistance , finally conquered them , 
but were considered as friends and allies of the Ro- 
mans y who enjoyed indeed important services from the 
BatavianS , but rewarded them with ingratitude and 
oppression. Finally , becoming weary of this treatment, 
Claudius Civilis excited his countrymen to a revolt, 
carried on for some time an open war with the Romans, 
and Jorced them to an honorable peace ; but (the Ro- 
man Emperors) Trajan and Adrian brought them again 



174 PRAXIS ON THE 

meinen ? en dvvong hen tot een' eervollen vrede ; doch 
Tea j anus en Hadrjamus bragten hen weder tot onder- 
werping. Allengs vermengden zij zich met de Vriezen; 
en op het einde der derde eenw maakten de Salische 
Franken zich meester van het land der Batavieren , na- 
derhand de Saksers ; en onder dezen versmolt hunne 
zelfs tandigheid , en de naam zelfs des lands , Batavie , 
werd in Neder-Saksen veranderd. 

Het Eiland der Batavieren. 

Dit Eiland zoo geheeten in de oude Aardrijkskimde , 
is de landstreek tusschen den Rijn en de Waal , be- 
vattende een gedeelte van Kleefsland, Gelderland, en 
Zuid-Holland , vroeger bewoond door de Cimberen , 
doch door dezen , uit hoofde der geweldige overstroo- 
raingen ? verlaten , en door de Batavieren in bezit ge- 
nomen en bebouwd. 



Gesehiktheid van Europa in het algemeen 
voor Zeevaart en Handel. 

Wanneer wij de gesteldheid van ons werelddeel in 
het algemeen beschouwen , en dezelve met die van an- 
dere -werelddeelen vergelij ken , dan moeten wij erkezi- 
nen, dat Europa door de natuur geenszins bevoorregt 
is. Oorspronkelijk gaf het weinig meer dan vleeseh en 
broody fijnere vruchten en kruiderijen behoorden hier 
niet te huis, en zullen hier ook thans slechts in zeer 
enkele landen welig tieren. Ook in kleedingstoffen kon 
men op geen rijkdom roemen ; purper , zijde , en zelfs 
katoen is van elders. Paarlen en edelges teen ten, zoo 
begeerlijk in der menschen oogen , vond men hier even- 
min , behalve den barnsteen in Praissen. Maar juist 
deze armoede aan eigene voortbrengselen maakte de Eu~ 



D U T C H G R A M M A R. 175 

under subjection. In the course of time they associated 
themselves with the Prisons ; and , at the end of the 
third century , the Salic Franks, afterwards the Saxons , 
became masters of the country of the Batavians ; and 
under the latter , tJieir existence as a distinct nation 
ceased , and even tJie name of the country , Batavia , 
became changed into that of Lower Saxony, 



The Island of the Batavians. 

This Island } which is so called in, ^indent geo- 
graphy , is the country situated between the Rhine and 
the Waal, embracing a part of Cleefland , Guelder- 
land y and South Holland, in earlier times it was in- 
habited by the Cimbrens , but was abandoned by that 
people , in consequence of dreadful inundations , and 
afterwards was taken possession of by the Batavians , 
and was brought by them into cultivation. 

Adaptation of Europe in general for NaYi- 
gation and Trade. 

If we view the position of our part of the world in 
general , and compare it with that of the other parts , 
then we must confess , that Europe is by no means fa" 
vored by Nature. At first it yielded very little else than 
meat and bread; delicate fruits and spices were not indige- 
nous to it, and they will flourish here only in very few coun- 
tries- Also as to articles of dress we can boast of no rich- 
es ; purple , silk , and even cotton, belong to other parts. 
Pearls and precious stones , so attractive to the sight of 
man, are also not found here, except amber in Prussia, 
But just this poverty in its own productions , made 
the Europeans solicitous to visit other parts of the 
world , and it was a strong excitement to Navigation 



176 PRAXIS ON THE 

ropeanen begeerig , om andere werelddeelen te bezoeken , 
en was een sterke prikkel voor Zeevaart en Handel. En 
hierin was de Schepper der TSatuur den bewoneren van 
dit werelddeel te gemoet gekomen. Bijna aan alle kan- 
ten omringd door zeeen en baaijen, allerwegen doorsne- 
den met bevaarbare rivieren en meeren , lokte deze ge- 
steldheid reeds vroeg de menschen uit, om zich op bet 
onzeker element te wagen. Wat voor de zuidelijke Eu- 
ropeanen de Middelandsche zee geweest was , werd voor 
de noordelijke de Oost- en Noordzee: eene oefenscbool 
namelijk voor Koophandel en Zeevaart , niet louter be- 
spiegelend, maar met dadelijke proeven verbonden. 

Geschlktheid van ons Racier land in het 
bijzonder voor Zeevaart en Handel. 

En wat alzoo waar is omtrent Europa in het alge- 
meen, geldt niet minder ten opzigte van ons Vaderland 
in het bijzonder. In vroegere dagen vooral, toen onze 
velden nog minder door dijken en zeeweringen beschut 
waren tegen de woede der zee , kon de akkerbouw 
onmogelijk een voornaam middel van bestaan opleveren. 
Ook was de grond daartoe velerwegen te moerassig. 
Met de veeteelt ging het beter, wegens de menigte on- 
zer vette beemden. Maar vooral moest ons laag , wa- 
terachtig en van rivieren , meren , en poelen doorsneden 
land uitlokken tot Visscherij , Scheepvaart , en Handel. 
Een lange , smalle knstzoom aan twee zijden bood daar- 
toe de schoonste gelegenheid aanj en geplaatst in het 
middelpunt van Enropa, werden wij ; als door onze 
ligging, tevens het middelpunt der handeldrijvende na- 
tien van ons werelddeel ; hebbende ten westen een volk 
van mededingende kooplieden in de Engelschen, terwijl 
drie groote rivieren , die hier hare uit watering hebben , 
ons met de binnenlanden vereenigen. Aldus op de 
grenzen van het vaste land en den oceaan geplaatst _, 



1> I T C H (i B A M M AH. 17T 

and 2 rude. And in this particular the Creator of 
Nature came to the assistance of the inhabitants of it. 
Surrounded almost on all sides by seas and bays , 
intersected in all directions with navigable rivers and 
lake:;, the people were soon invited out , to venture on 
the unstable element. JVhat the Mediterranean was 
to tfie Sout/iern Europeans , the East and the North sea 
were to the Northern ; a nursery , namely , for Com- 
merce and Navigation, not merely theoretical , but 
combined with actual operations. 



Adaptation of our Mother-Country in partic- 
ular for Navigation and Commerce. 

And what is true with respect to Europe in general, 
is not less applicable to our MotJier-Country in parti- 
cular. In former days especially , when our fields 
were still less protected from the raging of the sea , 
by dykes and sea -mounds , agriculture could then by 
no means have yielded a principal source of subsistence. 
The land was also in many respects too marshy for that 
purpose. In the breeding of cattle it went better, in 
consequence of our numerous luxuriant pastures. But 
our low and watery country intersected with rivers , 
lakes , and pools, invited the natives to fishery , navi- 
gation, and trade. A low small sea- border on two 
sides presented the finest opportunities thereto ; and 
situated in the centre of Europe , we became, as it were, 
by our position, at the same time, the central point of 
the commercial nations of our quatter of the world; 
having on the west the English, commercial competitors, 
whilst three great rivers , which here empty themselves 
into the sea, connect us with the inland countries. Thus 
situated on the boundaries of the continent and t/u 

12 



178 PRAXIS ON THE 

kon het niet missen , of wij moesten , bij de toeneraing 
van zeevaart , de markt- en stapelplaats verkrijgen van 
verschillende landen en voortbrengselen. Aan zulk 
eene gnnstige ligging hebben ook de grootste koopsteden 
der oudheid en der middeieeuwen , Tyrus , Cartago, 
Alexandria , Venetie , en Genua 7 derzelver opkomst te 
danken gehad. * 

De geschiktheid der Nederlanders 
daarvoor. 

Uit het bovenstaande is duidelijk , dat natnur en lig- 
ging van het land onze vaderen wel tot liandeidrijvenden 
eu zeevarenden vor men moesten. En er is inderdaad 
scliaars een land , waar men in het algemeen zoo veel 
van scheepvaart en ban del heeft geleerd. 

Maar om zeevaart en handel tot dien trap van luis- 
ter en welvaart op te voeren , welken zij bij onze va- 
deren hebben bereikt , daartoe werd meer vereischt , dan 
eene uitnoodiging der natuur en de geschiktheid onzer 
ligging. Daartoe was zulk eene geaardheid noodig , als 
de Nederlander bezit , zulk een welberaden overleg , 
zulk eene zucht tot werkzaamheid , zulk een bedaarde 
moed in de grootste gevaren , kortom , zulk eene zelf- 
standigheid, als onze vaderen hebben aan den dag ge- 
legd , en die , Gode zij dank ! ook bij het nageslacht 
nog niet verdwenen is, De handel vereischt een be- 
daarden , welwikkenden geest , een ijverig , werkzaam 
leven, bedachtzaamheid en volharding in voor- en te- 
genspoed ; en wie erkent hier niet onzen koopman van 
den ouden, degelijken stempel? De zeevaart, aan dui- 
zend wisselvalligheden , aan duizend kwellingen van 
hitte en koude blootgesteld , bij gedurigen strijd tegen 
wind en golven , wil een vast ligchaamsgestel , aan de 
snelste veranderingen van lucht en weder gewoon; wil 



1) U T C il G R A 11MA R. 173 

ocean , it could not fail , but that we must secure the 
market and staple-place of different CQUtHrhes and 
products. To a such like favorable position the great- 
er commercial towns of antiquity and of the middle 
ages , Tyre , Carthage , Alexandria , Venice , and 
Crenoa , owe their rise. 



Adaptation of the Netherlander for Trade 
and Navigation. 

From what has been said , it is evident that the na- 
ture and position of the country must indeed have for- 
med our ancestors for a commercial and navigating 
people. And there is indeed scarcely any country , 
where the people in general have advanced so far in 
navigation and trade. 

But to bring navigation and trade to that state of 
importance find prosperity which they attained under 
our ancestors , more was required than the invita- 
tion of nature , and the suitableness of our situation. 
To this end , such a natural disposition was wanting , 
as the Netherlander possesses } such a well conducted 
contrivance , such an industrious disposition , such a 
cool courage in the greatest dangers , in short, such 
a self-sufficiency , as our ancestors have displayed, and 
which , thank God ! has not disappeared in their 
offspring. Commerce requires a deliberate and consid- 
erate mind , a zealous , industrious life , thought-ful- 
ness and perseverance in fortune and adversity ; and 
who does not discover here our merchant of the old 
genuine stamp? Navigation , exposed to a thousand 
changes , to a thousand inconveniences of heat and 
cold , in incessant contests against wind and waves , 
requires a firm constitution , accustomed to the speediest 
changes of air and weather ; requires the same enter- 



180 P R A XISrON THE 

dezelfde ondememingszucht en standvastigen moed ; en 
wie denfct hier niet aan onzen ouden schipper en ma- 
troos ? En indien wij aldus zoowel de geaardheid van 
den Nederlander als de natuiir en ligging van zijn land, 
in aanmerking nenien , dan worden die werken en 
plannen 6ns begrijpelijk, welke aan vele vreemde natien 
ais wondereri moeten toeschijnen. 

J, Blaupot Ten Gate. 

De gewigtige gevolgen van 
Schoolonderwijs, 

Is Jiet niet eerie onbetwistbare waarheid , dat geene 
staatsinrigtingen , geene wetten , geene maatregelen van 
welke n aard , geene zekei heidsmiddelen , lioe doelmatig 
ook, de gewetensvrijiieid zoo krachtig onderstennen en 
verzekeren , als het onderwijs znlks doet ? Imtners , 
gelijk de ziel van elk kind in bet bijzonder zicli door- 
gaans gemakkelijk iaat kneden naar de denkbeelden , die 
het eerst in dezelve geprent worden , en de plooi aan- 
neemt, die de school aan dezelfde geef t ; gelijk de meeste 
gemoederen de rigting behonden , welk zij aldaar ver~ 
kregen ; gelijk allerbijzonderst bet geval is ten aanzien 
der talrijkste volksklasse , die , in meer of min kommer- 
lijke levenszorgen verloren , bijna geene zielsontwikkeling 
bekomt, dan door bet schoolonderwijs; zoo ook wordt 
die bijzondere plooi, die bijzondere rigting, door gedu- 
rige oefening en mededeeling , tot eene algemeene, eene 
nationale plooi , tot een volkskarakter verheven ; en de 
lagere school stemt de algemeene denk- en handelwijze, 
althans van de lagere standen. Wat men in die school 
onderwijst , dat blijft de onverteerbare stoffe, die een- 
maal slechts eene vonk zal behoeven , om de ganscbe 
volksmenigte te doen ontvlammen. Wordt in de school 
onzen kinderen achting voor knnde en wetenschap, 
eerbied voor den koning , liefde tot het vaderland,, ont- 



D I T C ii U K A M M A R. 181 

prise, spirit, and steadfast courage; and who dees not 
think here oj our old captain and sailor? And if we 
thus take into consideration as well the character of the 

Netherlander as lite nature and situation of his coun- 
try , then are those achievements and plans comprehen- 
sive to us , which must appear astonishing to many fo- 
reign nations. 



The important consequences of 
School-Instr uc tion . 

Is it not an indisputable truth , that no political re- 
gulations , no laws 9 no measures of whatsoever nature, 
no measures of security however applicable , can main- 
tain and ensure liberty of conscience so effectually as 
instruction? Of course , as the mind of every child 
in particular is easily moulded uccording to the ideas 
which are first impressed upon it , and takes the fold 
which the school gives it ; so most tempers preserve 
the direction which they acquire there ; as this is most 
particularly tlie case with respect to that numerous 
class of people i which , lost more or less in the trouble- 
some cares of life , acquires scarcely any expansion 
of the mind , beyond that imparted by school instruc- 
tion; so likewise is that particular fold f that particu- 
lar inclination , by a constant practice and communica- 
tion , raised to a national and general fold, to a national 
character ; and the lower school modifies at present the 
notions and conduct of the lower class. That which is 
taught in those schools remains the imperishable material , 
which at one time will only require a spark to excite 
the whole populace. If a love oj ( knowledge and science , 
respect for the king , patriotism , veneration for reli" 
gion and virtue, and estimation of liberty of conscience, 
be imprinted upon our children at school, our country 



189 PRAXIS, OK THE 

zag voor godsdienst en deugd, hoogscbatfiug voor ge- 
wetensvrijheid ingeboezemd, ons land zal in veiliglieid 
verkeeren ; want het zal deugdzanie, vaderlaudslievende 
en gasivrijkeid waarderende burgers zien opgroeijen , 
die te alien tijde gereed zullen zijn ora de grondzuilen 
van den siaat met himnen arm te scbragen 7 en des 
noods met him bloed te verdedigen ; ten einde de rijke 
erfenis der vaderen ongesclionden op het nageslacht 
over te brengen. Mogen daarentegen onze lagere scho- 
len dienstbaar gemaakt worden aan de verspreiding van 
tegenoverstaande denkbeelden , mogen alien , die er zich 
bevoegd toe achten , lagere scholen openen ; dan kunnen 
weelnieten onzen kinderen lust tot onwetendheid iii- 
boezemen , deugnieten lien behagen doen scheppen in 
de ondeugd , ongeloovigen kunnen dan ongeloof, bijge- 
loovigen bijgeloof } d weepers dweeperij , geestdrijvers en 
valsche ijveraars godsdiensthaat en vervolgzucht , — 
twislzoekers en rusfcverstoorders oproer en tweespalt 
leeren en vers pre i den ; allerlei soort van menschen, hoe 
ongescliikt : ja, hoe gevaarlijk ook , kunnen dan, mid- 
den in ons gezegend vaderland , scholen oprigten , zich 
meester maken van onze kinderen , de jeugdige liar ten 
met vreemde , onvaderlandsche denkbeelden vervullen , 
de zeden bederveii , het verstand benevelen , en langza- 
merhand een nienw geslacht in de maatschappij doen 
optreden, hetwelk alzoo gevormd en geleid door vijan- 
den van ons volksgeluk, zich niet ontzien zal aan de 
liartader van den staat te knagen , en eindelijk de oude 
en echte vrijheid op te offeren aan eene vergulde sla- 
vernij. P. de Raadt. 

Invloed van eigenbelang op de juistheid 

onzer waarnemingen. 

Er is iets , waardoor het eigenbelang op de juist- 
heid onzer waarnemingen eenen verslorenden invloed 



D U T C H (i U A M M A R. 183 

tW// re.9£ secure ; for it will see virtuous , patriotic 
citizens , appreciators of hospitality , spring up , who 
will always be ready to support with their arms the 
pillars of the state , and in case of need to defend it 
with their blood , in order to transfer unpolluted the 
rich heritage of their fitliars to their offspring. If on, 
the contrary our lower schools are rendered subservient 
to the dissemination of opposite notions , if every one who 
imagines himself competent commence a school \ then 
the ignorant may imprint upon our children a taste for 
ignorance, ignorants may inspire them with a pleasure 
in vice , disbelievers can teach and disseminate disbelief 
the superstitious superstition , fanatics fanatism , bigots 
and false zealots hale of religion and persecution , — 
cavillers and disturbers of public peace , rebellion and 
contests', all sorts of men however ill adapted , indeed 
however dangerous , would then be able to establish 
schools in our highly favored country , gain a mas- 
tery over our children, Jill their juvenile minds with 
strange and unpatriotic notions , corrupt the morals j 
blind the understanding , and by degrees form in so- 
ciety a new generation , which so formed and led by the 
enemies of the happiness cf the people , will not scruple 
to hnaw at the very heart of the state and finally saj, 
crifice tlie ancient and genuine liberty to a gilded sla- 
very. 



Influence of self-interest on the accuracy 
of our observation. 

There is something , by which self-interest preju- 
dicially influences our observations. It induces us , 



184 PRAXIS ON THE 

lieeft. Het doet oris , namelijk , zoo ligt een denkbeeld 
opvalten van eene zaak, nog voor dat wij die hebben 
beschouwd; wel een denkbeeld, waarin wij behagen 
scheppen, dat onze gebeele ziel inneemt. Het zijn die 
kinderen onzer verbeelding , die kleur en gedaante geven 
aan de voorwerpen , welke deze geenszins hebben, ja ons 
voor de oogen tooveren , wat in bet gebeel nietbestaat. 
Ik beboef niij geenszins le beroepen op bet dom- 
sle bijgeioof , dat al da hersenschimmen , die men bet 
eenmaai in het boofd lieeft gepraat , buiten zich kan zien , 
nocli op d weepers , zoo boog en fijn van luclit , dat het 
gezond verstand er niet in kan ademen. Ik zou op ge- 
leerde kuuneu wijzen , om hnnne uitgebreide kennis , 
heldere inzigten en diep nadenken beroemd. Geschied- 
kundigen van grooten naam hebben eerst de loop der 
gebenrtenissen naar hunne denkbeelden ontworpen ; — 
daarna onderzoekende , vonden zij inderdaad ook alles 
3nist zoodanig geschied , als het door hen was gedacht. 
Niet anders is het met vele en groote stelselmakers in 
allerlei wetenschappen gegaan , en beroernde oordeel- 
kundigen en uitleggers van gewijde en ongewijdcj schrif- 
ten. Dat , meenen zij , terwijl zij het boek openen , dat 
moet er staan, en dat moet het beteekenen. En zij 
zien toe , en het staat er voor hen ook zoo te lezen , 
en het lieeft ook dien zin. Zoo hebben wij, gewone raen- 
schen in het gewone leven , ook onze te voren opgevatte 
gedachtenis over gebenrtenissen, gevoelens, woorden hoe 
die gesproken ziillen. zijn en wat er mede is gemeend; en 
zoo wordt het dan ook bevonden te zijn, Wij zijn hierin 
niet geheel ongelijk aan den man , die meende een voor- 
werp voor zijnen kijker te hebben, en tegen iets aanzag, 
dat in den kijker zat. S. K. de Waard. 

Het hetrachten der Deugd. 

De Deugd is de staat der gezondheid van de ziel, en 
de ondeugd derzelver menievnldisre sebreken en ziekten. 



DUTCH GRAMMAR. 185 

namely , to come to a conclusion on a matter before we 
have investigated it; truly, a conclusion in which we 
take delight , which gratifies our whole soul. It is 
that child of our imagination which gives color and 
shape to objects which they no way possess , nay , be- 
witchingly sets before our eyes what does not at all 
exist. 

I need not allude to the blindest superstition , that 
can externally behold all the chimeras , which have 
been talked into men's heads , nor yet of fanatics , of 
so high and ratified an air that sound understanding 
cannot breathe in it. I could instance learned men , 
celebrated for their extensive knowledge , clear views , 
and deep thought. Celebrated historians have framed 
events according to their notions; — who, subsequently 
investigating them , found that every thing had fallen 
out precisely as they had imagined. It has gone thus 
with many great projectors of new systems in every 
science, and with celebrated critics and expounders of 
the sacred and heathen writings. That, they conclude, 
whilst they are opening the book , that must be 
related there , and that it must imply that. And they 
look , and it is there before their eyes , and it has just 
that meaning. So we , like ordinary men in ordinary 
life, have also our previously conceived ideas of events, of 
opinions , of words how they must be pronounced and 
what they mean ; and so it is found to be. M^e are 
not altogether unlike the man , who imagined that he 
had an object before his telescope , and he was looking 
at something that sat in the telescope. 



The Practising: of Yirtue 

Virtue is the healthy state of the soul , and Vice is 
its numerous defects and diseases. 



186 PRAXIS ON THE 

Er zijn verscheidene zij den waarop men de deagd 
betrachten kan ; verscheidene geneesmiddelen waarmede 
men de zieke ziel tracht te herstellen , en tot den staat 
van gezondheid weder te brengen , en deze middelen 
zijn de lessen , welke de deugden-leeraar zijne toehoor- 
ders voordraagt. Men kan naamlijk, die lessen, op een' 
norsclien en gebiedenden toon uitknorren — men kan 
dezelven op een' deftigen en statigen trant leeraaren, — 
en eindelijk, — men kan ze op eene vrolijke en lucbtige 
wijze voordragen. — De eerste wijze doet zeer weinig 
nut , en verwekt meer afkeer dan genegenheid tot der- 
zelver beoefening , en dit blijkt genoegzaam uit de groote 
zelfverveling , waarmede de aanhoorders van de, opzulk 
een' toon uitgebiilderde lessen , vervuld worden , waar- 
door dezelven geen den minsten ingang bij hen vinden , 
daar ze slechts verlangen dat de spreker een beslnit 
make, en zij gelegenheid hebben van zich uit hunnen 
staat van gevangenschap in vrijheid te stellen , om , met 
niet weinig ongenoegen tegen den grompot, hnnnen ou- 
den weg weder op te wandelen , hij moge dan kwaad 
of goed zijn. in dit geval wordt het geneesmiddel in 
een allerbitterst pehiculum van coloquint en aloe toege- 
diend; de lijder walgt er tegen, en kan hetzelve niet 
innemen. 

De tweede wijze , naamlijk om de Deugd door eenen 
ernstigen en statigen redeneertrant aan het verstand aan- 
genaam te maken, is verre verkiesselijk boven de eerst- 
genoemde ; doch vereischt ook in 't algemeen zulke toe- 
hoorders , die alien zoodanig gestemd zijn , dat zij , met 
gemak , voorwerpen van een eenigzins afgetrokken en 
min zinnelijken aard , zoodanig oogenblikkelijk kuunen 
bevatten , dat ze inderdaad door de waarheden , die in 
het onderwerp dier voordragten gelegen zijn, getroffen 
worden. Doch zoodanige toehoorders hebben minst 
noodig om door de lessen der Deugd in hunnen pligt 
gehouden te worden, zij zijn reeds het beschaafde ge- 



D U i CH GRAMMA R. 187 

Titer e are many ways in which one can practise 
virtue ; many remedies with which one endeavours to 
cure the disordered mind , and to bring it back again, 
to a state of sanity , and these remedies are the les- 
sons which the moralizer offers to his auditors. One 
can , for example , grumble out those lessons in an an- 
gry and imperative tone. — ■ One can teach them in a 
grav3 and dignified manner , — and finally — one 
can bring them forward also in a merry and humorous 
manner. — The first method does little good , and 
creates more disgust than inclination for the practice 
of it , and this is sufficiently evident from the great 
ennui with which the auditors of such like blusteringly 
delivered lessons are affected,' whereby the lessons do 
not make the least impression upon them , as they are 
only longing that the speaker may come to a conclu- 
sion j and that they may have an opportunity to be set 
free from their state of imprisonment , and thus not 
best pleased with this grumbler , be enabled to follow 
their old course , which may be good or ill. In this 
case the remedy is administered in a most bitter veiii- 
culum of coloquinlida and aloes ; the patient loathes 
it , and cannot take it off. 

The second method, which is, to present Virtue to 
the understanding in an earnest and dignified manner 
of reasoning , is a far preferable manner to the first 
mentioned; but it requires generally such auditors, as 
are so adapted , that they can in an instant easily 
Catch objects of a somewhat abstract and less signifi- 
cant nature , and that they are really struck with the 
truths which lie in the subject of those propositions. 
But such auditors have least need of being reminded 
of their obligations by lessons of virtue ; these are al- 
ready the enlightened part of society , and that which 
is proposed to them is tlierefore more a catling to mind , 



188 PRAXIS ON THE 

deelte van liet menschdom , en het is dus meer eene herin- 
nering dan eene nieuwe leer, welke aan dezelven voor- 
gesteld wordt; hunne toevallige ongesteldheid is sleclits 
een haast voorbijgaande zielen Rhumatismus , die van 
z el ven uitsliji. 

In dit geval dient de Geneesiieer zijne zieken deszelfs 
middelen enkel in Ugno dulci , of in zoet hout, toe j 
inaar er blijft toch altijd een apothecars geurtjen aan , 
zoo dat alleen bedaarde lieden lietzelve kunnen gebrui- 
ken , omdat ze weten dat het voor hun welzijn dient ; 
maar ze zijn toch altijd blijd als 't binnen is, en zullen 
er , buiten noodzakeiijkheid ; niet naar verlangen. 

De derde , naamiijk de luchtige en vrolijke wijze om 
de beoefening der deugd onder de menschen algemeen 
te maken , is ineer nieuw en meer zeldzaam dan de 
twee opgenoemde wijzen ; doch zoo ze meer algemeen 
konde worden , zoude ze welligt van eenig nut voor de 
maatschappij kunnen wezen; waarvan men de volgende 
reden zou kunnen geven. 

De mensch schijnt ait zijn' aard tot vrolijke gewaar- 
wordingen genegen te zijn , en de Geneesheer dient in 
alles het gestel te besluderen , en de werkingen der na- 
tuur voorziglig te volgen ; van daar zou men kunnen 
afleiden , dat wanneer de Deugd op eene vrolijke wijze 
geleerd wierde ; dezelve meer aanneeming bij het meer- 
der gedeelte van het menschdom zoude aantreffen , en 
daardoor beter in het geheugen bewaard en opgevolgd 
worden. 

In dit laatste geval wordt de pil niet alleen verguld , 
maar zelfs in banketdeeg gewikkeld en zoo smakelijk 
gemaakt, dat zelfs kindereii en onberedeneerde mede- 
cijnhaters er trek in krijgen , en ze met gretigheid bin- 
nen slokken. 

Evenwel behoort men behoedzaatn te zijn in het 
voorschrijven van zoodanige pilleuj immers het zoete 
en sraakelijke kan de maag ligt hinder! ijk worden, en 



DUTCH liRA M M A B 189 

than a new doctrine , their casual indisposition is merely 
a temporary rhumatism of the soul, which cures of 
itself. 



In this case the physician administers to his patient 
remedies merely of ligno dulci , or liquorice root ; how- 
ever an apothecary* s scent always remains to be ad- 
ded , so that none hut sedate people can use it, as 
they know that it is for their advantage ; but they are 
also glad when it is down , and will not long for it 
except in cases of necessity. 

The third method , namely, the humorous and merry 
method of making the practice of Kirtue amongst men 
universal , is newer and more rare than the two fore- 
mentioned methods ; but if it could be more general , 
it might perhaps be of some advantage to society ; 
as to which , the following reasons may be adduced. 

Man appears by nature to be inclined to cheerful 
perceptions , and the physician ought to study the tem- 
perament in every particular, and cautiously to follow 
the operations of nature ; from this it may be inferred , 
that if virtue were taught in a witty manner, it would 
obtain a better reception with the greater part of so- 
ciety , and by this means would be fixed better in the 
memory and would be better followed. 

In this last case the pill is not only gilt , but is 
even rolled up in pastry and made so nice that even 
children and irrational detesters of physic take a liking 
to it , and swallow it greedily. 

However one ought to be cautions in prescribing 
such pills ; indeed tlie sweet and delicious portion can 
easily injure the stomach , and prevent the operation 



190 PRAXIS ON THE 

de daar ingewikkeld medecijn in hare werking belelten; 
men behoort zich derhalven ? in zware ziele-ziekten , 
daaxvan te onthouden , aizoo de maag dan reeds te 
zwak is om het vehiculum, behoorlijk te kunnen vertee- 
ren \ in zoo een geval zoude ik voor de tweede genees-^ 
wijze , en voor de pillen in zoet hout gewikkeld , plei- 
ten ; — maar de banketpillen , altijd voor de nog sterke 
lijders , en in de beginselen der ziekte , voorschrijven , 
wanneer s er wel eenige ongesteldheid in 't hoofd plaats 
heeft, maar dat het hart nog gezond is, — 

In die staat zijn echter de meeste geneesselijke zielen- 
ziekten , en daarom zouden die zoete lekkere pillen ook 
wel van het grootste en algemeenste gebruik zijn ; laat 
ons derhalven met deze opmerking onze tweede afdee- 
ling besluiten , en tot de derde en laatste overgaan , 
waarin wij zoodanig een aangenaam recept voor uw 
aller ooren zulleu trachten te bereiden. 

Onder al de ondeugden , welke in de burgerlijke 
maatschappij als hoogst schadelijk mag gerekend worden , 
en zelfs als eene besmettende JEpidemie grasseren , is 
zekerlijk de ongevoeligheid voor de ongemakken en 
moeijelijkheden onzer mederaenschen , vergezeld van eene 
Aristocratische heerschzucht , valschheid, bedrog, dwin- 
gelandij , entijrannij die wel de lastigste is \ wijl men daar- 
door eens anders welvaren stuit , en zich zelven in de 
onaangename gesteldheid brengt, van, in tijdvannood, 
ook bij anderen , geene hnlp te vinden , en in zijne be- 
hoeften te worden afgewezen. De ondeugden , welke 
men onaandoenlijkheid } ongevoeligheid y ongastvrijheid , 
en onmedogenheid noercit, behooren daarom bij uitzon- 
dering door den zielen - doctor , is het mogelijk , het 
eerst uitgeroeid worden , wijl ze den mensch voor brave 
en vaderlandslievende daden in de maatschappij onbe- 
kwaam maken, uit een schadelijk egoismus ontstaan, 
de Vrijheid overschreiden , de Broederschap tegenwer- 
ken , en daarbij niet onder bedwang der Wet vallen , 



DUTCH G K A M M A K. 191 

of tiie medicine in it ; one ought therefore to abstain 
from the use of it in severe diseases of the mind , as 
the stomach is already too weak to be able properly to 
digest the vehiculum ; in such a case I should prefer 
the second remedy , and vote for the pills made up in 
liquorice root : — but always prescribe the pastry pills 
for the severe sufferers , and in the early stages of 
diseases , when there is an affection in the head , but 
the heart still healthy. 

Most curable diseases of the mind are in this state , 
and therefore these sweet delicious pills might be of 
very great and general use; let us tlierefore conclude our 
second division with this observation , and pass on to 
the third , in which we shall endeavour to prepare such 
a prescription as shall sound agreeable to all your 
ears. 

The most troublesome of all the Vices , which are 
considered tJie most destructive in civil society , and 
which even rage like an Epidemic , is , certainly , an 
insensibility to the inconve ninences and difficulties of 
our fellow- creatures , accompanied by an aritocratic 
dominancy, falsehood, deceit , oppression , and tyranny; 
as one thereby checks the welfare of some , and brings 
oneself into the unpleasant condition of not finding 
help also from others , in cases of need , and of being 
turned away when in want. The vices which are ter- 
med insensibility , unfeelingness , inhospitality , and in- 
compassion , ought therefore particularly to be first ex- 
terpated by the physician of the mind , if it be possi- 
ble , as they make man unfit for honorable and pa- 
triotic actions in society , they originate in a hurtful 
egotism , violate liberty , destroy equality , oppose 
brotherhood, and, with all, do not fall under the ope- 
ration of the laws , and are of that nature , that no 
legal authority can avail against them , as belonging 



192 PRAXIS ON THE 

en van dien aard zijn, dat geen wettig gezag het tegen- 
deel derzelven bevelen kan , als behoorende onder de 
officio, imperfectae obligationis , of pligten van eerie on- 
volkomene verpligting. 

In een woord, de ongevoeligheid voor de klagten 
onzer natnurgenooten , besluit in zich de zaden van 
dwingelandij , despotismus, en de allerhateiijkste en ver- 
achtelijkste eigenbaat ; alhoewel ze , in derzelver begin- 
sel , meer aan eene zwakheid van het hoofd , dan wel 
aan een bederf van bet hart te wijlen is ; daar die on- 
gevoeligheid , de lijders in den aanvang voorkomt , ais 
ware zij een gevolg van hun meer doorzicht, voorzich- 
tig beleid en wijze oeconomie, 

A. Fokke Symons. 

Kwaadsprekendhei d. 

Er is, onder het beschaafde gedeelte des menschdoms, 
geen gebrek algemeener , dan dat der kwaadsprekend- 
heidj het heerscht in alle standen en kringen der za- 
menleving; het is van geene bijeenkomsten uitgesloten , 
en maakt niet zelden de levendigheid derzelve uit ; ja ! 
hoe zeer alle menschen zich vereenigen, om de kwaad- 
sprekendheid als eene hatelijke ondeugd te veroordeelen, 
er zal echter bezwaarlijk iemand gevonden worden, die 
zich aan dezelve niet heeft schnldig gemaakt , en niet 
gednrig , in meerdere of mindere mate , voortgaat zich 
met dit euvel te besmetten. De uitgestrektheid dezer 
ondeugd vertoont zich nog duidelijker , als wij in aan- 
merking nemen , dat zij zoo wel lijdelijk , als dadeiijk ge- 
pleegd kan worden ; dat men ook zwijgende kwaad kan 
spreken , en dat hij , die kwaad van een ander met ge- 
noegen aanhoort, terstond de medepligtige wordt van 
hem , die het verbreidt , vermits er welhaast geene 
kwaadsprekers meer zijn zouden, indien er geene men- 
schen waren, die het kwade liever hoorden, dan het 



DUTCH G 1U M M A K. 195 

to the officia imperfectae obligations , or duties of an 
imperfect obligation. 



In a word, a regardlessness to the complaints of 
our fellow creatures , embraces in it the seeds of ty- 
r limy , despotism , and the most hateful and most de- 
testable selfishness ; though , in its principle , it is to 
be ascribed more to a weakness of intellect than to a 
corruption of the heart ; as that regardlessness strikes 
the patients at first , as if it was a consequence of their 
greater penetration , prudent conduct , and wise eco- 
nomy. 



Slander. 

2 here is not, in the higlier class of society , a more 
common defect, than that of slander ; it prevails in 
every stage and circle of social intercourse ; it is pre- 
sent in every meeting , and often constitutes its viva- 
city ; nay ! though men generally agree in pronouncing 
slander as a destestable pice , it is still difficult to find 
any one who has not rendered himself culpable of it , 
and incessantly continued in some degree to corrupt 
himself with this evil. The extent of this vice shows 
itself still more evidently , when we consider that it can 
be practised as well passively as operatively ; that one 
caii slander tacitly, and that he who hears evil of 
another with satisfaction , becomes instantly the accom- 
plice of him who disseminates it ; for there would 
scarcely exist any more slanderers , if there were no 
men who prefer Jiearing evil to good; the receiver, 
seller , or exchanger of stolen goods is justly punislied 
as an abettor of the thief 



13 



194 PRAXIS ON THE 

goede : de heeler, verkooper, of verrailer van gestolen 
goederen wordt met regt als medestander van den dief 
gestraft. 

Wij zijn er echter ver van a£, de verb as te ring onzer 
menschelijke natnur zoo ver uittestrekken , dat zij eene 
eigenlijk gezegde vijandschap, van alien jegens alien, 
zou medebrengen : het is alleen verborgen hoogmoed 
en ijdelheid, dock die helaas ! dezelfde uitwerkselen 
hebben , als of het wezenlijke vijandschap ware, die ze 
voortbragt. Als wij van anderen kwaad zeggen of hoo- 
ren , smaakt onze eigenliefde het zoet van een kleinen 
trinmf, en heimelijk verheffen wij ons boven hem 9 
wiens gebreken of misslagen wij verbreiden , of door 
auderen hooren ophalen, Daarenboven , die bijzondere 
gebreken , die wij van onzen medeniensch hooren ver- 
melden , oi zelve in hem berispen , schijnen wij even 
daardoor te verfoeijen , en althans zelve er van vrij te 
zijn , waardoor, naar onzen waan , het denkbeeld on- 
zer zedelijke waardij in het oog van anderen moet rij- 
zen. Het is uit ditzelfde beginsel van hoogmoed, dat 
wij Hefst het kwaad hooren van menschen , die door 
hunne deugd , verdiensten of aanzien beroemd zijn , 
omdat wij hen daardoor, als 't ware, uit den kring 
hunner grootheid , nader brengen aan onze eigene nietig- 
heid, en zelfs , in zekeren zin , beter schijnen dan zij. 
Doch wat spreek ik van hoogmoed en eigenliefde ? veel 
geringer drijfveeren dan deze zijn genoegzaam , ora onze 
zucht tot kwaadsprekendheid uittelokken, de enkele be- 
geerte , om in de zamenleving mede te spreken , om aan 
den een* of ander* van het gezelschap te behagen , ja 
zelfs ! om het gesprek niet te doen verflaauwen , maakt 
van den mensch een verbreider van het kwaad gerucht 
zijns naasten ! 

J. H. van der Palm. 



]) I I C 11 Ci H A M M A K. 



jFVzr 6e t£ however from us , to extend the degenerate* 
ness of our human nature so far , that it compre- 
hends a literal enmity of all towards all others : it 
is merely a concealed -pride and vanity , but which 
alas ! has the same effects , as if it was in reality 
enmity which produced it* If we speak ill or hear 
ill of others , our self-love tasts the sweet of a little 
triumph , and we secretly raise ourselves above him, 
whose defects or faults we disseminate , or hear rela~ 
ted by others. Moreover , by seeming to detest those 
particular defects, which we hear related of our fel- 
low creature , or which we ourselves contemn in him , 
we seem at the same time to be free from them , by 
which means , according to our opinion, the idea of 
our own moral worth must be advanced in the eyes of 
others. It is from this principle of ostentation that we 
prefer hearing evil of those who are known for their 
virtue , services, or respectability , because , we thereby 
bring tJiem, as it were, from the circle of their elevation 
nearer to our own insignificance , and even in some re- 
spects seem to be better than they are. But what am 
I saying of pride and self-love ? far more trivial im- 
pulses than these are sufficient to raise our inclination 
to slander ; the abstract desire of saying something in 
company , in order to please one or another of the 
party , nay indeed ! in order to keep up the conversa- 
tion , makes a man a disseminator of the evil report 
of his neighbor. 



iw 



BIJV OEGSEL I 



Koninklijke, Adelijke, en Burgerlijke titels? 

met derzelver verkortingen , sop afe ze 

gehruikt worden in staatszaken, 

briefwisseling en JV*ieuwsb laden . 

NBL ( ) Titeh tusschen haakjes worden weggelaten 
bij de Engelschen. 

1. beteekent de aanspraak, 

2. . de titel of benaming in den zamenhang* 

3. . het onderschrift. 

£, , bet opschrift , de naam der plaais of de» 

persoons in bianco. 

Aan WlLLEM II, Koning der JVederlanden. 

1. Sire. 

2. Uwe Majesteit; en in den derden per soon , Hoogst- 

dezelve , of Zijne Majesteit. Z. M. 

3. Van Uwe Majesteit de gekoorzaamste dienaar en 

getrouwe onderdaan. 

4. Aan Zijne Majesieit, den Koning der Nederlanden* 

Aan den Kroonprins der JVederlanden. 

1. Doorluchtige Prins, of Vorst. 

2. Uwe Koninklijke Hoogbeid ; en in den derden per- 

soon, Hoogstdezelve, of Zyne Koninklijke Hoog- 
heid, Z. K. H. 



197 



APPENDIX 1 



Titles of Royalty, Nobility, and Civil Rank, 
with their abbreviations , as used in di- 
plomatic documents, correspondence, 
and Newspapers. 

NB. ( ) The Titles in parentheses are not used by 
the English. 

J, denotes the address , or commencement. 

2. ■■ the title or denomination in the connection, 

§ % -■■ — ■ . the subscription or conclusion. 

4. ■ the superscription , tlie name of the place 

or person in blank. 

To William II , King of the Netherlands. 

J. Sire. 

2. Your Majesty \ in the third person , His Majesty. 

3. Your Majesty s most Obedient Servant and Faith- 

ful Subject. 

4. To His Majesty , the King of the Netherlands. 

To the Oownprince of the Netherlands. 

J, Serene Prince. 

2. Your Royal Highness ; and in the third person , 
His Royal Highness. 



198 BIJVOEGSK L. 

3. Van Uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid de gehoorzaamste 

en onderdanigste dienaar. 

4, Aan Zijne Koninklijke Hoogheid den Prins van 

Oranje, Kroonprins der Nederlanden. 

Aan Prins Frederik , den Broeder des Konings. 

1. Doorluchtige Prins* 

2. Uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid ; en in den der den per- 

soon j Hoogstdezelve, of Zijrie Koninklijke Hoog- 
heid. Z. K. H. 

3. Van Uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid de gehoorzaamste 

en onderdanigste dienaar. 

4. Aan Zijne Koninklijke Hoogheid Prins Fuederik der 

Nederlanden* 

Aan de Koningin der Nederlanden. 

L Mevrouw. 

2. Uwe Koninklijke Majesteit: en in den derden per- 

soon , Hoogstdezelve , of Hare Koninklijke Hoog- 
heid. H. K. H. 

3. Van Uwe Koninklijke Majesteit de gehoorzaamste 

dienaar en getronwe onderdaan. 

4. Aan Hare Majesteit , de Koningin der Nederlanden. 

Aan de Kroonprinses der Nederlanden. 

1. Mevrouw. 

2. Uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid; en in den derden per- 

soon } Hoogstdezelve , of Hare Koninklijke Hoog- 
heid. H. K, H. 

3. Van uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid de gehoorzaamste 

en onderdanigste dienaar. 

4. Aan Hare Koninklijke Hoogheid, de Prinses van 

Oranje 3 Kroonprinses der Nederlanden. 

JfB. In den derden pvrsoon van het meervoud, Hunne 
Koninklpe Hoogheden. HE. KR. Hff. 



APPENDIX. 199 

3. Prom Your Royal Highnesses most Obedient and 

most Humble Servant. 

4. To His Royal Highness , tlie Prince of Orange , 

Crownprince of the Netherlands. 

To Prince Frederick, Brother of the Kin^. 

J. Serene Prince. 

2. Your Royal Highness ; and in the third person , 

His Royal Highness. 

3. Your Royal Highnesses Obedient and Humble Ser- 

vant. 

4. To His Royal Highness, Frederick, Prince of 

the Netherlands. 

To the Queen of the Netherlands. 

J. Madam. 

2. Your (Royal) Majesty ; and in the third person , 

Her Majesty. 

3. Your (Royal) Majesty's most Obedient Servant and 

Faithful Subject. 

4. To Her Majesty, the Queen of the Netlierlands. 

To the Crownprincess of the Netherlands. 

J. Madam. 

2. Your Royal Highness ; and in the third person , 

Her Royal Highness. 

3. Your Royal Highnesses most Obedient and most 

Humble Servant. 

4. To Her Royal Highness the Princess of Orange, 

Crownprincess of the Netherlands. 
JVB. In the plural , Their Boxjnl Highnesses, 



200 B IJ T E G S E L. 

Aan Graven. 

1. Hoog-Geboren. 
2. 3. Uw Hoog-Geboren , U. H. G. ; in den derden 
persoon , Zijn Hoog-Geboren, Z. H. G. 
4. Aan den Hoog-Geboren Graaf van — 

Aan Vrijheeren en Jonkheeren ; en Baronnen. 

1. Hoog Wel-Geboren Vrijheer of Jonkheer ; Hoog 
Wei Geboren Heer Baron van - — 
2. 3. Owe Hoog Wel-Geboren, U. H. W. G., enz. ; 
in den derden persoon, Zijn Hoog Wel-Gebo- 
ren , den Vrijheer of Jonkheer , J. H. of den 
Heer Baron van — 

4. Aan den Hoog Wel-Geboren Vrijheer of Jonk- 
heer ; of den Heer Baron van — 

Aan Vrouwen van Jiang. 
1. Wel-Edel Geborene Mevrouw, of Mevrouw. 

AAN ONGEHUWDEN. 

Wel-Edel Geborene Freule, of Mejufvrouw. 
% 3. Uwe Wel-Edel Geborene, U. W. E. G.; in den 
derden persoon , Hare Wel-Edel Geborene , 
H. W. E. G. 
4. Aan de Wel-Edel Geborene Freule , of Mevrouw — 

AAN ONGEHUWDEN. 

Aan de Wel-Edel Geborene Mejufvrouw — 

Aan eenen Minister van Staat ; Secretaris van 
Staat; Staatsraad ; Commissaris Generaal; 
Directeur Generaal ; Inspecteur Gene- 
raal; Luitenant Generaal. 

1. Hoog Edel Gestrenge Heer. 

2. Uwe Excellence , U. E. of Uwe Hoog Edel Gestrenge , 

U. H. E. G.j en in den derden persoon, Zijne 



APPENDIX, so? 

To Counts. 

J. [Most Highborn), My Lord. 
2. 3- Your Lordship ; in the third person , His Lord- 
ship , or the Count or Earl of — 
4. To the [Highborn) Count or Earl of — 

To Barons. 

J. Sir- (Very High Born Baron or Knight), 

2, 3. Your (High Bom) Honor ; in the third person , 
Baron — or Sir — Bt. 



4, To (the Very High Born) Baron — or Sir — 
Knight. 

To Ladies of Rank. 

J. (Very Noble Born Madam) Madam* 

TO VWMARRIEV, 

(Very High Born Miss,) Miss, 
2. 3. Your (High Born) Ladyship ; in the third per- 
son ; Her Ladyship. 

4. To (the Very High Born) Lady — or Madam — 

TO V1XM4KR1ED. 

To (the Very High Born) Miss — 

To a Minister of State ; Secretary of State ; Coun- 
cellor of State ; Commissary General ; Inspec- 
tor General ; Lieutenant General. 

J. (Very Noble and Equitable) Sir. 
2. Your Excellency , or (Noble and Equitable) Sir ', 
in the third person ; His Excellency. 



$02 B IJ V E G S E L. 

Excellence, Z. E. of Zijn tfoog Edel Gestrenge, 
Z. H. E. G. 

3. Van Uwe Excellence de gelioorzame dienaar. 

4. Aan Zijne Excellence, den Minister van, enz., den 

Directeur Generaal van , -— enz. enz. 

Aan de Staten Generaal. 

1. Edel Mogende Heeren. 

2. Uwe Edel Mogenden ; en in den derden persoon , 

Hunne Edel Mogenden, H. E. M. 

3. Van Uwe Edel Mogenden de gehoorzaamste en 

onderdanigste dienaar. 

4. Aan de Edelmogende Heeren, Staten Generaal. 

Aan de Staten eener Provincie. 

L. Groot Edel Aclitbare Heeren. 
2. 3. Uw Groot Edel Achtbaren; en in den derden 
persoon, Hunne Groot Edel Aclitbare, H. G. E. A. 
4. Aan de Groot Edel Aclitbare Heeren van de 
Staat van ~- 

Aan de Burgemeesters eener stad. 

1. Edel Achlbare Heeren, 
2. 3. Uw Edel Achtbaren, U. E. A.; en in den der- 
den persoon, Hunne Edel Achtbare , H. E. A. 
4. Aan de Edel Achtbare Heeren Burgemeesters 
der stad — enz. 

Aan de hooge Justitie-Collegien. 

1. Hoog Edele , Hoog Gestrenge ; de mindere Wei 
Edel Achtbare, 
2. 3. Uw Edele, Hoog Gestrenge, U. E. H. G. ; de 
mindere, Uw Edel Achtbare, U. E. A.; en 
in den derden persoon , Zijn Edel Hoog Ge- 
strenge, Z. E. H. G. 
4. Aan den Hoog Edelen , Hoog Gestrengen Heer i— 



APPENDIX. S03 



3. Your Excellency's Obedient Servant. 

4. To His Excellency , t/ie Minister of — etc. etc, 



To the States General. 

J. Noble and Mighty Lords. 

2: Your Noble and Mighty Lordships ; in the third 

person , Their Noble and Mighty Lordships. 
8' Your Noble and Mighty Lordships' most Obedient 

and most Mumble Servant. 
4. To the Noble and Mighty Lords, the States General. 

To the States of a Province. 

J. Very Noble and Worshipful Gentlemen. 
2. 3. Your (Noble) Worships ; in the third person , 
Their (Noble) Worships. 
4. To the (Noble and) Worshipful Gentlemen of 
the Province of — 

To the Mayors (Corporation) of a city. 

J. (Honorable) Worshipful Gentlemen* 
2. 3. Your (Honorable) Worships; in the third person, 
Their (Honorable) Worships. 
4. To the (Noble and) Worshipful Gentlemen , 
Mayers of the city of — 

To the High Courts of Justice. 

J. Most Honorable (Most Just), to subordinates, Very 
(Honorable) Worshipful. 
2. 3* Your Most Honorable ; or Worshipful; in the third 
person, Their Most Honorable; or Worsldpfuls. 



4. To (the Most Noble and Most Just) Mr. — 



304 BIJVOBGSE L. 

Aan de Generaal Majoors. 

1. Hoog-Edel Gestrenge Heer. 
2. 3. Uw Hoog-Edel Gestrenge, U. H. E. G, ; en in, 
den .derden per soon , Zyn Hoog-Edel Gestrenge, 
Z. H. E. G. 
4. Aan den Hoog-Edel Gestrengen, den Generaal 
Majoor , enz. 

Aan Kapiteins en Luitenants , alsmede aan 

Leden van Geregtshoven, Secretarissen , 

Regtsgeleerden enz. 

I. Wel-Edel Gestrenge Heer. 
% 3. Uw Wel-Edel Gestrenge , U. W. E. G. ; in den 

derden persoon , Zyn Wel-Edel Gestrenge , 

Z. W. E. G. 
4. Aan den Wel-Edel Gestrengen Heer, den Kapi- 

tein, enz. 

Aan Hoogleeraren in de Godgeleerdheid. 

1. Hoog Eerwaarde , Hoog Geleerde Heer. 
% 3. Uw Hoog Eerwaarde, Hoog Geleerde, U. H.E.H. G.; 

in den derden persoon, Zijn Hoog Eerwaarde, 

Hoog Geleerde , Z. H. E. H. G. 
4. Aan den Hoog Eerwaarden, Hoog Geleerden 

Heer, den Hoogleeraar, enz. 

Aan andere Hoogleeraren. 

1. Wei-Hoog Geleerde Heer. 
2. 3. Uw Wel-Hoog Geleerde , U. W.H. G.j en in den 
derden persoon, Zijn Wel-Hoog Geleerde P 
Z. W. H. G. 
4e Aan den Wel-Hoog Geleerde Heer , den Hoog- 
leeraar, enz. 



APPENDIX. 90S 

To Major Generals. 

J. [Most Noble and Just) Sir. 
2. 3. Your Most Noble) you ; in the third person , 
(His Most Noble) he, 

4. To (the Most Noble and Just) Mr. — Major 
General — 

To Captains , and Lieutenants , as also to Members 
of Courts of Justice, Secretaries, Law- 
yers , etc. 

J. (Very Honorable and Just) Sir. 
2. 3. You (Your Honor) ; in the third person , (His 
Honor) , he, 

4. To (the Very Honorable and Just) Mr. — 
or Captain. — 

To Professors of Theology. 

J. (Most Worthy, Most Learned) Sir. 
2. 3. You (Your Worthy and Learned Honor) 
Your Reverence ; in the third person , His 
Reverence. 
4. To (the Most Worthy and Most Learned) Mr. — 
Professor of, etc. 

To other Professors. 

J. (Very Honorable and Most Learned) Sir. 
2. 3« You (Your Very Learned Honor) ; in the third 
person , (the Very Learned Gentleman.) he. 

4. To (the Very Learned) Mr. — Professor of — 



20C BIJVOE.GSEL. 

Aan Predikanten. 

1. Wel-Eerwaarde , Zeer Geleerde. 
2. 3. Uw Wel-Eerwaarde Geleerde, U. W. E. G. ; in 
den derden persoon , Zijn Wel-Eerwaarde Ge- 
leerde , Z. W. E. G. 

4. Aan den Wel-Eerwaarden Zeer Geleerden Heer — 

Aan Advokaten en hoogere Geregts-ambtenaren. 

I. Wel-Edele Gestrenge Zeer Geleerde Heer, Mr* — 

2. 3. Uw Wel-Edel Gestrenge, U. W. E. G. ; in den 

derden persoon, Zijn Wel-Edel Gestrenge, 

Z. W. E. G. 

4. Aan den Wel-Edel Gestrengen , Zeer Geleerden 

Heer , Mr* — Advokaat (of Regter). 

Aan Geneesheeren. 

I. Hoog-Edele Zeer Geleerde Heer. 
2. 3. Uw Hoog-Edele Zeer Geleerde Heer, U. H. E. Z. G.; 
in den derden persoon, Zijn Hoog-Edele Zeer 
Geleerde , Z. H. E* Z. G. 
4. Aan den Hoog-Edelen Zeer Geleerden Heer — 
Med. Doctor. 

Aan eenen Heer; als , eenen Particulier , 
Handelaar , of Kassier t enz. 

1. Wel-Edele Heer. 
2. 3. Uw Edele, UEd. ; in den derden persoon, Zijn 
Edele, Z. E. 
4. Aan den Wel-Edelen Heer den Heer — of den 
Heere. 

Aan eenen Burger-man. 

1. Mijn Heer. 
2. 3. U; in den derden persoon, Hij. 

4. Mijn Heer — 0/Baas — (Meester) timmennan, enss. 



A P P U N 1) I X. 207 

To Clergymen. 

J. (Very) Reverend (and Very Learned) Sir. 
2* 3. You f or Your (Learned) Reverence ; in the third 
person , the Reverend Gentleman , or the Re' 
verend — 
4. To the ( Very) Reverend (and Very Learned) Mr. — 

To Barristers , Advocates , and Higher Justiciaries. 

J, (Very Just Learned) Sir. 
2. 3. Sir f (Your Learned Honor); in the third per- 
son , Mr. — or he* 

4. To (the Very Learned) Mr, — Advocate (or 
Judge.) 

To Physicians. 

J. (Very Learned) Sir, 
2. 3. (Your Learned Honor) ; in the third person , 
Dr, — or he. 

4. To (the Very Learned) Dr. — 

To a Gentleman : as , a Private Gentleman , 
Merchant, or Banker, etc. 

J. (Honored Sir or) Sir. 

2. 3. You (or Your Honor) ; in the third person, Mr. 

or he. 
4. To Mr. — (the Honorable Mr. — ) 

To a Trades-man or Citizen. 

J. Sir. 
2. 3. You; in the third person , Mr, — or / — B 
and he. 
4, Mr, — or — Carpenter 



206 A P P E N . D I X. 

KB. Achterde familienaamwordt MB. The christened paternel na- 

somtijds geplaatst de vaders doop me, abridged, is sometimes placed 

naam ♦ verkort , otn eene ver- after the family name, in order 

warring der personen van dezelve to avoid the confounding of in- 

familie te vermijden ; als , Ka- dividuah of the same name and 

rel Willemst Jz (Johan- family ; as, Charles W i l- 

nisEoon). I ems, Jz. {the son of John 

Willems). 



UPPEJTDIX II. 

It has been observed page J7* That words derived 
from the Latin , Greek, or from modern European 
languages , as the German , French , English, etc, are 
not readily incorporated into the Dutch language, and 
that } in the creation of new names , the compounding 
of words is more generally availed of; however , a 
prevailing fashion has given rise to the introduction 
and sanctioning of some words from these languages , 
and which are not inaptly termed bastard words, such 
as actie , ambitie , glorie , chemie , astronomie , geo- 
graphie , etc. which are infinitely more happily expres- 
sed by the words aandeel , share or action ; eerzucht , 
ambition; roem, glory; sclieikunde , chemistry ; sterre- 
kunde, astronomy , aardrijkskunde , geography. 

In the pronunciation of such like words , the follo- 
wing sounds are heard: 

Clia , sound ka , as in Clialdeers , Chaldeans. 

Ch , sounded sh , as in chirugijn , surgeon. 

Cie , sounds cie , as in beneficie . benefice. 

Gie , sounds ge , as in coilegie ; a college , asirologle, 
astrology. 

G, sounds soft like ge , as in chirugijn, surgeon; 
genie , enginery ; Georgius , George : except g in agent , 
agent ; in which it retains its guttaral sound as in 
Dutch. 



A P l> £ N D I X. 



209 



Ph , sounds like f, as in philosoof, philosopher. 

Til. In this combination , the h is mute , as in thee , 
tea; apotheek, apothecary. 

Tie, sounds she, as in natie , nation; ambit ie , am- 
bition. 



APPENDIX HI. 

Rules of Punctuation. 

The Rules of Punctuation , in all European langua- 
ges , are for the most part the same : in some minor 
particulars , punctuation is not resolvable into fixed 
rules but rests on the nature of the sentence and the 
judgment and taste of the writer. The following are 
the universally accepted general rules : 

Of the Comma, Coma (,). 

The comma f coma (,) marks the shortest rest , and 
is used as follows : 

J. IVlien a sentence is the nominative to a verb; 
as y dat hij u niet geroepen heeft, is mijne schuld, that 
he has not called you , is my fault. 

%. Before and after an interceptional phrase ; as , 
boosdoeners , welke verhard zijn in allerlei soort van 
misdaden , schroomen geenszins de wrekende arm der ge~ 
regtigheid , evildoers f who are hardened in every sort 
of crime , are no-ways afraid of the avenging arm of 
justice. 

3. Two or more nouns are separated by a comma j 
as } de moeder , vader , en het kind, zijn gestorven , 
the mother , father , and child , are dead; except when 
only two nouns are used and closely connected by a 
conjunction ; as , de jongen en het meisje zijn vertrok- 
ken , the boy and girl are gone; however } when the 

13 



210 APPENDIX. 

parts connected are long , a comma may be employed ; 
a<? , deugd te betrachten , en ondeugd te versmaden , 
zijn de kenmerken van een gezond verstand, to practice 
virtue , and reject vice, are the characteristics of a sound 
understanding ; also two or more adjectives belonging 
to the same substantive are subject to the same rule ; 
as , de werkzame , deugdlievende , godsdienstige man , 
the Industrious , virtuous , and pious man : except when 
connected by a conjunction ; as, de nederige en dappere 
de Ruiter , the humble and valiant de Ruiter. / also 
two or more verbs having the same nominative ; as , 
hij kwam , zag, en over won , he came, saw, and con- 
quered ; except when closely connected by a conjunc- 
tion ; as , gij leest en vertaalt wel , you read and write 
well. 

Adverbs are subject to the same rule ; as , een goed 
uitsiag hangt meestal van voorzigtiglijk , standvastiglijk 
en kracbtig te handelen , af , success generally depends 
on acting prudently , firmly , and vigorously ; except 
when closely connected by a conjunction ; as, hij schrijft 
duidelijk en fraai , he writes distinctly and beautifully* 

4. IVhen a conjunction is separated by a phrase 
from the word or sentence which it joins , it takes a 

comma before and after It ; as , zij gingen vroeg op 
reis , en, eer zonne ondergang , bereikten zij de stad, 
they set out early , and , before sun set , they reached 
the city. 

5. An addres Is separated by a comma ; as , mijn 
zoon , volg mijnen raad , my son , follow my counsel* 

6. Two or more nouns expressing the same object 
are separated by a comma ; as , Willem de II , Ko- 
ning der Wederlanden , Groot Hertog van Luxemburg, 
enz. , William the II , King of the Netherlands, Grand 
Duke of Luxembourg , etc ; except when only one ad* 
ditlonal noun Is used as a title ; as , Koning Willem , 
King William > de Raadpensionaris be Witt, the Coun- 
sellor of state de Witt. 



A V P E X 1) I X. 211 

7. Members of sentences , Connected by comparatives , 
are separated by a comma ; as , bij burgertwisten 
wordt vaak tneer bloed vergoten , dan bij geregelde oor- 
logeri , in civil wars there is often more blood slied , 
than in regular wars ; except when the sentences are 
short; as, dat glaswerk is minder schoon dan dit, 
that glass-work is less beautiful than this. 

8* Words placed in opposition to each other t or 
with some marked variety , require the comma between 
them; as, deze man is rijk , maar niet trotsch, this 
man is rich , but not proud, 

9. When a preposition is intercepted from the word 
to which it belongs , it is separated by a comma ; as , 
hij was tevreden met , en verheugd over uw gedrag , 
he was satisfied with , and rejoiced at your conduct. 

JO. A relative placed at a distance from its ante- 
cedent 9 is separated by a comma ; as , er is geene be- 
koorlijkheid in eeue vrouw , welke de plaats der deugd 
kan bekleeden , there is no charm in woman , that can 
supply the place of virtue ', but when the relative im- 
mediately follows the antecedent , the comma is not used I 
as , de grootste bekoorlijkheid welke eene vrouw bezit- 
ten kan , is , het betrachten der deugd , the greatest 
charm which a woman can possess , is , the practising 
of virtue. 

Of the Semicolon, Comapunt (;). 

The Semico Ion j Comapunt (;) is used when the members 
of a compound sentence have less dependance on each 
other than those connected by a comma ; as , wijsgeeren 
bekennen , dat de Natnur geene palen aan hare uitwerk- 
selen kent; dat zij onuitputtelijke , verborgene schatten 
bezit; dat kennis altijd voortgang zal maken ; en dat 
alle opkomende geslachten nieuwe ontdekkingen zullen 
doen , waarvan wij geen het minste denkbeeld hebben , 
philosophers assert that Nature is unlimited in her ope- 



212 APPENDIX. 

rations ; that she has inexhaustible treasures in reserve; 
that knowledge will always be progressive - and that 
all future generations will continue to make discoveries t 
of which we have not the least idea. 

The Colon, Bubbelde Punt (:). 

The Colon , Dubbelde Punt (:) is used to divide a sen- 
tence into two or more parts , less connected than those 
separated by a semicolon ; as , dit kan. ik u voorzeggen, 
dat het u-aan geene gelegenheid zal ontbreken , om bij 
ondervinding te leereti, hoe moeijelijk het is Salomo na 
te zeggen : mijne wijsheid bleef mij bij , this I can pre- 
dict to you , that you will not want an opportunity to, 
learn by experience , how dificult it is to repeat after 
Solomon : my wisdom did not forsake me. 

Of the Period, Punt (.). 

The Period, Punt (.) is used after an entire sentence; as, 
wij zijn voor het kwade , doorgaans meer , dan voor het 
goede gevoelig. TVe are generally more sensible of evil 
than good. 

JJie Period is also used after abbreviations ; as 
Z. M. Zijne Majesteit, H. M. Her Majesty, 



APPENDIX IT 

On the use of Capitals. 

In the use of Capitals the Dutch observe for the 
most part the same rules as the English ', as , 

J. At the commencement of a paragraph y or sen- 
tence ; and at the commencement of every line of poetry, 

2. The appellations of the Deity , as God., de Ai- 
re agtige ; Heilige Geest > etc. ' 

3. All proper names of persons , or places ; as , 



APPENDIX, US 

Johannis , Amsterdam, etc. but nouns and adjectives 
derived from proper names of places, are not often written 
with a capital , in Dutch , as is done in English ; as , 
een amsterdammer , an Amsterdammer \ een Hollander, 
a Dutchman > de Hollands die taal, the Dutch language. 

4. Pfords in the middle of a sentence , when re- 
markably emphatical , or the principal subject of the 
composition , may begin with a capital; as, Van En- 
geland willen wij niet eens kikken. Dat trotsche volk 
heeft geen beter gedagten van Hollandsch vernuft , dan 

wij van ik honde mij wel verzekerd , dat men, 

op alle onze geladene schepen , geen een eenige Baal 
met Hollandsche Boeken vinden zal. 

Bakker en Deken , 
Economische Liedjes. 

Of England we will not even mutter a word, That 
proud nation has no better idea of Dutch genius , than 

we have of / am well sure , that in all our 

laden ships , that not a single Bale of Dutch Books 
will be found. 



im 




LETTERKUNDE, 



EN 



iiiinim irsa^ 



DOOR 



DEN SCHRIJVER DEZES; 

In 2 Deelen, Post 8°. 

Waarvan de PROSPECTUS eerstdaags 
het Licht zal zien, 

kJj <vaei ae e% e*d aereea , en Z<*4 wttpien nop/ 
fay J/M/eenen'C<na warcKM tu/cteaeven. 



631 



f 









- 


















'V 






























c^ * 



